wNPd5Tk2

1osw.contacts2.selectfilter.export.hint=You can restrict set of contacts to be exported. <p>Choosing \u201CExport all\u201D will not apply any filtering.<br><br>\u201CUse current search\u201D will apply search conditions active to the start of export wizard.<br><br>\u201CUse current selection\u201D will only export contacts, selected to the start of export wizard.<br><br>\u201CUse saved search\u201D lets you to export only contacts, satisfying some saved search (you can also create one by using button to the left).
2osw.contacts2.selectfilter.export.usecurrentsearch=Use current search
3osw.contacts2.selectfilter.export.usesavedsearch=Use saved search
4osw.contacts2.selectfilter.export.useselection=Use current selection
5osw.contacts2.selectfilter.export.savedsearches=Select saved search:
6osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.importall=Import All
7osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.filtertype=Type of filter applied
8osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.hint=You can restrict set of contacts to be imported. <p>Choosing \u201CImport all\u201D will not apply any filtering.<br>\u201CMatching Selection\u201D option allows to update only currently selected records (if there are matching contacts in Outlook)<br>\u201CUse saved search\u201D lets you import only contacts, satisfying some saved search (you can also create one by using button to the left). \u201CUse current search\u201D works similar, but uses current search condition.<br><b>Important:<b> when using \u201CUse ... search\u201D options, contacts are first imported and then <b> updated contact is verified against search conditions (and deleted/restored if it does not match). This may result in rules / workflow actions triggered.
9osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.usecursearch=Import matching current search
10osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.useselection=Import matching selection
11osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.browseselection=Click <a class=pointable href={0}>here</a> to see selected IDs
12osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.usesavedsearch=Import matching saved search
13osw.contacts2.selectfilter.import.savedsearches=Select saved search:
14osw.contacts2.status.synchro.hint=This will synchronize Contacts with MS Outlook, according to your settings.<br><ul><li>To configure export to MS Outlook, click <a href="{0}">here</a>.<li>To configure import from MS Outlook, click <a href="{1}">here</a>.</ul><br>The synchronization will start automatically after 5 seconds
15osw.contacts2.status.caption=Status
16osw.contacts2.status.cantconvert=Can\u2019t convert {0} for field {1}
17osw.contacts2.status.skipped=Skipped
18osw.contacts2.status.updated=Updated
19osw.contacts2.status.created=Created
20osw.contacts2.status.duplicate=Duplicate
21osw.contacts2.status.error=Outlook Synchronization Error
22osw.contacts2.status.waiting=Waiting for input
23osw.contacts2.status.prompt1=Contact
24osw.contacts2.status.prompt2=already exists. Do you want to:
25osw.contacts2.status.prompt.dontask=Do not ask this question again
26osw.contacts2.status.prompt.create=Create New
27osw.contacts2.status.prompt.skip=Skip
28osw.contacts2.status.prompt.skipall=Skip All
29osw.contacts2.status.prompt.update=Overwrite
30osw.contacts2.status.export.hint=Export status
31osw.contacts2.status.export.done=Export complete.
32osw.contacts2.status.import.hint=Import status
33osw.contacts2.status.import.working=Importing, please wait...
34osw.contacts2.status.import.done=Import complete.
35osw.contacts2.status.import.syncdone=Synchronization complete.
36osw.contacts2.status.cantstart=Synchronization can\u2019t be started.
37osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.nooutlook=Outlook is not installed or is not accessible on this machine
38osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.mappingtableisnull=Mapping table is not selected. Please edit synchronization configuration, \u201CField Mapping\u201D tab to select or create field mapping table.
39osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.export.allskipped=The data mapping specifies that all subtypes of Contact are skipped on export. You may fix this error using the above hotlink for configuring export settings.
40osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.export.datasessionisnull=Export filter settings prescribe to use current search or selection, but this information is not available now.
41osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.export.ssearchidisnull=Export filter settings prescribe to use saved search, but saved search is unspecified or non-existent.
42osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.import.allskipped=The data mapping specifies that all MS Outlook folders are skipped on import. You may fix this error using the hotlink above for configuring import settings.
43osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.import.datasessionisnull=Import filter settings prescribe to use current search or selection, but this information is not available now.
44osw.contacts2.status.cantstart.import.ssearchidisnull=Import filter settings prescribe to use saved search, but saved search is unspecified or non-existent.
45osw.contacts2.newtable.name.caption=Table Name
46osw.contacts2.newtable.name.hint=Please give a name for a new table
47osw.contacts2.newtable.published.caption=Published
48osw.contacts2.newtable.published.hint=If you want this table to be accessible for other users, mark this checkbox
49osw.contacts2.newtable.title=New mapping table
50osw.contacts2.newtable.namealreadyused=The name you\u2019ve specified is already used. Please specify a different name
51osw.mapping.error.table.empty=Mapping table name is empty.
52osw.mapping.error.table.not.specified=Mapping table name is not specified.
53osw.mapping.failed.add.column=OSW failed to add mapping column.
54osw.mapping.failed.create.table=OSW failed to create mapping table.
55osw.mapping.failed.create.table.no.columns.specified=OSW failed to create mapping table \u2018{0}\u2019. No columns specified.
56osw.mapping.failed.drop.table=OSW failed to drop mapping table.
57osw.mapping.failed.get.table.list=OSW failed to get mapping table list.
58osw.mapping.failed.remove.table=OSW failed to remove mapping table \u2018{0}\u2019.
59osw.mapping.failed.retreive.table=OSW failed to retrieve mapping column list.
60osw.mapping.failed.retreive.table.info=OSW failed to retrieve mapping table information.
61osw.mapping.failed.save.table=OSW failed to save mapping table \u2018{0}\u2019.
62osw.mapping.table.not.exists=Mapping table \u2018{0}\u2019 does not exist.
63osw.mapping.table.not.set=Mapping table is not set.
64osw.servlets.getcontactmapping.no.mapping.tables=There are no mapping tables to get mapping.
65osw.servlets.savecontactmapping.no.data.tag=Command data tag does not exist or is empty.
66osw.vcardservlet.noid=Contact ID is not passed in the request
67osw.vcardservlet.notfound=Requested contact (or contact table) is not found
68patchcontrol.patch.description=Description
69patchcontrol.patch.id=Patch ID
70patchcontrol.patch.state=State
71patchcontrol.patch.applynow=Apply Now
72patchcontrol.patch.verifynow=Verify Now
73patchcontrol.patch.applied=Applied
74patchcontrol.patch.notapplied=Not Applied
75patchcontrol.project.check=Check
76patchcontrol.project.description=Description
77patchcontrol.project.id=KnowledgeBase ID
78patchcontrol.project.name=Name
79patchcontrol.project.patch=Patch
80patchcontrol.project.ressurect=Resurrect
81patchcontrol.project.type=Type/State
82patchcontrol.project.verify=Verify
83patchcontrol.project.version=Version
84patchcontrol.project.patcherdetails=View details
85patchcontrol.projects.caption=KnowledgeBase states
86patchcontrol.projects.hint=Status of patches
87patchcontrol.resurrectwarning=Warning: \u2018Ressurect\u2019 is for fixing false positive alarms ONLY. Please DO NOT use this button unless you know EXACTLY what you are doing. Ressurrected KB can still be corrupted (because the KB had failed to pass checking or patching) and its usage can lead to data loss and make investigation of failure more difficult or impossible. Ressurect KB?
88synccontrol.connections.caption=Remote ESA connections
89synccontrol.connections.hint=List of ESA connections
90synccontrol.connections.type=ESA Type
91synccontrol.connections.id=ID
92synccontrol.connections.configid=Config ID
93synccontrol.connections.externalsysid=External System ID
94synccontrol.connections.ip=IP Address
95synccontrol.connections.accepts=Accepts syncs
96synccontrol.connections.close=Close
97synccontrol.connections.status=Status
98synccontrol.connections.last.toesa=Last message to ESA
99synccontrol.connections.last.tosync=Last message to server
100synccontrol.syncs.caption=Sync processes
101synccontrol.syncs.hint=List of sync processes
102synccontrol.syncs.type=ESA Type
103synccontrol.syncs.configid=Config ID
104synccontrol.syncs.externalsysid=External System ID
105synccontrol.syncs.cancel=Cancel
106synccontrol.syncs.status=Status
107paymentsSetup.main.select.hint=Please select the account type. Credit card integration is provided through Authorize.net<br>Then click [Request Authorization]
108paymentsSetup.main.selectsystem.authorizenet=Credit Card
109paymentsSetup.main.selectsystem.paypal=PayPal
110paymentsSetup.main.selectsystem.reqauth=Request Authorization
111paymentsSetup.main.accountname.hint=Enter the account name obtained from the provider after clicking Request Authorization. This name will be shown when setting up a particular table in the system for handling transactions.
112paymentsSetup.main.accountname.label=Account Name
113paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.hint=Authorize.net account credentials
114paymentsSetup.main.paypalmerchantid.hint=Enter the Merchant ID or email of the Paypal account owner
115paymentsSetup.main.paypalmerchantid.label=Merchant ID
116paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.apiLoginID=API Login ID
117paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.transactionKey=Transaction Key
118paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.environmenttype=Environment Type
119paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.environmenttype.production=Production
120paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.environmenttype.production.testmode=Production Test Mode
121paymentsSetup.main.authNetAccountCredentials.environmenttype.sandbox=Sandbox
122permissions.action.subtype.acc_oth_cv=Access to Other people\u2019s custom views
123permissions.action.subtype.acc_oth_rp=Access to Other people\u2019s custom reports
124permissions.action.subtype.acc_oth_rp_py=Access to Other people\u2019s custom reports where Published=Yes
125permissions.action.subtype.acc_oth_ss=Access to other people\u2019s saved searches
126permissions.action.subtype.acc_oth_ss_py=Access to other people\u2019s saved searches where Published=Yes
127permissions.action.subtype.can_be_assigned=Can be assigned
128permissions.action.subtype.create=Create
129permissions.action.subtype.delete_others=Delete other people\u2019s records
130permissions.action.subtype.d_oth_with_ssearch=Delete other people\u2019s records that satisfy the saved search
131permissions.action.subtype.delete_own=Delete their records
132permissions.action.subtype.edit_others=Edit other people\u2019s records
133permissions.action.subtype.e_oth_with_ssearch=Edit other people\u2019s records that satisfy the saved search
134permissions.action.subtype.edit_own=Edit their own records that satisfy the saved search
135permissions.action.subtype.e_own_with_ssearch=Edit their own records
136permissions.action.subtype.export_multiple=Export multiple records to a file
137permissions.action.subtype.import_multiple=Import multiple records from a file
138permissions.action.subtype.mass_delete=Delete multiple records in a single operation
139permissions.action.subtype.massedit=Edit multiple records in the table and its subtables in a single operation
140permissions.action.subtype.mod_all_s_reports=Allow to modify/delete all saved reports
141permissions.action.subtype.mod_all_s_searches=Allow for all saved searches
142permissions.action.subtype.mod_own_s_reports=Allow group to modify/delete saved reports that they created
143permissions.action.subtype.mod_own_s_searches=Allow for their own saved searches
144permissions.action.subtype.show_in_main_tabs=Show table on a Toolbar Tab
145permissions.action.subtype.view_faq=View FAQs for the table
146permissions.action.subtype.view_faq_with_ss=View FAQs for the table that satisfy the saved search
147permissions.action.subtype.view_others=View other people\u2019s records
148permissions.action.subtype.v_own_with_ssearch=View their own records that satisfy the saved search
149permissions.action.subtype.v_oth_with_ssearch=View other people\u2019s records that satisfy the saved search
150permissions.action.subtype.view_own=View their own records
151permissions.action.subtype.mod_all_s_views=Allow for all views
152permissions.action.subtype.mod_own_s_views=Allow for their own views
153permissions.action.columns.edit_others=Edit Others
154permissions.action.columns.create=Create
155permissions.action.columns.edit_own=Edit Own
156permissions.action.columns.view_others=View Others
157permissions.action.columns.view_own=View Own
158permissions.action.no=no
159permissions.mutually.exclusive.error=Permissions "{0}" and "{1}" can not be set at the same time
160popup.go=Go
161popup.import=Import
162popup.new=New
163popup.search=Search
164repchartRun.excel=Excel
165repchartRun.html=Report
166repchartRun.image=Chart
167repchartRun.text=Text
168repcharts.calculators.average=Average of {0}
169repcharts.calculators.count=Number of {0}
170repcharts.calculators.formula={0}
171repcharts.calculators.maximum=Maximum of {0}
172repcharts.calculators.minimum=Minimum of {0}
173repcharts.calculators.sum=Sum of {0}
174repcharts.segment.null=[Other]
175repcharts.excel.totals=Total
176repcharts.data.hidden=There are {0} more records not shown here
177requiredfields.fields.after=after
178requiredfields.fields.asterisk=*
179requiredfields.fields.before=before
180requiredfields.fields.instructions=input&nbsp;instructions
181requiredfields.fields.label=label
182requiredfields.fields.place=Place
183requiredfields.fields.preview=Preview:
184requiredfields.fields.previewlabel=Field label
185requiredfields.fields.text=text
186requiredfields.fields.usecolor=Set the color of the label to
187requiredfields.fields.useinputbordercolor=Set the color of the input box border to
188requiredfields.userfields.hint=The following options are available for customizing \u2018required\u2019 fields in user <popup title="record.help.popup">records</popup>: <popup title="Generally the interface will look cleanest if only one of these options is selected.">   ...More Help</popup><br><br>- Location of *, either before, or after, the <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> label, <popup title="If a field is configured so that the field label is not displayed, the \u2018Required\u2019 symbol appears immediately before the data field.">   ...More Help</popup><br><br>- Additional text, either before or after the <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> label. Custom HTML text as well as plain text may be used.<br><br>- Set color and shade of <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> label. <help context="/index_Look_and_Feel.jspx.html"/>
189requiredfields.userfields.label=User-record fields
190requiredfields.wizardfields.hint=The following options are available for customizing \u2018Required\u2019 <popup title="field.help.popup">fields</popup> in Wizards:<br><br>- Location of *, either before, or after, the <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> label, or before or after the input instructions on the left side of wizard dialogs.<br><br>- Additional text, either before or after the <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> label, or before or after the input instructions.<br><br>- Set color and shade of <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> label. <help context="/index_Look_and_Feel.jspx.html"/>
191requiredfields.wizardfields.label=Wizard fields
192requiredfields.wizardfields.enabledecorationwhenview=Enable the Required field Decorations when field is in view mode
193reset.password.error.message=The login or email address that you entered is not a valid account
194reset.password.error.invalidcode=Invalid Verification Code
195reset.password.error.nocellphone=Cell phone is empty
196reset.password.error.nosmsaccount=No SMS account set
197rule.action.errors=Error running rule {0} ({1}) created by {2} (ID: {3}): {4}
198rules.action.actions=Actions
199rules.action.filters=Saved Searches
200rules.action.new.email=New Email
201rules.action.new.script=New Script
202rules.action.new.set=New Update
203rules.action.notfound=Action {0} can not be saved since it is removed
204rules.action.rules=Rules
205rules.actions.header.description=rules.actions.header.description
206rules.actions.header.name=rules.actions.header.name
207rules.bad.token=Wrong transaction token found in session. The form might have been submitted twice.
208rules.button.delete=Delete
209rules.button.edit=Edit
210rules.button.new=New
211rules.button.view=View
212rules.common.tool_tip=To set up rules, click <span class=SIBoldMark>Rules</span>. To edit or create actions, click <span class=SIBoldMark>Actions</span>. To create or edit a saved search, click <span class=SIBoldMark>Saved Searches</span>.
213rules.edit.errors=Error editing a rule: {0}
214rules.enable.wrong.selection.error=Select at least one rule
215rules.enable.enabled={0} rules enabled
216rules.enable.disabled={0} rules disabled
217rules.enable.enabling.confirm=Please confirm that you want to enable the $count rule(s) you selected.
218rules.enable.enabling.confirmmany=WARNING: You have selected <span class=SIBoldMark>$count rules</span>. Please confirm that you want to enable them.
219rules.enable.disabling.confirm=Please confirm that you want to disable the $count rule(s) you selected.
220rules.enable.disabling.confirmmany=WARNING: You have selected <span class=SIBoldMark>$count rules</span>. Please confirm that you want to disable them.
221rules.find.errors=Error finding a rule: {0}
222rules.header.activate=Activate
223rules.header.comments=Comments
224rules.header.id=Id
225rules.header.subtype=Table
226rules.prepare.errors=Error preparing a rule: {0}
227rules.remove.errors=Error removing a rule: {0}
228rules.schedule.date.hint=Rule\u2019s schedule date
229rules.schedule.quarterly=Quarterly
230rules.schedule.quarterly.start=Starting date
231rules.schedule.time.hint=Rule\u2019s schedule time
232rules.subtype.nonnum=\u2018objectID\u2019 should be a number: \u2018{0}\u2019
233rules.subtype.required=No \u2018objectID\u2019 parameter specified for the new rule
234rules.tabs.actions=Actions
235rules.tabs.conditions=Conditions
236rules.tabs.properties=Properties
237rules.tabs.schedule=Schedule
238rules.tabs.subtype=Table
239rules.tabs.type=Rule type
240rules.tool_tip=To define a new rule, click <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span>. To edit an existing rule, click <span class=SIBoldMark>Edit</span>.
241rules.update.errors=Error updating a rule: {0}
242rules.wrong.action=A wrong action value entered: \u2018{0}\u2019
243rules.wrong.forward=Wrong forward parameter value: \u2018{0}\u2019
244rulesCopy.startup.selectrule=Please select a rule that you want to replicate.
245rulesCopy.finish.copied={0} rules copied.
246rulesCopy.confirm.multiple=Are you sure you want to copy NNN selected rules?
247rulesCopy.confirm.single=Are you sure you want to copy the selected rule?
248rules2.actiontype.email=an Email
249rules2.actiontype.script=a Script
250rules2.actiontype.update=an Update
251rules2.actiontype.conversion=a Conversion
252rules2.actiontype.ifthen=an if/then
253rules2.actiontype.validate=a Validate
254rules2.actiontype.delete=a Delete
255rules2.actiontype.import=an Import
256rules2.actiontype.export=an Export
257rules2.actiontype.popup=a Pop-up
258rules2.actiontype.sync=a Synchronization
259rules2.actiontype.wmi=a WMI
260rules2.actiontype.attachprint=a Create Attached File
261rules2.actiontype.redlining=a Create Redlined File
262rules2.actiontype.pdfmerge=a Merge PDF Files
263rules2.actiontype.convdocformat=a Convert Document Format
264rules2.actiontype.linked=Linked Record
265rules2.actiontype.extension=Extension
266rules2.actiontype.unknown=an unknown type
267rules2.actiontype.wrong=You have requested {0} action to run for each selected record, but the Once Per Period option does not select any records. This is not valid. Please visit the Condition tab and choose the option to run the Action for selected records.
268rules2.actiontype.payment.wrong=Payment actions can not be run by rules
269rules2.actiontype.deleteaction.wrong.usage=If you are sure that Delete action is chosen correctly please note that it should be the only action in the rule with the Once Per Period option switched on. Please switch the option off or remove all actions besides Delete action
270rules2.linkedactiontype.wrong=An action of type {0} can not be used on record removing.
271rules2.paymentactiontype.wrong=Action {0} can not be used. Only "Recurring payment status" payment actions can be used in rules
272rules2.validateaction.cannotbeused=Validate action can not be run if asynchronous option is on
273rules2.wrong.frequency.hrs=A rule cannot be applied more often than once every {0} hours. The Schedule has been set to every {0} hours. With an enterprise license, the maximum frequency is once every 5 minutes
274rules2.wrong.frequency.minutes=A rule cannot be applied more often than once every {0} minutes. The Schedule has been set to every {0} minutes. With an enterprise license, the maximum frequency is once every 5 minutes
275rules2.inconsistentactionsset.confirm=You have requested that this import action run for each selected record, this may result in it running MULTIPLE TIMES during each period. Certainly a mistake, you should probably select the Once Per Period option on the Condition tab. Please click OK to change it to Once Per Period or Cancel if you are absolutely sure that it is set correctly.
276rules2.RulesEmailDispatcherBean.cant_get_CUSTOMER_EMAIL=The requested functionality depends on the field \u201CCUSTOMER_EMAIL\u201D. Please add this field before continuing.
277rules2.RulesEmailDispatcherBean.cant_get_last_updater=Cannot get last record updater.
278rules2.RulesEmailDispatcherBean.user_has_no_email_addrs=User <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> has no email addresses.
279rules2.action.createActions.hint=Use this tab to configure what should happen when the conditions specified for this rule are met. You can associate multiple actions with a rule.<br>An Email Action is used to send an email to someone.<br>A Script Action enables the execution of a custom script.<br>A Validate Action is used to generate an error message and reject the change if the record meets the search conditions specifed on the Condition tab<br>An If-Then-Else Action is used to execute a variety of actions based on specific different criteria (for instance, you might use this to set the value of the Assigned to field based on different field values in the record).<br>An Update Fields action is used to modify one or more fields in the selected record or in a linked record in another table.<br>A Data Conversion Action is used to automate the conversion of a record into records in other tables using already defined conversion rules.<br><br>Click the buttons on the right to create an action of the selected type, and then select which of the available actions are active. <br><br>Note: <span class=SIBoldMark>Rule Actions</span> (the actions you set up using this wizard) are always executed before <span class=SIBoldMark>Workflow Actions</span>.
280rules2.action.executeActions.hint=If you are choosing an email action, select whether multiple <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span> are collated and sent in a single email or whether a separate email is sent for each <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>. <BR>If you have included field variables in the email message and you choose to collate results, the first record\u2019s values will be used for the field variables.
281rules2.action.executeActions.label=Execute Actions
282rules2.action.executeActions.once=Collate into a single email
283rules2.action.executeActions.once_foreach=Send a separate email for each {0}
284rules2.action.create=Create {0}
285rules2.action.UpdateAction=Update Fields Action
286rules2.action.DataConversionAction=Data Conversion Action
287rules2.action.DeleteAction=Delete Action
288rules2.action.Rules2EmailAction=Email/SMS Action
289rules2.action.ConditionalAction=If-Then-Else Action
290rules2.action.ScriptAction=Script Action
291rules2.action.WMIActionAction=WMI Action
292rules2.action.ValidateAction=Validate Action
293rules2.action.PopUpAction=Browser Pop-up Action
294rules2.action.ImportAction=Import Action
295rules2.action.LinkedAction=Linked Record Action
296rules2.action.AttachPrintAction=Print Action
297rules2.action.RedliningAction=Document Comparison Action
298rules2.action.PaymentAction=Payment Action
299rules2.action.OCRAction=OCR Action
300rules2.action.ExportAction=Export Action
301rules2.action.SyncAction=Sync Action
302rules2.action.PDFMergeAction=Merge PDF Document Action
303rules2.action.ConvertDocFormatAction=Convert Document Format Action
304rules2.action.ExtensionActionAction={0} Action
305rules2.action.prefix.UpdateAction=U
306rules2.action.prefix.DataConversionAction=C
307rules2.action.prefix.DeleteAction=D
308rules2.action.prefix.Rules2EmailAction=E
309rules2.action.prefix.ConditionalAction=I
310rules2.action.prefix.ScriptAction=S
311rules2.action.prefix.WMIActionAction=W
312rules2.action.prefix.ValidateAction=V
313rules2.action.prefix.PopUpAction=B
314rules2.action.prefix.ImportAction=T
315rules2.action.prefix.LinkedAction=L
316rules2.action.prefix.AttachPrintAction=A
317rules2.action.prefix.RedliningAction=R
318rules2.action.prefix.PaymentAction=P
319rules2.action.prefix.ExportAction=X
320rules2.action.prefix.SyncAction=Sy
321rules2.action.prefix.OCRAction=O
322rules2.action.prefix.PDFMergeAction=M
323rules2.action.prefix.ConvertDocFormatAction=F
324rules2.action.prefix.ExtensionActionAction=ext
325rules2.action.text.chooseaction=Select Action
326rules2.action.text.deleteaction.exists=Delete action exists.
327rules2.action.text.deleteaction.record=Delete the record itself
328rules2.action.text.deleteaction.record.hint=Use this option to delete the record itself
329rules2.action.text.deleteaction.history=Delete History entries
330rules2.action.text.deleteaction.history.hint=Use this option to delete any history entries.
331rules2.action.text.deleteaction.keepcreation=Do not delete the first history entry for record creation
332rules2.action.text.deleteaction.all.pref=All but the most recent
333rules2.action.text.deleteaction.all.suff=history entries per record
334rules2.action.text.deleteaction.rule=All history entries created by rule
335rules2.action.text.deleteaction.empty=Delete empty history entries, i.e those where no tracked fields were modified
336rules2.action.text.deleteaction.old.pref=All history entries more than
337rules2.action.text.deleteaction.old.suff=old
338rules2.actionList.active=Active Actions
339rules2.actionList.available=Available Actions
340rules2.actionList.add=Add
341rules2.actionList.edit=Edit
342rules2.actionList.moveup=Move Up
343rules2.actionList.movedown=Move Down
344rules2.actionList.inactive=Inactive Actions
345rules2.actionList.remove=Remove
346rules2.actionList.selected=Selected Actions
347rules2.actionList.order=the order of actions
348rules2.actionList.updateaction.title=Update Fields Actions
349rules2.actionList.conversionaction.title=Data Conversion Actions
350rules2.actionList.deleteaction.title=Delete Actions
351rules2.actionList.emailaction.title=Email Actions
352rules2.actionList.conditionalaction.title=If-Then-Else Actions
353rules2.actionList.legend.title=Legend
354rules2.actionList.scriptaction.title=Script Actions
355rules2.actionList.validateaction.title=Validate Actions
356rules2.actionList.popupaction.title=Browser Pop-up Actions
357rules2.actionList.wmiaction.title=WMI Action
358rules2.actionList.importaction.title=Import Actions
359rules2.actionList.exportaction.title=Export Actions
360rules2.actionList.paymentaction.title=Payment Actions
361rules2.actionList.linkedaction.title=Linked Record Actions
362rules2.actionList.attachprintaction.title=Create Print Actions
363rules2.actionList.redliningaction.title=Create Document Comparison Actions
364rules2.condition.confirm=Based on your selections, this rule will never be executed. If this is not what you really want, please select the <span class=SIBoldMark>Condition</span> tab and click checkboxes to specify the conditions under which the rule will be active.
365rules2.condition.nosearchselected=No Search Selected
366rules2.condition.selectSearch=Please select a search condition from the list.
367rules2.condition.warning=Note: To ensure that this rule is only applied to {0} records, the saved search must contain the condition: and {1} = {2}.
368rules2.conditiontype.comment.group1=When a {0} is created/edited/deleted.
369rules2.conditiontype.comment.group2=At selected time intervals.
370rules2.conditiontype.comment.group3=When some summary condition based on multiple {1} has/hasn\u2019t been met.
371rules2.conditiontype.group1.hint=Select one of the three available rule types that define how the rule is applied.<br><Br> This rule type is event-specific and is triggered when a record is created, edited or deleted.<br><br>If "Run in background" is checked, the rule will run asynchronously and non-interactively. The asynchronous option prevents the rule from blocking invalid edits, so it should not be used for validation rules.<br><br>The &quot;Disable Loop Protection&quot; option disables the loop prevention mechanism for this rule. Any rules that (possibly indirectly) triggered this rule can be retriggered. Use with care and only if you specifically need to create a loop.
372rules2.conditiontype.group1.label=Apply this rule:
373rules2.conditiontype.group2.hint=This rule type is time-based and runs a search at specified time intevals. This rule type is useful when you need to take an action, such as sending a notification, if something that should have happened is still waiting. For example, a rule might send email to the technical support manager if a case has been open for more than two days.
374rules2.conditiontype.group3.hint=This rule type has the features of the time-based rule type and allows you to perform a test based on multiple records. For example, a rule might send an email to the sales manager if someone has closed more than $1,000,000 in total business over the past quarter.
375rules2.conditiontype.runinbackground=Run in background
376rules2.conditiontype.clearcontext=Disable Loop Protection
377rules2.datatype.description.hint=Please enter a description for this rule to help you remember its purpose. <help context="/index_Rule.jspx.html"/>
378rules2.datatype.description.label=Description
379rules2.datatype.objectType.hint=Select the table that this rule should apply to.
380rules2.datatype.modificationinfo.hint=This item shows who last updated the rule and the date it was updated
381rules2.datatype.modificationinfo.label=
382rules2.datatype.modificationinfo.updated=Updated by <b>{0}</b> at <b>{1}</b>
383rules2.datatype.processChildSubtypes.hint=Select whether the rule is applied to just the selected table or the selected table and its children (objects down the table hierarchy).
384rules2.datatype.processChildSubtypes.label=Apply Rule to subtables?
385rules2.datatype.processChildSubtypes.text.no=No
386rules2.datatype.processChildSubtypes.text.yes=Yes
387rules2.datatype.enabled.hint=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Yes</span> if you want to enable rule. Select <span class=SIBoldMark>No</span> if you want to disable rule.
388rules2.datatype.enabled.label=Rule is enabled
389rules2.datatype.run.label=Run the rule now
390rules2.datatype.saveandrun.label=Save &amp; Run Now
391rules2.datatype.run.hint1=You can test test timer based rules without waiting for their scheduled run time. Click this button to run the rule now.
392rules2.datatype.run.hint2=You can test timer based rules without waiting for their scheduled run time. Click the button to save and run the rule now.
393rules2.datatype.run.completed=Completed, actions have been called {0} time[s]
394rules2.datatype.run.failed=Failed:
395rules2.running=Running rule {0} against {1} records
396rules2.grouping.field=Field:
397rules2.grouping.hint=Please select a field by which <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> will be grouped.
398rules2.grouping.label=Group by
399rules2.groupings.groupingsList.hint=Set the grouping of <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> in the rule. If you create several groupings, they will be applied sequentially, in the order selected here.
400rules2.groupings.groupingsList.label=Group data by:
401rules2.groupingList.delete=Delete
402rules2.groupingList.edit=Edit
403rules2.groupingList.empty=No groupings defined
404rules2.groupingList.new=New
405rules2.groupingList.title=Grouping
406rules2.modCondType.bottom.hint=Select a saved search condition that the record being created/modified should meet in order for the rule to be applied. If none of the existing saved searches meet your needs, create a new one by clicking <span class=SIBoldMark>Create New Search</span>. If no search is selected, all records will provoke the rule.
407rules2.modCondType.bottom.text.label=Search Condition
408rules2.modCondType.bottom.text.or=or
409rules2.modCondType.bottom.text.savedsearches=Select saved search:
410rules2.modCondType.bottom.text.savedsearches.createNew=Create New Search
411rules2.modCondType.bottom.text.savedsearches.edit=Edit
412rules2.modCondType.deleted.warning=Running a rule upon deletion of records will greatly slow down the speed of deletion.  Are you sure you want to turn this on?
413rules2.modCondType.middle.text.api=API
414rules2.modCondType.middle.text.comment=Only when the change occurs by means of:
415rules2.modCondType.middle.text.email=Email
416rules2.modCondType.middle.text.web=Web
417rules2.modCondType.top.hint=These settings allow you to control when the rule is applied. For example, if you select <span class=SIBoldMark>Edited</span> and <span class=SIBoldMark>Web</span>, the rule will only be applied if a <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> was edited using the Web interface.<br><br>EMAIL Triggers: All updates from inbound email.<br><br>WEB Triggers: User interactions with records through the web portal; REST and Web Service calls, because the WS call creates a user session and performs edits on behalf of a named user.<br><br>API Triggers include: Record edits by a rule or workflow action; Automatic calculation field updates; Synchronization actions, including automatically triggered updates such as creation of Twitter responses; Record creation in cases where the user does not interact with the record form, for example during data imports from files and silent conversion actions.<br><br><br>Note: Since executing rules is counted as an API trigger, deselecting the API checkbox will prevent the changes made by other rules from triggering this rule. This is particularly useful for rules based on updates by specific individuals, for instance rules based on the customer updating the record.  When rules cause field changes to a record they are stored as modifications <b>by the individual who last updated the record</b>.  If you have a rule that is meant to be triggered when the customer updates the record, you will want to disable it from running on API updates so that the rule is not falsely triggered by the execution of other rules updating the record in the name of that user.
418rules2.modCondType.top.label=Apply Rule:
419rules2.modCondType.top.text.comment=When a {0} is
420rules2.modCondType.top.text.created=Created
421rules2.modCondType.top.text.deleted=Deleted
422rules2.modCondType.top.text.edited=Edited
423rules2.modCondType.top.text.edited.include=Include edits made by other rules during record creation
424rules2.modScheduleType.active.hint=Select the time of the day when this rule is active.  You can define the rule to run only during the working hours of a particular team.  This can be very useful if , for instance, you only want to page a technician when an issue is submitted during working hours.  You can set up teams whose sole purpose is to define a set of working hours that you want to apply in rules.
425rules2.modScheduleType.active.label=Rule is Active
426rules2.modScheduleType.active.text.allTimes=Always
427rules2.modScheduleType.active.text.setWorkingHours=Set working hours
428rules2.modScheduleType.active.text.outside.workTime=Only outside of the working hours of this team:
429rules2.modScheduleType.active.text.workTime=Only during working hours of this team:
430rules2.save.text=When saving a record 
431rules2.otherScheduleType.repeat.asConditionIsTrue=for as long as the condition remains true
432rules2.otherScheduleType.repeat.executeRule=Apply Rule
433rules2.otherScheduleType.repeat.hint=This option applies only to rules of the 3rd type in which summary conditions must be met.  For regular time-based rules, it should be set to for as long as the condition remains true.  For summary rules, if this is set to \u201Conce\u201D, the rule will only be applied once while it remains true. For example, if there is a rule such as \u201CSend a message if the number of open issues exceeds 10\u201D, a message will be sent when the number reaches 11, but no more messages will be sent unless the number of open issues drops to 10 or below and then rises again.
434rules2.otherScheduleType.repeat.label=Frequency
435rules2.otherScheduleType.repeat.once=once
436rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.hint=Specify how often this rule is applied.
437rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.label=Apply Rule
438rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.dayofmonth=day of the month
439rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.workDays=Daily excluding weekends
440rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.everyday=Daily
441rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.hourly=Hourly
442rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.quarterly=Quarterly
443rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.every=Every
444rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.frequenceErr=A rule cannot be applied more often than once every {0} minutes. The Schedule has been set to every {0} minutes.
445rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.monthly=Monthly on
446rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.1=Sunday
447rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.2=Monday
448rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.3=Tuesday
449rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.4=Wednesday
450rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.5=Thursday
451rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.6=Friday
452rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitNumbForWeekly.7=Saturday
453rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitTypeForEvery.1=minutes
454rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitTypeForEvery.2=hours
455rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitTypeForEvery.3=days
456rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitTypeForEvery.4=weeks
457rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitTypeForEvery.5=months
458rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.tmUnitTypeForEvery.6=years
459rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.weekly=Weekly on
460rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.startTime=at {0}
461rules2.otherScheduleType.schedule.text.startTime.hour=at :{0} minutes
462rules2.otherScheduleType.startTime.hint=Select the starting time to apply this rule. For example, if you specify that a rule should run weekly on Mondays and the start time is 3:25am, it will run each Monday at 3:25am. <br> Values in the disabled fields are ignored.  For example, if a Rule is applied every 'X' hours, then the drop-down list for Hour and AM/PM will be disabled and not used. Only the minute  field will be used as 'minute_of_the_hour' for schedule.
463rules2.otherScheduleType.startTime.label=Start time
464rules2.schedule.priority.hint=Rules that are triggered by events such as a record being edited are executed in numerical order starting from the lowest numbered rule.  The order can be important - for instance, you might have one rule that changes the state of a closed ticket to reopened when a customer updates it by email and another rule that emails the assignee upon any customer modification.  You would want the rules to trigger in this order so that the email to the assignee contains the correct status information.  You can provide a number here to indicate the relative order of this rule. Numbers do not need to be consecutive, just ordered.
465rules2.schedule.priority.label=Priority
466rules2.summaryCondType.number.equals=equals, =
467rules2.summaryCondType.number.ge=greater or equal, >=
468rules2.summaryCondType.number.gt=greater than, >
469rules2.summaryCondType.number.hint=Specify how many <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> must meet the above search condition for the rule to be applied.
470rules2.summaryCondType.number.label=Number
471rules2.summaryCondType.number.le=less or equal, <=
472rules2.summaryCondType.number.lt=less than, <
473rules2.tab.action=Action
474rules2.tab.condition=Condition
475rules2.tab.conditiontype=Rule Type
476rules2.tab.datatype=General
477rules2.tab.schedule=Schedule
478rules2.timeCondType.condition.hint=Select a saved search condition that should be met in order for the rule to be applied. If none of the existing conditions meets your needs, create a new search condition by clicking <span class=SIBoldMark>Create New Search</span>.
479rules2.timeCondType.condition.label=Condition
480rules2.timeCondType.option.hint=Choose an option
481rules2.timeCondType.option.label=Options
482rules2.timeCondType.runonce=Run once per scheduled time interval
483rules2.timeCondType.runperrecord=Run once for each record found by search
484rules2.summaryCondType.runonce=Execute Actions once if the search is met
485rules2.summaryCondType.runperrecord=Execute Actions once for each record found by search
486rulesCreateConversionAction.general.name.hint=Enter a name for the conversion action you are configuring.
487rulesCreateConversionAction.general.name.label=Action Name
488rulesCreateConversionAction.general.description.hint=Provide a description of this conversion action to help you remember its purpose.
489rulesCreateConversionAction.conversion.selection.error=Select at least one conversion
490rulesCreateConversionAction.general.description.label=Action Description
491rulesCreateConversionAction.options.options.hint=Determine how the conversion action should work.<br><br>Choosing the first option will create the new record(s) silently in the background without any user intervention.<br><br>Choosing the 2nd option will bring up both the conversion dialog, with any fields to be filled in, and the followup confirmation when the conversion is completed, just as if the user manually clicked the conversion button.  Note that if you choose this option, the user's permissions will control what fields he sees and can edit, whereas the other two options use admin permissions for the conversion.<br><br>Choosing the 3rd option will run the conversion automatically and then bring up the confirmation screen listing the hyperlinked IDs of the records that have been created so the user may go directly to edit those records.
492rulesCreateConversionAction.options.multiConvertField.hint=If you select a field here that holds multiple attached files or multiple values, the conversion will create a record for each file or each value of the field.<br><br>                                                           This option only works in a conversion rule that runs silently without opening up multiple windows.  It is an ideal way to handle inbound attached files that should be mapped into a documents table, creating one record per file.
493rulesCreateConversionAction.options.multiConvertField.label=Create one record for each value in this field:
494rulesCreateConversionAction.options.options.label=The conversion should run:
495rulesCreateConversionAction.options.silently=Silently with no confirmation
496rulesCreateConversionAction.options.ignoreErrors=Do not report errors in GUI
497rulesCreateConversionAction.options.interactively=Interactively, showing user the conversion dialog and the results
498rulesCreateConversionAction.options.interactively.with.editor=Interactively, showing user the new record page
499rulesCreateConversionAction.options.automatically=Automatically, but showing the user the confirmation screen
500rulesCreateConversionAction.options.refreshparent=Update the parent window after the conversion is complete
501rulesCreateEmailAction.content.emailbody.hint=Enter email message here
502rulesCreateEmailAction.content.emailbody.label=Email body
503rulesCreateEmailAction.content.emailbody.usehtmleditor=Use HTML editor
504rulesCreateEmailAction.content.feedback.hint=This setting allows you to ask the customer to complete a satisfaction survey. Depending on the configuration that you choose, this may update the <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> or simply store the information in another table.
505rulesCreateEmailAction.content.feedback.label=Include a hyperlink for customer feedback
506rulesCreateEmailAction.content.hotlink.hint=This setting allows you to include a hyperlink that will open the <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> for editing when clicked.
507rulesCreateEmailAction.content.hotlink.label=Include a hyperlink to edit the {0}
508rulesCreateEmailAction.content.show=Show
509rulesCreateEmailAction.content.solution.hint=This setting allows you to include the results of searching the KnowledgeBase for possible answers to the user\u2019s problem
510rulesCreateEmailAction.content.solution.label=Include possible solutions
511rulesCreateEmailAction.email.table.hint=Click <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span> to create a new message, click <span class=SIBoldMark>Delete</span> to delete a message, or select an existing message to be edited.
512rulesCreateEmailAction.general.description.hint=Provide a description of this email/SMS action to help you remember its purpose.
513rulesCreateEmailAction.general.description.label=Action Description
514rulesCreateEmailAction.general.background.hint=Emails/SMS are normally prepared and sent in the background, and this may take some time. If you are running another action immediately after an email action that may modify the data being sent in the email/SMS, you can choose this option to ensure that the email/SMS is prepared with its appropriate field values before the next action runs. Unless there is a need for precise control, it is best to keep the default option of emails/SMS running in the background.
515rulesCreateEmailAction.general.background.label=Background processing type
516rulesCreateEmailAction.general.background.label.enabled=Prepare and send emails/SMS in the background
517rulesCreateEmailAction.general.background.label.disabled=Prepare email/SMS in the foreground (before running the next action)
518rulesCreateEmailAction.general.enterdescription=Enter a brief description of the action to help you remember its purpose.
519rulesCreateEmailAction.general.entername=Enter a name for the action you\u2019re creating.
520rulesCreateEmailAction.general.name.hint=Enter a name for the email/SMS action you are configuring.
521rulesCreateEmailAction.general.name.label=Action Name
522rulesCreateEmailAction.general.type.hint=You can select if the action will send Email or SMS
523rulesCreateEmailAction.general.type.label=Choose delivery type:
524rulesCreateEmailAction.general.type.email=Send Email
525rulesCreateEmailAction.general.type.sms=Send SMS
526rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendToCustomer=The customer (the person who emailed or called in the {0})
527rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendToEmailFields=The addresses given in the fields:
528rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendToEmails=The following email addresses:
529rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendToTeams=The following teams:
530rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendToUsers=The following users:
531rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendto.hint=Select who receives the email. Use the next dialog to define the email\u2019s content.<BR><BR>If you specify that email should be sent based on fields in the <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> and this rule is being executed as a result of a summary condition based on multiple <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span> (the third option in the Condition Type dialog), the system will use the first address in the matching <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span>.
532rulesCreateEmailAction.recipients.sendto.label=Send email to:
533rulesCreateEmailAction.tab.content=Email Content
534rulesCreateEmailAction.tab.email=Message
535rulesCreateEmailAction.tab.email.select=Please select a message that will be sent when this email action executes.
536rulesCreateEmailAction.tab.general=General
537rulesCreateConversionAction.tab.general=General
538rulesCreateConversionAction.tab.conversion=Conversion
539rulesCreateConversionAction.tab.options=Options
540rulesCreateEmailAction.tab.recipients=Email Recipients
541rulesCreateEmailAction.wizard.title=Configure Email Action
542paymentaction.wizard.title=Configure Payment Action
543rulesCreateConversionAction.wizard.title=Configure Data Conversion Action
544rulesemail.confirm.delete=Please confirm that you want to delete the email you selected.
545rulestable.actiondescription.updateaction=Update action:
546rulestable.actiondescription.ocraction=OCR action:
547rulestable.actiondescription.ocraction.details=Source field: {0}, target field: {1}
548rulestable.actiondescription.updateaction.updatefields=Update fields:
549rulestable.actiondescription.updateaction.newvalues=New values:
550rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction=Email action:
551rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.to=To:
552rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.sendtocustomer=the person who emailed or called in the
553rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.sendtoteams=teams
554rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.sendtousers=users
555rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.sendtoemails=emails
556rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.sendtofields=fields
557rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.subject=Subject:
558rulestable.actiondescription.emailaction.message=Message:
559bshscript.wizard.title=Bean Shell
560bshscript.wizard.execute=Execute
561bshscript.wizard.accessdenied=BeanShell console can only be used by {0} administrators
562bshscript.wizard.hint=This wizard allows full control over Java&#8482; Virtual Machine that runs {0}&reg;. For example, if the name is known any class may be instantiated and its methods invoked. This allows deep runtime manipulation of parameters and instrumentation.<br><br>Please be careful. This is a powerful feature, yet using it can potentially result in a system crash or data corruption.
563bshscript.wizard.keep=Keep box content unchanged after run
564bshscript.wizard.html=display result in HTML
565bshscript.wizard.history.current=Keep/Restore last script
566bshscript.wizard.history.list=History
567bshscript.wizard.history.label=run saved command
568bshscript.invalidscript.norunscriptimpl=Your script {0} must implement method \ncom.supportwizard.actions2.interfaces.ScriptOutput runScript(com.supportwizard.actions2.interfaces.ScriptInput input)\nto be run as a part of an action.
569bshscript.invalidscript.nooutput=Your script {0} should return non-null instance of com.supportwizard.actions2.interfaces.ScriptOutput\n It could be created by calling createOutput() method on com.supportwizard.actions2.interfaces.ScriptInput instance
570bshscript.evaluation.error=Error running BeanShell script {0}: {1}
571externalscript.io.errorcreatingxml=Error creating {0}.xml: {1}
572externalscript.io.errorwritinginput=Error writing script input to {0}: {1}
573externalscript.io.errorreadingoutput=Error reading script report from {0}: {1}<br> {2}
574externalscript.io.errorexecuting=Error executing command {0}: {1}
575externalscript.malformedoutput=Error reading script report from {0}: {1}<br> {2}
576externalscript.timeout=Timed out executing command {0}: {1}
577externalscript.invalidexitcode=Invalid script exit code from {0}: {1}, stdout: \u201C{2}\u201D, stderr: \u201C{3}\u201D
578externalscript.perlnotavailable=There is no perl available, paths tried to use: [{0}] and [perl]. You should have perl installed and available in your system to run perl scripts.
579externalscript.pythonnotavailable=There is no python available, paths tried to use: [{0}] and [python]. You should have python installed and available in your system to run python scripts.
580updateaction.generic.message=Error running update action: {0}
581updateaction.relink.failed=The source record matching field: {0} could not be reimported for records with ID {1} because there was more than one matching record. All other records and actions were run.
582assignaction.noassignedfield=Cannot assign the group without an \u2018assigned\u2019 field
583conditional.action.blocked.recursion.msg=Too many nested conditional actions called. Only {0} nested actions allowed. Please, revise your actions configuration.
584scriptaction.action.blocked.msg={0} <br>Action: {1}
585scriptaction.action.blocked.msg.noredirecturl={0} <br>Action: {1}; Warning! Redirect URL was not set by script!!!
586scriptaction.action.ruleid.msg=Rule ID: {0}
587scriptaction.action.blocked.nomsg=Blocked with no message
588scriptaction.action.invalid.tableid.msg=Script {0} tried to return a record from table with ID {1} while input record was from a table with ID {2}
589scriptaction.action.generalerror=Error running script {0}: {1}
590scriptaction.action.noscriptclassattr=Error running {0}, no attribute named {1} in the manifest file
591scriptaction.action.nullscript=Script for action with ID {0} not specified
592scriptaction.action.scriptnotfound=Script \u2018{0}\u2019 for action with ID {1} not found
593scriptaction.action.wronginterface=Script {0} class {1} should implement com.supportwizard.actions2.interfaces.ExternalScript interface
594scriptaction.details.directory.hint=Specify the directory where your script resides
595scriptaction.details.directory.label=Directory
596scriptaction.details.filename.hint=The name of the script
597scriptaction.details.filename.label=Filename
598scriptaction.details.name=Details
599scriptaction.general.description.hint=Please enter a short description of the purpose/function of this script.
600scriptaction.general.description.label=Description
601scriptaction.general.name.enterDescription=Enter the action description<BR>
602scriptaction.general.name.enterName=Enter the action name<BR>
603scriptaction.general.name.hint=Please enter the name of the script that will run as part of this action. You will need to upload this file to your script directory. For security reasons, it is not possible to upload the file to the server from the browser. You must have direct access to the server and install the file in the directory {0}.<br><br>If the script has an extension of .pl, it will be automatically executed by the Perl interpreter. If the script has an extension of .jar or .class, it will be dynamically loaded and run as a java class. Files with extension .bsh will be executed as BeanShell script. Files with extension .py will be executed as Python script. Files with an extension of .exe or any unrecognized extensions will be treated as executables.
604scriptaction.general.name.label=Name
605scriptaction.general.visible.hint=If a user action results in this action running, the end user may be notified that this action is about to run if he/she is a member of any of these groups
606scriptaction.general.visible.label=Visible for members of Group
607scriptaction.permissions.optional.hint=If a user action would normally result in this action running, the end user may be able to prevent this action from running if she is a member of any of these groups.
608scriptaction.permissions.optional.label=Optional for members of Group
609scriptaction.permissions.visible.hint=If a user action will result in this action running, the end user may be notified that this action is about to run if he/she is a member of any of these groups
610scriptaction.permissions.visible.label=Visible for members of Group
611scriptaction.report=Action Script {0} executed. {1}
612scriptaction.script.save.alreadyExists=Action <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
613scriptaction.script.upload.button=Upload
614scriptaction.script.upload.enterFileName=Enter file name
615scriptaction.script.upload.hint=Running this action will result in the following script being run as an independent process.
616scriptaction.script.upload.label=Name of script to run [{0}]
617scriptaction.script.upload.uploaded=File <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> was successfully uploaded
618scriptaction.tab.general=General
619paymentaction.tab.general=General
620paymentaction.tab.options=Options
621scriptaction.tab.permissions=Permissions
622scriptaction.tab.script=Script
623scriptaction.wizard.title=Configure Script Action
624importaction.wizard.title=Configure Import Action
625exportaction.wizard.title=Configure Export Action
626attachprintaction.wizard.title=Configure Create Print Action
627redliningaction.wizard.title=Configure Document Comparison Action
628validateaction.wizard.title=Configure Validate Action
629popupaction.wizard.title=Configure Browser Pop-up Action
630scriptguard.script.hint=A script guard/condition allows you to use an arbitrary java expression as a logical statement. <br><br>Note: Keep in mind that a guard/condition is placed <em>between</em> two states, so it can compare the current values in the record (also known as pre-values) to the values the record would have if the transition was to occur (also known as post- values). The fields from your record can be accessed using the form <span class=SIBoldMark>after.field</span> and <span class=SIBoldMark>before.field</span>.<br><br>So, if the table associated with this guard contains a <span class=SIBoldMark>question</span> field, and you are using the guard to make sure this field contains something and is longer than whatever it contained before, you can use an expression like:<br><span class=SIBoldMark>after.question.length() &gt; 0 &amp;&amp; after.question.length() &gt; before.question.length()</span><br><br>Numerical fields behave like numbers, boolean fields behave like booleans and character fields behave like String tables. The expression you enter must be a valid java <em>expression</em> (as opposed to statement) so you should not provide a trailing \u2018;\u2019. If you are unfamiliar with java, you should probably use a <span class=SIBoldMark>Simple Guard</span> instead.
631scriptguard.script.label=Script code
632scriptguard.script.availablefields=Available Fields
633scriptguard.tab.script=Script
634sequrity.general=Insufficient rights
635selection.show.title=Selected IDs
636selection.show.hint=The items with IDs on the right are currently selected.\nTo return to the new window, switch back or click \u201CClose\u201D button;
637selectrecord.main.hint=Select a record to convert
638selectrecord.main.label=Record ID
639servlet.exception=ServletException occurred
640si.help.popup=Staff Interface is a facility that enables your company employees to work with records, manage their agenda, receive notifications, interact with customers, and streamline many other activities typical for a fast-paced business setting.
641simpleguard.condition.hint=A Simple Guard/Condition allows you to define a condition based on values in a record. (To create complex conditions that span several records or tables, use a Script Guard/Condition instead.)<br><br>A guard/condition is placed between two states, so it can use the existing values in the record (also known as pre-values) and the values that the record would have if the transition was to occur (also known as post-values). When creating or deleting a ticket, the pre and post values are considered to be the same.<br><br>The boolean expression defined for a simple guard/condition is made up of one or several parts separated by AND or OR operators, for example <span class=SIItalicMark>\u201C((condition1 AND/OR condition2) AND/OR condition3) AND/OR condition4 ..\u201D</span> (If you are mixing ANDs and ORs, you need to pay attention to the order of the logical clauses.)
642simpleguard.condition.label=Condition
643simpleguard.tab.compare=Condition
644staff.brodcast.message.sent=The broadcast was sent successfully. To broadcast another message, click <a href="{0}">here</a>.
645staffcsswizard.global.basefonts.instruction=You can change the fonts of all styles based on the base font styles by choosing up to three base fonts here. This change will propagate throughout the text styles. It is recommended that you select at least a second font to be used if a user does not have access to the first font. (Choosing Verdana, Arial, and Helvetica will ensure that one of these fonts is always used.)
646staffcsswizard.global.basefonts.label=Change the base fonts
647staffcsswizard.global.startfromscheme.instruction=You can select a Look and Feel scheme as a template for a new interface. A scheme controls fonts, logos, and headers/footers.
648staffcsswizard.global.startfromscheme.label=Use this scheme as template
649staffcsswizard.global.shortcuticon.hint=The icon visible at address bar
650staffcsswizard.global.shortcuticon.label=Shortcut Icon
651staffcsswizard.headerfooter.changelogo.dontshow=Do not show a logo
652staffcsswizard.headerfooter.changelogo.hint=You can change the default logo by uploading a new logo file, or you can disable the logo at the top of the page to save available space.
653staffcsswizard.headerfooter.changelogo.label=Change Logo
654staffcsswizard.headerfooter.changelogo.upload=Use custom logo
655staffcsswizard.headerfooter.changelogo.manage=Select...
656staffcsswizard.headerfooter.changelogo.usedefaultlogo=Use default {0} logo
657status.bar.banner=Banner
658status.bar.logo=Logo
659status.bar.userinfo=Info
660status.record.created={0} #{1,number,######} successfully created.
661status.record.deleted={0} #{1,number,######} successfully deleted.
662status.entity.deleted={0} successfully deleted.
663status.record.multiple.deleted={1} {0} records successfully deleted.
664status.record.multiple.updated={0} {1} successfully updated.
665status.record.notfound=Unable to find record with ID {0,number,######}
666status.record.wrong.formula=Record creation failed: {0}.
667status.record.updated={0} #{1,number,######} successfully updated.
668status.record.viewdao=This page shows the {0} record because the {1} field was manually entered, rather than linked to an existing {2}.
669subtable.help.popup=Subtables are tables down the hierarchy of tables, also known as the Table Tree, that inherit from the selected table. <br><br>For example, Manager might be a subtable of Employee.
670summaryalreadyexists.message=There can only be one Summary field and %0 is currently used as the summary field. Do you want to use %1 instead?
671sw2.account.header1=My Account
672sw2.account.sub_menu.home=My Home
673sw2.account.sub_menu.preferences=My Preferences
674sw2.account.sub_menu.profile=My Profile
675sw2.account.title={0} Account Page
676sw2.ask.bug.header1=Ask Us - Bugs
677sw2.ask.bug.title={0} Ask Us :: Bugs submission page
678sw2.ask.enhancement.header1=Ask Us - Enhancements
679sw2.ask.enhancement.title={0} Ask Us :: Enhancements request page
680sw2.ask.feedback.header1=Ask Us - Feedback
681sw2.ask.feedback.title={0} Ask Us :: Feedback page
682sw2.ask.header1=Ask Us - Overview
683sw2.ask.header2=Question
684sw2.ask.header3=Feedback
685sw2.ask.header4=Enhancement request
686sw2.ask.header5=Bug
687sw2.ask.question.header1=Ask Us - Question
688sw2.ask.question.title={0} Ask Us :: Question page
689sw2.ask.sub_menu.bug=Bug
690sw2.ask.sub_menu.enhancement=Enhancement
691sw2.ask.sub_menu.feedback=Feedback
692sw2.ask.sub_menu.overview=Overview
693sw2.ask.sub_menu.question=Question
694sw2.ask.text1=Please select the type of issue you are describing by clicking the button next to it.
695sw2.ask.text2=Ask us a question, describe a problem you have, or ask for assistance to help you accomplish your task.
696sw2.ask.text3=Your opinion counts! Please give us your feedback on this product and related services.
697sw2.ask.text4=Describe an enhancement you would like to have made to this product and related services.
698sw2.ask.text5=Report a bug or problem with this product.
699sw2.ask.title={0} Ask Us Page
700sw2.default.header1=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> is ready to use immediately and can be customized in real time to perfectly fit the needs of your business. To create a sample record right now, move your mouse over a tab on the toolbar and click to create a new item. <help context="/index_Initial_Implementation.jspx.html"/>
701sw2.default.header2=Here is an overview of the Setup features and the suggested order for customizing them:
702sw2.default.text10=Start CSS wizard
703sw2.default.text11=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Rules</span> to create business rules that monitor the KnowledgeBase, provide alerts and interface with external systems.
704sw2.default.text12=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>License</span> to request new licenses and review license usage.
705sw2.default.text13=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>System</span> for miscellaneous items such as setting the time zone and modifying choice tables.
706sw2.default.text14=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Localization</span> to translate custom fields into other languages.
707sw2.default.text15=
708sw2.default.text3=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Look and Feel</span> to customize the interface with company logos, banners, fonts etc.
709sw2.default.text4=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Tables</span> to edit table definitions or create new tables.
710sw2.default.text5=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Access</span> to configure groups and their access permissions, create teams, set up communication with an LDAP/Active Directory server and/or Single Sign On/Windows authentication.
711sw2.default.text6=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Email</span> to setup inbound and outbound mail accounts.
712sw2.default.text7=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Import</span> to import user records, previously defined tables or a complete snapshot of an existing KnowledgeBase from a backup file.
713sw2.default.text8=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>End-User Interface</span> to define how the end-user interface works and to setup the dynamic FAQ facility.
714sw2.default.text9=Select <span class=SIBoldMark>Workflow</span> to automate the flow of information within your company and between customers and suppliers.
715sw2.email.form.format=Format email as:
716sw2.email.form.format.html=HTML
717sw2.email.form.format.plain=Plain Text
718sw2.email.form.from=*Your Email Address:
719sw2.email.form.from_name=*Your Full Name:
720sw2.email.form.list=Send list as:
721sw2.email.form.list.link=Hyperlinks
722sw2.email.form.list.plain=Plain Text
723sw2.email.form.message=Message:
724sw2.email.form.required=* denotes a required field
725sw2.email.form.reset=Cancel
726sw2.email.form.subject=*Subject:
727sw2.email.form.submit=Send
728sw2.email.form.to=*Send to:
729sw2.email.header1=Send new message
730sw2.email_sent.header1=Your message was sent
731sw2.email_sent.sent=Thank you!
732sw2.home.header1=Find Answers
733sw2.home.header2=Ask Us
734sw2.home.header3=View Your Account
735sw2.home.header4=Chat with Us
736sw2.home.header5=Create an Account
737sw2.home.text1=<span class=SIBoldMark>Start Here!</span> Find the answers you need right now, without picking up the telephone or sending email, by simply searching our KnowledgeBase of frequently asked questions.
738sw2.home.text2=Submit your question, and our support staff will respond by email. You can also send us your feedback on our products and services.
739sw2.home.text3=Check the status of your questions, change your preferences, or update your profile.
740sw2.home.text4=You may communicate with one of our technicians using text chat between the hours of 9am and 5pm, Monday through Friday.
741sw2.home.text5=If you don\u2019t yet have an account, you can create one so that you can take full advantage of our online support services and faster response times.
742sw2.home.title={0} Customer Support Page
743
744sync.action.error=Error on sync: {0}
745sync.action.error.communications=The {0} uses the new Unified Communications table format, but the {1} uses the old format with multiple Communications tables. Please update the {2} to Unified Communications by logging into the admin console, selecting Setup / KnowledgeBases / Click edit icon / Options tab / Convert to Unified Communications.
746sync.action.general.message.label=Message:
747sync.action.general.externalsystemid.hint=Please specify External System ID to synchronize with
748sync.action.general.externalsystemid.label=External System ID
749sync.action.general.explicit.records.hint=Use this option for event-specific rule actions if you want to sync a record to External System after it was updated or created in Agiloft.
750sync.action.general.explicit.records.label=Sync a single record only
751sync.action.wizard.title=Synchronization Action
752sync.action.list.somearedisabled=Some sync configurations do not allow "Run by Actions" (see options on "Running" tab of sync edit wizard). These are shown disabled.
753sync.action.list.noconfigs=There are no Synchronization configurations available. You should first create some synchronization configurations through Setup/Sync.
754sync.action.list.extsysid=External System ID
755rules2.actionList.syncaction.title=Sync Action
756
757sync.esatype.exchange=Microsoft Exchange
758sync.esatype.quickbooks=QuickBooks
759sync.esatype.file=File System
760sync.esatype.ew={0}
761sync.esatype.excel=MS Excel
762sync.esatype.ewoffline=Agiloft Offline Client
763sync.esatype.thirdparty=Third-party Adapter
764sync.esatype.generichttp=Third-party ESA (HTTP)
765sync.esatype.commandline=Third-party ESA (Command Line)
766sync.esatype.java=Third-party Java
767sync.esatype.socket=Third-party IP Socket
768sync.esatype.downloadesa=Download ESA Remote Proxy
769sync.esatype.google=Google
770sync.esatype.facebook=Facebook
771sync.esatype.salesforce=SalesForce
772sync.esatype.assets=Assets Discovery
773sync.esatype.jira=Jira
774sync.esatype.db = Database
775sync.esatype.record = Single Record
776
777sync.menu.caption=Sync
778sync.menu.run=Run
779sync.menu.view=View
780sync.edit.wait=Opening an Entity Set, please wait...
781sync.state.hint=This window shows current state for Synchronization Configuration "{0}".<br><br>Synchronization is always run in the background and you may close this window without interrupting it.
782sync.state.cantrun=Note: External System Adapter does not allow manual triggerring of the synchronization.
783sync.state.configisdeleted=Can't find synchronization configuration, probably it is deleted.
784sync.state.notrun=State: Synchronization wasn't run since server restart or configuration modification.
785sync.state.done=State: Synchronization has completed successfully.
786sync.state.cancelled=State: Synchronization has been cancelled.
787sync.state.pending=State: Synchronization is pending to be started.
788sync.state.running=State: Synchronization is runnning now.
789sync.state.error=State: Synchronization has ended with an error.
790sync.state.startagain=Synchronize now
791sync.state.cancel=Cancel
792sync.state.refresh=Refresh
793sync.state.results=Synchronization results:
794sync.state.viewprogress=To view detailed progress results, <a class=pointable onclick="{0}">click here</a>
795sync.state.viewlog=To view the raw log file, <a class=pointable onclick="{0}">click here</a>
796sync.state.viewrecords=To view affected records, <a class=pointable onclick="{0}">click here</a>
797sync.state.noprogress=This External System Adapter (ESA) does not provide the detailed report requested.
798sync.state.progress=Progress
799sync.state.stage.setup=Setup
800sync.state.stage.iterationno=iteration #{0}
801sync.state.stage.cleanup=Cleanup
802sync.state.stage.analyzing=Analyzing {0}
803sync.state.stage.synchronizing=Synchronizing
804sync.state.stage.reading=Reading external data
805sync.state.stage.updater=Running <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> (step {1} out of {2})
806sync.state.stage.updater.operation=Running <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> (step {1} out of {2}). Processing entry {3} out of {4}
807
808
809sync.results.ewid={0} ID
810sync.results.extid=External ID
811sync.results.state=Status
812sync.results.error=Error
813sync.results.conflict=Conflict
814sync.results.skipped=Skipped
815sync.results.cancelled=Cancelled
816sync.results.ew.created=Created in {0}
817sync.results.ew.updated=Updated in {0}
818sync.results.ew.deleted=Deleted in {0}
819sync.results.external.created=Created in External
820sync.results.external.updated=Updated in External
821sync.results.external.deleted=Deleted in External
822sync.view.name=Name
823sync.view.type=Synchronization Type
824sync.view.type.external=External System
825sync.view.type.entityset=Entity Set
826sync.view.subtypes=Tables
827sync.view.runmode=Run Mode
828sync.view.conflicts=Conflict Resolution
829sync.view.enabled=Enabled
830sync.view.new=New
831sync.view.new.external=External Sync
832sync.view.new.ew=Entity Set
833sync.view.delete=Delete
834sync.view.delete.areyousure=Are you sure you want to delete the configuration
835sync.view.delete.modularity.areyousure=Are you sure you want to delete entity set
836sync.view.takeew=Take Agiloft
837sync.view.takeexternal=Take External
838sync.view.mostrecent=More recent
839sync.view.duplicate=Duplicate
840sync.view.manual=Manual
841sync.view.actions=Actions
842sync.view.external=External
843sync.view.export=Export
844sync.view.import=Import
845sync.view.export.mustbeselected=You should first select a configuration to export.
846sync.view.compare=Compare
847sync.view.verify=Verify KB
848sync.view.report=Report entity set dependencies
849sync.view.error._nls_=Record {0} for {1} contains elements without assigned text value (marked as _NLS_). This must be fixed before export/import.
850sync.wizard.edit.title=Synchronization Configuration
851sync.wizard.edit.fail=ESA Returned error: {0}
852sync.wizard.edit.configuration.cantlock=Can't save configuration changes, because configuration is currently in use (sync is running). Please try later.
853sync.wizard.edit.configuration.fail=Configuring ESA failed. Reason: {0}
854sync.wizard.edit.configuration.newparam=ESA has reported additional parameters to configure.
855sync.wizard.edit.configuration.timeout=Timeout while communicating with ESA
856sync.wizard.edit.configuration.error=Error while communicating with ESA
857sync.wizard.edit.externalidused=External System Adapter had reported that it is already configured to be used via another ExternalSystemID ({0}, we are now setting {1}). This may indicate a that the same ESA is being used by two different {3} installations, for example. While for some ESA types this is OK, others might be non-workable in this situation.<b/>If you know what you are doing, please click <a href='{2}'>here</a> to force using this ESA instance by this configuration.
858sync.wizard.edit.connect.connecting=Waiting for connect from ESA with External System ID: {0}<br>Please make sure that External System Adapter is connecting to this machine ({1}). This page will be reloading every 3 seconds until ESA has connected. You will be redirected back to the configuration wizard upon this.
859#sync.wizard.edit.connect.connected=ESA has connected successfully, redirecting to the configuration wizard.
860sync.wizard.edit.connect.cancel=Cancel
861sync.wizard.edit.general.connect=Connect ESA
862sync.wizard.edit.general.caption=General
863sync.wizard.edit.general.esatype.label=External System Type
864sync.wizard.edit.general.esatype.hint=The command line that the proxy uses to start a command line ESA is always Start_ESA.sh on Linux or Start_ESA.bat on Windows.<br>If multiple ESA's are installed on the same machine, you may choose which to start by installing a single script with this name and having it start the appropriate ESA based on the numeric parameter chosen here.<br><br>You can download the ESA developer documentation and sample code by clicking on the link at the right. After downloading, unpack the file and follow the instructions in the ESA_Developer_Guide.docx file.
865sync.wizard.edit.general.esatype.getexample=To download the ESA developer bundle, click <a href="{0}">here</a>
866sync.wizard.edit.general.esatype.quickbook=QuickBooks
867sync.wizard.edit.general.esatype.commandline=Command Line Parameters<1...20>
868sync.wizard.edit.general.name.label=Configuration Name
869sync.wizard.edit.general.name.hint=Please enter a name for this Sync Configuration that is based on the system with which it synchronizes.
870sync.wizard.edit.general.direction.label=Directions
871sync.wizard.edit.general.direction.hint=You may specify one-way transfer in either direction or full bi-directional synchronization.
872sync.wizard.edit.general.direction.two-way=Two-way sync
873sync.wizard.edit.general.direction.ew-only=Update {0} only
874sync.wizard.edit.general.direction.external-only=Update External System only
875sync.wizard.edit.general.status.label=Status
876sync.wizard.edit.general.status.hint=You can temporary Enable or Disable Synchronization Configurations
877sync.wizard.edit.general.status.enabled=Enabled
878sync.wizard.edit.general.extsysid.label=External System ID Prefix
879sync.wizard.edit.general.extsysid.full.label=Full External System ID:
880sync.wizard.edit.general.extsysid.hint=The system has automatically generated a globally unique "External System ID" for this configuration. This name is used internally to manage communications between external systems and {0} KB's. You may need this name if you are debugging a third party ESA.
881sync.wizard.edit.general.remote.label=Remoting
882sync.wizard.edit.general.remote.hint=An ESA can be run remotely and connect to the the {0} server through a firewall. To setup a remote connection, download the ESA Remote Proxy package and run it on the target machine using <b>java -jar esa.jar</b>.<br><br>Notes:<br>You should save Sync Configuration before running ESA Remote Proxy.<br><br>You will also need latest Java Runtime environment, obtainable from <a href="http://www.java.com" target="blank">www.java.com</a>.<br><br>The downloaded package includes all the current settings and parameters such as the External System ID. If you change these settings, you will need to re-download the package.<br><br>You may also specify a specific IP address to only allow connections from that IP. If you are using NAT, you should specify the external IP address as "seen" by {0}, rather than the internal address.
883sync.wizard.edit.general.remote.remote=External System Adapter runs remotely
884sync.wizard.edit.general.personal.label=Personal synchronization
885sync.wizard.edit.general.personal.hint=If you set this option, synchronization data are stored on a per-user basis. This is useful when synchronizing with a PIM (Personal Information Manager) software, like MS Outlook. As an admin, you can set mappings, options, etc at once, and your users will be able to synchronize with their own PIM installations, sharing the data.
886sync.wizard.edit.general.personal=Personal data
887sync.wizard.edit.general.keygeneration.label=Secure API Calls
888sync.wizard.edit.general.generate=Generate Key
889sync.wizard.edit.general.keygeneration.hint=If you enable this option, Sync configuration setup and Synchronization calls requires authentication. For HTTPs ESA, you need to pass this key as part of request header and for commandline ESA, you need to pass the key as an argument surrounded by double quotes while running jar file (e.g., java -jar esa.jar "i]n@(80tpb||km5>rgf?hhy^5h:9?o-d" ). If you don't pass the key or a wrong key will result in 401 status error, for more details please refer ESA_Developer_Guide.docx file.
890sync.wizard.edit.general.remote.pollperiod=Polling Period (secs)
891sync.wizard.edit.general.remote.ipfilter=IP Filter (optional)
892sync.wizard.edit.general.reset.hint=You may reset {0} Record <-> External System Record peering information using this button. This will force next configuration to be run as if it would be a first synchronization ever.<br>Use that button with care. If 'identification' fields are not set up properly, you may get duplicated records.
893sync.wizard.edit.general.reset.reset=Reset Records Peering
894sync.wizard.edit.general.esatype.empty=Please select External System type first.
895sync.wizard.edit.general.extsysid.empty=External System ID must not be empty.
896sync.wizard.edit.esa.connect=Connect External System
897sync.wizard.edit.esa.caption=ESA Settings
898sync.wizard.edit.esa.selectesa=Please select ESA first.
899sync.wizard.edit.esa.noparams=There are no parameters to configure
900sync.wizard.edit.mapping.caption=Mapping
901sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.label=Subtype mapping
902sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.hint=This option lets you map to External System structures.
903sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.subtype=Subtype
904sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.external=External Structure
905sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.create=Map
906sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.delete=Unmap
907sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.edit=Edit Mapping
908sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.pleaseselect=Please select an External Structure to map to.
909sync.wizard.edit.mapping.deleted.structure=Deleted
910sync.wizard.edit.mapping.changed.structure=Changed
911sync.wizard.edit.mapping.notmapped=Not Mapped
912sync.wizard.edit.running.caption=Running
913sync.wizard.edit.running.mode.label=Run Mode
914sync.wizard.edit.running.mode.hint=This option allows you to specify how the Synchronization process is initiated
915sync.wizard.edit.running.mode.manual=Manual
916sync.wizard.edit.running.mode.actions=By Actions (Rules/Workflow)
917sync.wizard.edit.running.mode.external=On demand of External System
918sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.label=Conflicts
919sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.hint=A conflict can arise in two way synchronization if a record is edited on both systems before the changes from one are synced with the other.<br>For example if the systems are synced at 1:00pm and 1:05pm and the records are edited at 1:01pm and 1:02pm<br><br>This option allows you to specify how such conflicts are resolved.
920sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.takeew=This system should take precedence
921sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.takeexternal=External System should take precedence
922sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.mostrecent=Take the most recent record
923sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.duplicate=Duplicate records
924sync.wizard.edit.running.resolver.allowmanual=Allow manual resolution
925sync.wizard.edit.export.caption=Export
926sync.wizard.edit.export.autoexport.label=Automatically export mapped objects
927sync.wizard.edit.export.autoexport.hint=Check this option if you want mapped tables, field and filter searches to be automatically added to the list of objects to export
928sync.wizard.edit.export.tables.label=Objects to export
929sync.wizard.edit.export.tables.hint=Here you can inspect and customize the list of tables, used (mapped) in this sync configuration. These tables should be exported in order for sync configuration to be transferrable.<br>Note: it is not recommended to remove any used (mapped) table, field or saved search used as a filter. Doing so may break synchronization functionality.
930sync.wizard.edit.export.tables.customize=Edit export settings
931sync.wizard.edit.export.files.label=Attached Files
932sync.wizard.edit.export.files.hint=You can also attach some files to be transferred with this configuration. This might include necessary third-party software, for example.
933sync.wizard.edit.export.comment.label=Comment
934sync.wizard.edit.export.comment.hint=You may give a free-form text comment regarding this sync configuration. For example, it might be a good idea to describe the attached files or any other third-party software tuning information.
935sync.wizard.modularity.autorefresh.label=Auto-refresh
936sync.wizard.modularity.autorefresh.checklabel=Refresh dependencies on load
937sync.wizard.modularity.autorefresh.hint=If this checkbox is set, Entity Set will be automatically updated every time it is loaded. This helps to track and add new object dependencies.<br>If you uncheck this, you can delete some auto-added objects from the set, but the transfer may later fail due to unresolved dependencies.<br>Uncheck with care.
938sync.wizard.modularity.allemailtemplates.label=Email Templates
939sync.wizard.modularity.allemailtemplates.hint=If this checkbox is set, all Email templates from the chosen Tables will be added to the Entity Set.<br>If you uncheck this, only Email Templates from the chosen Email Actions will be added to the Entity Set.
940sync.wizard.modularity.allemailtemplates.checklabel=Add all Email templates for the chosen Tables
941sync.wizard.modularity.explicitonly.hint=By default, all entities will be transferred, whether defined as implicit or explicit. If this option is selected, all explicit entities will still be transferred, but implicit entities will only be transferred if they are not found in the target KB. In other words, this option prevents entities defined as <span class=\u201DSIBoldMark\u201D>implicit</span> from overwriting any structures in the target KB.
942sync.wizard.modularity.explicitonly.checklabel=Sync explicit entities only
943sync.wizard.modularity.allglobalvariables.label=Global Variables
944sync.wizard.modularity.allglobalvariables.hint=If this checkbox is set, all Global Variables will be added to the Entity Set.
945sync.wizard.modularity.allglobalvariables.checklabel=Add all  Global Variables
946sync.wizard.modularity.explicit.label=Transfer mode
947sync.wizard.modularity.explicit.hint=If this checkbox is set, only explicitly added entities will be transferred.
948sync.wizard.modularity.explicit.checklabel=Transfer only explicit entities
949sync.wizard.modularity.merge.checklabel=Update Implicit Linked Fields
950sync.wizard.modularity.title=Export / Import objects
951sync.wizard.modularity.add=Add
952sync.wizard.modularity.addemptytable=Add Empty Table
953sync.wizard.modularity.addtable=Add Table and All Fields
954sync.wizard.modularity.addfulltable=Add Table and All Entities
955sync.wizard.modularity.addall=Add All
956sync.wizard.modularity.entities.add=Add Entities
957sync.wizard.modularity.entities.remove=Remove Entities
958sync.wizard.modularity.entities.make.explicit=Make Explicit
959sync.wizard.modularity.entities.make.implicit=Make Implicit
960sync.wizard.modularity.entities.expandall=Show All
961sync.wizard.modularity.entities.collapseall=Collapse All
962sync.wizard.modularity.entities.label=Label
963sync.wizard.modularity.entities.status=Status
964sync.wizard.modularity.entities.explicit.label=Type
965sync.wizard.modularity.entities.datatype=Data Type
966sync.wizard.modularity.entities.addedstatus.label=Status:
967sync.wizard.modularity.entities.addedstatus.text={0} of {1} entities are in the set.
968sync.wizard.modularity.entities.selectall=Select All
969sync.wizard.modularity.entities.adding.hint=Please select the entities to add or remove and click the button.
970sync.wizard.modularity.entities.added=Added
971sync.wizard.modularity.remove=Remove
972sync.wizard.modularity.customize=Customize
973sync.wizard.modularity.tables.hint=This is a list of tables to be transferred.<br>You may customize which table-related objects (fields, saved searches, view, rules, etc) are exported using "Customize" button near each table.<br>If you want some additional LF field to be exported, you should also export corresponding LF donor table using "Add Table" button will also be automatically exported (will appear on this list).<br><br>If you select Add Empty Table, you should then use the Customize button to choose what fields from the table you want to add to the entity set.<br><br><br><br>It is possible to either explicitly include an entity and all its attributes, or just the information that is absolutely essential to maintain data integrity. For example, consider the following:<br><br>The entities in the Quotes table are being collated for export/import and they include the "Customer Email" field, which is a link to the "Email" field in the Person table.<br><br>If Customer Email is explicitly added then all its attributes such as how it is displayed and whether it is required will be imported into the target KB. Adding it will also implicitly add the Person/Email field that it points to. If Person/Email does not already exist in the target KB, it will be added with all its attributes.<br><br>However, if the Person/Email field does already exist, it will not be changed if it was "implicitly" added. After all, the admin on the target system probably just wants to import the Quotes table, not to make unnecessary changes to existing tables. Of course, if Person/Email is explicitly added, then all its attributes will be imported.<br><br>As a general recommendation: Explicitly add the entities that you really want to be transferred and let the system take care of everything else.
974sync.wizard.modularity.tables.label=Tables
975sync.wizard.modularity.choices.hint=This is a list of choice lists to be transferred.<br>You may add or remove entities from the list if necessary.
976sync.wizard.modularity.choices.label=Choice Lists
977sync.wizard.modularity.colorschemes.hint=This is a list of color scheme lists to be transferred.<br>You may add or remove entities from the list if necessary.
978sync.wizard.modularity.colorschemes.label=ColorScheme Lists
979sync.wizard.modularity.imageregitems.hint=This is a list of pictures to be transferred.<br>You may add or remove entities from the list if necessary.
980sync.wizard.modularity.imageregitems.label=Picture Lists
981sync.wizard.modularity.groups.hint=This is a list of access groups to be transferred.<br>You may add or remove entities from the list if necessary.
982sync.wizard.modularity.groups.label=Groups
983sync.wizard.modularity.teams.hint=This is a list of teams to be transferred.<br>You may add or remove entities from the list if necessary.
984sync.wizard.modularity.teams.label=Teams
985sync.wizard.modularity.personalinbounds.label=Personal Inbounds
986sync.wizard.modularity.personalinbounds.hint=This is a list of personal inbounds to be transferred.<br>You may add or remove entities from the list if necessary.
987sync.wizard.modularity.broken=The removal operation breaks these dependencies:<br> {0}.<br>This might prevent export/import from being done.
988sync.wizard.modularity.broken.withconfirm=The removal operation breaks these dependencies:<br> {0}.<br>This might prevent export/import from being done. If you want to continue, <a class=pointable href="{1}">click here</a>. If you wish to ignore warnings for all selected entities removal, <a class=pointable href="{2}">please click here</a>.
989sync.wizard.modularity.cantadd=Can't add the object: {0}.
990sync.wizard.modularity.cantadd.with.reason=Can't add the object: {0} due to {1}.
991sync.wizard.modularity.cantadd.all.with.unknownreason=<b>Not all entities were added to the set and it can be broken. It is not recommended to save it.  Please see server logs for details</b>
992sync.wizard.modularity.cantadd.all.with.reason=<b>Not all entities were added to the set and it can be broken. It is not recommended to save it.</b><br><br>Can't add: {1} {0} due to {2}.
993sync.wizard.modularity.add.subtype.hint=Please select a table to add to the export/import set.
994sync.wizard.modularity.add.subtype.label=Table
995sync.wizard.modularity.add.field.hint=Please select a field to add to the export/import set.
996sync.wizard.modularity.add.field.label=Field
997sync.wizard.modularity.add.search.hint=Please select a search to add to the export/import set.
998sync.wizard.modularity.add.search.label=Search
999sync.wizard.modularity.add.view.hint=Please select a view to add to the export/import set.
1000sync.wizard.modularity.add.view.label=View
1001sync.wizard.modularity.add.rule.hint=Please select a rule to add to the export/import set.
1002sync.wizard.modularity.add.rule.label=Rule
1003sync.wizard.modularity.add.conversion.hint=Please select a conversion to add to the export/import set.
1004sync.wizard.modularity.add.conversion.label=Conversion
1005sync.wizard.modularity.conversion.description=Conversion to {0} ({1})
1006sync.wizard.modularity.add.action.hint=Please select an action to add to the export/import set.
1007sync.wizard.modularity.add.action.label=Action
1008sync.wizard.modularity.add.choice.hint=Please select a choice to add to the export/import set.
1009sync.wizard.modularity.add.choice.label=Choice
1010sync.wizard.modularity.add.colorscheme.label=Color Scheme
1011sync.wizard.modularity.add.colorscheme.hint=Please select a color scheme to add to the export/import set.
1012sync.wizard.modularity.add.picture.label=Picture
1013sync.wizard.modularity.add.picture.hint=Please select a picture to add to the export/import set.
1014sync.wizard.modularity.add.group.hint=Please select a group to add to the export/import set.
1015sync.wizard.modularity.add.group.label=Group
1016sync.wizard.modularity.add.team.hint=Please select a team to add to the export/import set.
1017sync.wizard.modularity.add.team.label=Team
1018sync.wizard.modularity.fields.caption=Fields
1019sync.wizard.modularity.fields.label=Fields
1020sync.wizard.modularity.fields.hint=By default, only mapped table fields are exported. You may change this by selecting other fields as well.<br>It is not recommended to deselect mapped fields, because this may break synchronization functionality.
1021sync.wizard.modularity.searches.caption=Saved Searches
1022sync.wizard.modularity.searches.label=Saved Searches
1023sync.wizard.modularity.searches.hint=Any saved search, used as a filter is automatically exported. You may also export other searches, if you want.<br>It is not recommended to deselect searches, used as filters, because this may break synchronization functionality.
1024sync.wizard.modularity.rules.caption=Rules
1025sync.wizard.modularity.rules.label=Rules
1026sync.wizard.modularity.rules.hint=You can specify if any rules should be exported along with this sync configuration.<br>This also exports used actions.
1027sync.wizard.modularity.views.caption=Views
1028sync.wizard.modularity.views.label=Views
1029sync.wizard.modularity.views.hint=You can specify if any views should be exported along with this sync configuration.
1030sync.wizard.modularity.conversion.caption=Conversion
1031sync.wizard.modularity.conversion.label=Conversion
1032sync.wizard.modularity.conversion.hint=You can specify if any conversions should be exported along with this sync configuration.
1033sync.wizard.modularity.inbounds.caption=Inbounds
1034sync.wizard.modularity.inbounds.label=Inbounds
1035sync.wizard.modularity.inbounds.hint=You can specify if any inbounds should be exported along with this sync configuration.
1036sync.wizard.modularity.outbound.caption=Outbound settings
1037sync.wizard.modularity.outbound.label=Outbound settings
1038sync.wizard.modularity.outbound.hint=If this checkbox is set, outbound settings will be exported along with this sync configuration. In case of unexisting outbound the default one will be created.
1039sync.wizard.modularity.outbound.add.label=Add Outbound Settings
1040sync.wizard.modularity.emailtemplates.caption=Email Templates
1041sync.wizard.modularity.emailtemplates.label=Email Templates
1042sync.wizard.modularity.emailtemplates.hint=You can specify if any email templates should be exported along with this sync configuration.
1043sync.wizard.modularity.data.caption=Data
1044sync.wizard.modularity.data.label=Data
1045sync.wizard.modularity.data.hint=Data sync description
1046sync.wizard.modularity.actions.caption=Actions
1047sync.wizard.modularity.actions.label=Actions
1048sync.wizard.modularity.actions.hint=You can specify if any actions should be exported along with this sync configuration.
1049sync.wizard.modularity.name.label=Name
1050sync.wizard.modularity.name.hint=You can specify the Entity Set name here
1051sync.wizard.edit.error.nameisempty=Configuration Name is Empty<br>
1052sync.wizard.modularity.status.added=Added
1053sync.wizard.modularity.status.added.not.imported=Added (not imported)
1054sync.wizard.modularity.status.notadded=Not Added
1055sync.wizard.modularity.emptylist=Entity list to add is empty.
1056sync.wizard.modularity.checked.warning=There are $count entities selected but not added. Continue?
1057sync.wizard.modularity.table.external=external
1058sync.wizard.modularity.explicitly.yes=Explicit
1059sync.wizard.modularity.explicitly.no=Implicit
1060sync.wizard.modularity.addallentities.button=Add All Entities
1061sync.wizard.modularity.addallentities.hint=This button will add all the entities from the current KB to the entity set. It is intended for copying all changes from a development KB to a production KB.
1062sync.wizard.modularity.addallentities.progress=Adding entities to the set. Please wait...
1063sync.wizard.edit.error.esatypeempty=ESA Type must be selected<br>
1064sync.wizard.edit.error.requiredesaparamempty=ESA Parameter "{0}" is required, but has an empty value.<br>
1065sync.wizard.edit.error.requiredfieldnotmapped=External System reports field "{0}" as mandatory, but it is not mapped to any {2} field for {1} structure.<br>
1066sync.wizard.edit.error.requiredrelationnotmapped=External System reports relation "{0}" for structure "{1}" as mandatory, but it is not mapped to any Agiloft LF set.<br>
1067sync.wizard.edit.error.enumnotmapped=Enumeration field "{0}" has unmapped value "{1}". Please map all enumeration values.<br>
1068sync.wizard.edit.error.nomodifiedat=Mapping table for Subtype {0} has Modification Time field empty. The setting is mandatory.<br>
1069sync.wizard.editmapping.title=Mapping Table
1070sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.caption=Field Mapping
1071sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.synctype.label=Table update type
1072sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.synctype.hint=This option lets you to control whether table records are synchronized based on record timestamps or just replaced in any system
1073sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.synctype.synchronize=Synchronize
1074sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.synctype.export=Export
1075sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.synctype.import=Import
1076sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.modified.label={0} Modification Time Field
1077sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.modified.hint=This option lets you specify a field, holding record modification time in your {0} subtype.
1078sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.label=Field Mapping
1079sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.hint=This option lets you map {0} fields and External System record fields.<br><br>Some fields might be marked as "identifying".<br> They are used to establish initial relation of records, which are not in sync yet. This is important for the first time synchronization and if information is eventually added into both systems. For example, "Email" is a good "identifying" field if synchronizing contacts. You may set identification to be strict (all fields must be matched) or use "best effort": if there are 3 identifying fields, system will first try to identify by all 3, then it will try any 2 and if still unsuccessful, it will try to match by any single field. <br><br>You may also specify whether the mapped field should be updateable in both systems.<br>For LF fields, you may specify either "direct" mapping (equivalent to manual entering values into fields) or map the whole set of them to some relation in an External System<br>You can't combine the two: if the field is "direct" mapped, the set is unavailable for relation mapping and vice-versa.<br><br>When mapping enumeration (choice) fields, you can also specify "synonyms". A synonym value will be processed as if it would be a "primary" value. <br>You can also specify "unknown value" mapping for choices. {0} choice will hold this value if any unmapped enumeration value will arrive from the extenal system. This value will not be propagated back to external system.
1080sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.external=External Field
1081sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.ew={0} Field
1082sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.updateew=Update in {0}
1083sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.updateexternal=Update in External
1084sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.identifying=Identifying
1085sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enummap.caption=Enum Mapping
1086
1087sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.unknown=Unmapped (unknown) values mapping
1088sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.external=External Value
1089sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.ew={0} Choice Value
1090sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.addewsyn=Add {0} Synonym
1091sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.addextsyn=Add External Synonym
1092
1093sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.ewmainmatch=Main rule
1094sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.enum.extmainmatch=Main rule
1095
1096sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.strictidentification=Use strict match for identification
1097sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.id.hint=When a new External Record is to be created during Sync, it should get some new External ID. If you want External System (or ESA) to auto-assign this ID, leave "External System generates ID" checkbox checked. Alternatively, you may specify an optional prefix and a subtype column (must hold unique values) to be used as a new ID.
1098sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.id.label=ID Generation
1099sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.id.autoid.label=External System generates ID
1100sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.id.prefix.label=External ID Prefix
1101sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.id.source.label=External ID Value column
1102sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.master.hint=When mapping a Collection, you need to choose a field, which would keep a link to a collection member "Parent" record. The link must be a Linked Field to a single record, not allowing "not in source" values. The link should uniquely identify parent record. Ideally, this is the link to parent's ID field.
1103sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.master.label=Link to Parent
1104sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.order.hint=When mapping a Collection, you need to choose a field, which would keep an order of a collection member within the collection. This must be an Integer field.
1105sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.order.label=Order field
1106sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.hint=You can restrict sync operations for these subtype and structure.
1107sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.label=Allowed operations
1108sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.create.ew=Agiloft Create
1109sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.create.external=External Create
1110sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.update.ew=Agiloft Update
1111sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.update.external=External Update
1112sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.delete.ew=Agiloft Delete
1113sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.operations.delete.external=External Delete
1114sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.normal=Data Fields
1115sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.lfdirect=LF Fields
1116sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.choicelines=Choice options
1117sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.deleted=Deleted
1118sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.changed=Changed
1119sync.wizard.edit.relations.caption=Relation Mapping
1120sync.wizard.edit.relations.label=Relation Mapping
1121sync.wizard.edit.relations.hint=This option allows you to map object relations in {0} and External System. You may map external relations to LF field sets in {0}.<br>For LF fields, you may specify either "direct" mapping (equivalent to manually entering values into fields) or map the whole set of them to some relation in an External System<br>You can\u2019t combine the two: if the field is "direct\u201D mapped, the set is unavailable for relation mapping and vice-versa.<br>The linked {0} Subtype must also be included into this Synchronization Configuration (or {0} will not be able to map external IDs to linked subtype IDs).<br>If it is not Synced, LF will not be updated\!
1122sync.wizard.edit.relations.norelations=No External Relations reported by ESA
1123sync.wizard.edit.relations.notmapped=Not mapped
1124sync.wizard.edit.relations.from=From
1125sync.wizard.edit.relations.to=To
1126sync.wizard.edit.relations.lf=Linked Field Set:
1127sync.wizard.edit.relations.updateew=Update {0}
1128sync.wizard.edit.relations.updateext=Update External
1129sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.caption=Filters
1130sync.wizard.editmapping.ewfilter.select.label=Select {0} Filter
1131sync.wizard.editmapping.ewfilter.select.hint=You may optionally specify a saved search, which will be used as a filter when synchronizing subtype records.<br>This is {0} records filter, not External data filter.
1132sync.wizard.editmapping.ewfilter.select.select=Select Agiloft Filter
1133sync.wizard.editmapping.ewfilter.select.savedsearches=Select saved search:
1134sync.wizard.editmapping.extfilter.select.label=Select External Filter
1135sync.wizard.editmapping.extfilter.select.hint=You may optionally specify a saved search, which will be used as a filter for external records.<br>This is External records filter, applied to converted record representations. Please only use mapped fields in this filter.
1136sync.wizard.editmapping.extfilter.select.select=Select External Filter
1137sync.wizard.editmapping.extfilter.select.savedsearches=Select saved search:
1138sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.mode.label=Filtering
1139sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.mode.hint=Note: this setting also affects the case of record subtype changed.<br>Records may start/stop satisfying the filter due to data changes. There is a number of ways in which filtering can be performed with respect to this.<br>"Always stay in sync\u201D means that only records matching the filter may become synchronized, but if the record is synchronized, it will stay in sync even if it stops satisfying the filter. Effectively, this is equivalent to filtering new records only.<br>This is the simplest filtration method, there is almost no \u201Effect\u201D when record falls out/in the filter, except for subtype changes \u2013 the record will still be synced with the same external record (but using new mapping table).<br>"Be ignored if not matched\u201D means that the record will not be really synchronized if it doesn't satisfy the filter, but the system will keep tracking record existence. When the record falls out of the filter, system will not delete the peer record in External System, nor will it create new external record, if the {0} record satisfies the filter again.<br>It will just ignore all updates in both systems.<br>"Identify non-matched\u201D checkbox allows the system to identify new records in {0} and External System (based on Identifying fields), even if {0} record doesn't satisfy the filter. Such records will not get synchronized, but this will prevent creation of duplicate records.<br>"Be dropped if not matched\u201D means that non-matching is equivalent to the record deletion. If the record stops satisfying the filter, it is treated exactly in the same way as if the record were deleted. If it starts satisfying the filter again, this is treated as if it had been just created.<br>Use this option with care: if the record stops satisfying the filter, the corresponding peer record in an external
1140sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.mode.always=Always stay in sync
1141sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.mode.ignorenonmatched=Be ignored if not matched
1142sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.mode.identifynonmatched=Identify non-matched
1143sync.wizard.editmapping.filter.mode.drop=Be dropped if not matched
1144sync.wizard.editmapping.warning.ewrequiredextisnot={2} Field {0} is a required field, but External Field {1} is not<br>
1145sync.wizard.editmapping.warning.extrequiredewisnot=External Field {0} is a required field, but {2} Field {1} is not<br>
1146sync.wizard.editmapping.warning.extrequiredewnotmapped=External Field {0} is a required field, but it is not mapped to any {1} Field<br>
1147sync.wizard.editmapping.error.nounuque.or.summary=In KB {1}, the definition on the Options tab for field {2} in table {0} references a particular record in {0}. This cannot be synchronized between KB's because table {0} does not contain any fields that are flagged as unique. So there is no way to find which record the field should refer to in the other KB. If there are no unique fields, {3} will use the field that is flagged as the "summary" field for comparison, but there is also no "summary" field.<br>Recommendation: Log into each KB, go to Setup/Tables, select table {0} and go to the Fields tab. Ideally find a field other than the ID that you know always has a unique value and edit it to specify that the field is unique. If there are no unique fields, but a combination of field values is always unique, you might also consider creating a compound field from them. Alternately, choose a field (typically a text field) that always has the same value for the referenced record in both KB's and edit the Options tab for this field by setting "Display as summary field?" to Yes.<br>
1148sync.wizard.editmapping.error.nounuque.or.summary.empty=Record {0} at table {1} has all empty unique/summary fields, which required for matching records.
1149sync.error.conversion.unsuitabledomain=Agiloft Field is of incorrect type
1150sync.error.conversion.outofbounds=Field value {0} is out of bounds.
1151sync.error.conversion.notalong= cast External value "{0}" to long integer value
1152sync.error.conversion.notanint=Can't cast External value "{0}" to integer value
1153sync.error.conversion.notafloat=Can't cast External value "{0}" to floating point value
1154sync.error.conversion.extrequired=External field {0} is Required, but Agiloft field {1} is empty
1155sync.error.conversion.extrequiredrel=External relation {0} is Required, but Agiloft Linked Field is empty
1156sync.error.conversion.ewrequired=Agiloft field {0} is Required, but External field {1} is empty
1157sync.error.conversion.ewrequiredrel=Agiloft Linked Field is Required, but External Relation {0} is empty
1158sync.error.conversion.enumvalnotmapped=Enumeration Value "{0}" is not mapped
1159sync.error.conversion.enumfieldnotmapped=Enumeration Values for External Field "{0}" are not mapped
1160sync.error.conversion.lfresolveerror=Error updating LF field: {0}
1161sync.error.conversion.colllection.cantenumerate=Can't enumerate collection members for master record {0} in subtype {1}, please check collection mapping settings.
1162sync.error.conversion.cancelupdate=Cancel record {0} update, because {1} relation is required, but there are no related peer records available
1163sync.error.conversion.attachedfiles.cantparse=Can't parse ESA-supplied attached files information, please contact ESA provider
1164sync.error.conversion.attachedfiles.cantread=Can't read attached file
1165sync.error.conversion.attachedfiles.cantsave=Can't save attached file
1166sync.error.conversion.column=Cannot find sync field {0} at table {1} to table {2}
1167sync.error.conversion.external=Cannot sync external field {0} at table {1} to table {2}
1168sync.error.conversion.current=Cannot sync field {0} at table {1} to table {2}
1169sync.error.conversion.search=Cannot sync searchID={0} from master KB {1}
1170sync.error.conversion.team=Cannot sync teamID={0} from master KB
1171sync.error.conversion.multilink=Cannot parse multi-link data "{0}" for column "{1}"
1172sync.error.view.missed=No view with id:{0}, referred by column '{1}' in subtype '{2}', was found. Edit the column and change view settings.
1173sync.error.view.wrongtype=View {0} referred by column '{1}' [{2}] in subtype '{3}' is of wrong type. Edit the column and change view settings.
1174sync.warning.skipped=Record is skipped due to Synchronization direction.
1175sync.warning.em=Email Marketing
1176sync.warning.em.desc=Target KB was converted to Email Marketing as source has EM enabled. It is recomended to compare KBs and if necessary run sync again.  
1177
1178sync.stall.action.requires=Action '{0}' requires {1} '{2}' in KB {3}
1179
1180sync.excel.param.file.name=Excel File
1181sync.excel.param.file.hint=Full path to Excel spreadsheet file to synchronize with
1182sync.excel.param.rowasid.name=Take row number as ID
1183sync.excel.param.rowasid.hint=If this parameter is set, row number acts as a record ID. The "ID Column" setting is ignored in this case. Please note that this option may cause many updates in case a new  row is added in the middle (records will get re-synchronized with shifted rows).
1184sync.excel.param.idcolumn.name=ID Column
1185sync.excel.param.idcolumn.hint=The Excel column that contains a unique ID. The values in this column must be unique, since they are used to match your records with records in the spreadsheet. Records in each system that contain the same value are considered to be the same record.
1186sync.excel.param.firstrowisnames.name=First row contains column names
1187sync.excel.param.firstrowisnames.hint=Set this option to Yes, if the first row of your Excel sheet contains column names
1188sync.excel.param.skipempty.name=Skip empty rows
1189sync.excel.param.skipempty.hint=Set this option to Yes to skip empty rows in the Excel sheet. This mostly has an effect if you are using row numbers as IDs.
1190sync.excel.param.filets.name=Use file modification date as a record timestamps
1191sync.excel.param.filets.hint=If this parameter is set, excel file modification timestamp acts as record timestamps. The "Timestamp Column" setting is ignored in this case.
1192sync.excel.param.tscolumn.name=Timestamp column
1193sync.excel.param.tscolumn.hint=The Excel column that contains the modification date/time. The values in this column must reflect when the record was last modified in the Excel spreadsheet. The Sync process will search for records those modification timestamp is more recent than the last successfuly sync.
1194sync.excel.param.startrow.name=Start Row
1195sync.excel.param.startrow.hint=Some spreadsheets contain header information rather than actual data in the first few rows. Use this option to tell Sync to ignore such rows.
1196sync.excel.param.columnrange.name=Column Range
1197sync.excel.param.columnrange.hint=Range of columns to process, as comma/space separated list of ranges and columns. Example: "A, C-F, H K L, O-R X-Z" would process columns A,C,D,E,F,H,K,L,O,P,Q,R,X,Y,Z.
1198sync.excel.param.idfilter.name=ID Filter
1199sync.excel.param.idfilter.hint=You can optionally specify an additional check for ID values. Rows, where ID doesn't match this condition, will be ignored. This is useful if there are some header lines in the middle of your data.
1200sync.excel.param.idfilter.numeric=Numeric
1201sync.excel.param.idfilter.alphanumeric=Alpha-Numeric
1202sync.excel.param.idfilter.notempty=Not Empty
1203sync.excel.param.idfilter.nocheck=No check
1204
1205sync.assets.param.network.label=Network to Scan
1206sync.assets.param.threads.label=Number of scanner threads
1207sync.assets.param.scansoftware.label=Scan Software?
1208sync.assets.param.network.hint=Enter a name to refer to the network to be scanned.  It is important to note the name that is specified here, because it will need to be entered when creating a new Network table record.  The names in both instances must match exactly.
1209sync.assets.param.threads.hint=Enter the number of active concurrent threads which will run in parallel to facilitate multiple long scans
1210sync.assets.param.scansoftware.hint=Select Yes to enable software scanning in addition to device scanning
1211
1212sync.jira.param.endpoint.name=JIRA WSDL endpoint
1213sync.jira.param.endpoint.hint=Endpoint URL according of Atlassian JIRA server, e.g. http://&#123;JIRA server domain name&#125;/rpc/soap/jirasoapservice-v2
1214sync.jira.param.restendpoint.name=JIRA REST endpoint
1215sync.jira.param.restendpoint.hint=REST Endpoint URL of Atlassian JIRA server, e.g. http://&#123;JIRA server domain name&#125;/rest/api/latest
1216sync.jira.param.userid.name=Login ID
1217sync.jira.param.userid.hint= Login userid required for connecting into the Atlassian JIRA
1218sync.jira.param.password.name=PASSWORD
1219sync.jira.param.password.hint= Login password required for connecting into the Atlassian JIRA
1220
1221sync.facebook.param.appid.label=Facebook Application ID
1222sync.facebook.param.secret.label=Facebook Application Secret
1223sync.facebook.param.pageid.label=Facebook Page ID
1224sync.facebook.param.ewlogin.label=Agiloft Login
1225sync.facebook.param.ewlogin.hint=Login of Agiloft user for custom Facebook tab
1226sync.facebook.param.ewpassword.label=Agiloft Password
1227sync.facebook.param.ewpassword.hint=Password of Agiloft user for custom Facebook tab
1228
1229sync.fileesa.param.path.name=Directory path
1230sync.fileesa.param.path.hint=Local path to the file directory to sync. Multiple directories can be given, separated by local system path separator (";" on Windows, ":" on Unix).
1231sync.fileesa.param.format.name=File Format
1232sync.fileesa.param.format.hint=Format of the data files. Can be "Properties" for "plain" Java Properties format (property=value lines) or "XML" for XML "&lt;data&gt;&lt;field-name&gt;field-value&lt;/field-name&gt;...&lt;/data&gt;" Java Properties format
1233sync.fileesa.param.fields.name=Field list
1234sync.fileesa.param.fields.hint=Comma-separated list of fields. A field is a single mappable data element. Depending on the format, it may designate a property name or an XML element name.
1235sync.exchange.param.host.name=Exchange Host
1236sync.exchange.param.host.hint=A host where Exchange EWS is available. Check "https://[Exchange Host]/EWS/exchange.asmx".
1237sync.exchange.param.ldap_host.name=MSAD Host
1238sync.exchange.param.ldap_host.hint=Microsoft Active Directory host, can be empty if the same as [Exchange Host].
1239sync.exchange.param.port.name=Port
1240sync.exchange.param.port.hint=Microsoft Active Directory port
1241sync.exchange.param.user.name=User
1242sync.exchange.param.user.hint=MASD user to perform CRUD action over contacts
1243sync.exchange.param.password.name=Password
1244sync.exchange.param.password.hint=MASD user password
1245sync.exchange.param.domain.name=Domain
1246sync.exchange.param.domain.hint=MASD domain
1247sync.exchange.param.basedn.name=dn
1248sync.exchange.param.basedn.hint=MASD base DN
1249sync.exchange.param.ou.name=ou
1250sync.exchange.param.ou.hint=Organizational Unit which contains the Contacts
1251sync.exchange.param.gal.name=gal
1252sync.exchange.param.gal.hint=Global Address List which contains the Contacts
1253sync.exchange.param.sync_entities.name=sync entities
1254sync.exchange.param.sync_entities.hint=Entities to synchronize
1255sync.exchange.param.sync_entities.user_contacts=Users and contacts
1256sync.exchange.param.sync_entities.user_contacts_events=Users, contacts and calendar events
1257sync.quickbook.param.configuration.hint=To connect your Quickbooks with Enterprise Wizard you should download this configuration file and open it in Quickbooks Web Connector.<br>Please make sure you have a valid SSL certificate installed. For more details, please see QB integration doc.
1258sync.quickbook.param.configuration.html.prompt=Quickbooks web connector configuration file
1259sync.quickbook.param.configuration.html.clickhere=click here to download
1260sync.quickbook.param.companyfile.name=Company File
1261sync.quickbook.param.companyfile.hint=Full path to Quickbooks company file on remote computer.
1262sync.quickbook.param.password.name=Password
1263sync.quickbook.param.password.hint=Password for QuickBook Web Connector. Please note, that you have to invent and enter brand new password here, that would protect connection between your Quickbooks computer and Agiloft server. This password is NOT the same as your Company file password and you should NOT use it here.
1264sync.quickbook.param.samplefile.name=Sample file?
1265sync.quickbook.param.samplefile.hint=If you are trying to sync with a QuickBooks sample file, set this option. It will make sync to ignore greater time difference between QuickBooks and {0} (QuickBooks sets "today's" date long into the future for sample files)
1266sync.quickbook.param.timezone.name=Quickbooks computer timezone
1267sync.quickbook.param.timezone.hint=Please, select system timezone of the computer, where Quickbooks is installed. Timezones with Daylight Saving Time are marked with DST. You can find out what timezone you are using by clicking on clocks in taskbar tray. Pay attention if daylight saving time (DST) is used for your timezone and make sure it is on or off BOTH on Quickbooks remote computer and in this setting.
1268
1269modularity.export.title=Export Objects
1270modularity.export.hint=You are about to export sync configuration {0}. This will also export all required meta-data (table structure, saved search, etc), but not your actual KB data.
1271modularity.export.exportnow.hint=Press this button to start export process
1272modularity.export.exportnow=Export Now
1273modularity.export.edit.hint=Press this button to edit the set of objects to be exported
1274modularity.export.edit=Customize
1275modularity.export.target.hint=Select export destination. You may either create an export file or specify a KB on this server to receive changes.
1276modularity.export.target.createfile=Create export file
1277modularity.export.target.selectkb=Transfer to existing KB
1278modularity.export.target.security=Please enter the login and password of a member of the admin group for the selected KB.
1279modularity.export.target.securityerror=Wrong login or password. Please enter the login and password of a member of the admin group for the selected KB.
1280modularity.export.process.creatingcarrier=Creating export file (carrier KB)...
1281modularity.export.process.transferring=Transferring changes...
1282modularity.export.process.saving=Saving export file...
1283modularity.export.process.cleaning=Export file is ready (<a class=pointable href="{0}">click here to download it</a>), cleaning up
1284modularity.export.process.exportcomplete=Export is complete. <a class=pointable href="{0}">Click here to download the export file</a>
1285modularity.export.process.exportwithwarnings=Export succeeded with warnings, <a class=pointable href="#" onclick="{0}">click here</a> for details <br><a class=pointable href="{1}">Click here to download the export file</a>
1286modularity.export.process.transfercomplete=Transfer is complete.
1287modularity.export.process.transferwithwarnings=Transfer succeeded with warnings, <a class=pointable href="#" onclick="{0}">click here</a> for details
1288modularity.export.process.transferfailed=Transfer failed. Reasons are:
1289modularity.export.process.completed.close=<a class=pointable href="{0}">Click here</a> to close this window
1290modularity.export.process.error=Error exporting: {0}
1291modularity.export.warning.lfdefault=Unable to transfer LF default value for field "{0}" in table "{1}" because the source table "{2}" does not have any unique fields or a field flagged as the "summary" field. This makes it impossible to determine what record in the target KB should be used as the default.
1292modularity.export.warning.groupname=Group "{0}" was renamed to "{1}" in target KB because group with name "{0}" already exist.
1293modularity.export.warning.teamname=Team "{0}" was renamed to "{1}" in target KB because team with name "{0}" already exist.
1294modularity.export.warning.conflict=Field "{0}.{1}" renamed to "{2}" because of names conflict
1295modularity.export.warning.subtype=Table "{0}" cannot be exported because logical name {1} differs from subtable name {2}
1296modularity.export.warning.summary=Table "{0}" contains {1} fields, flagged as "Summary" : {2}. Please edit one of these fields and on the Options tab, deselect it from being the "Summary" field.
1297modularity.export.warning.related=Field "{0}.{1}" contains wrong Table/Relationship value "{2}". Please edit this field and select correct value.
1298modularity.export.warning.lfproperties=Linked Field {0} in subtable {1} does mismatch definition in head subtable. To fix that, check both fields and Edit/Save one you think is correct. Extended info: {2}
1299modularity.export.warning.calccolumn=Calculation on multiple linked records column {0}.{1} settings is broken
1300modularity.export.calccolumn.fixed=Calculation on multiple linked records column {0}.{1} settings are fixed
1301modularity.export.calccolumn.changedtofloat=Calculation on multiple linked records column {0}.{1} settings can not be fixed. Column type changed to float.
1302modularity.export.warning.nosummary=The following tables {0}, do not have unique fields or "summary" fields set, so if they are used in Sync, some errors may be reported. In particular, if a record in one of these tables is specified as providing the default value for a field in other records, sync will be unable to find the matching record that should be used as the default in the target KB.<br><br>\
1303Let's clarify with a concrete example and consider the case where the Email Address field for record ID 555 is the default value for the Notify field. Lets assume that the value for Full Name field in record 555 is Mike Granger.<br><br>\
1304The record ID's may be different in each KB, so the sync process cannot set the default to the record with the same ID. Ideally, it would find the value of some unique field in record 555 and use that to find the matching record in the target KB, but we are assuming there are no unique fields in the table.<br><br>\
1305As a backup, sync looks for the first record with a matching value in the field that has been flagged as the "summary" field. But if there is also no summary field, it does not know what record to use as the default and reports an error. This is not the end of the world, you can manually set the default value after sync has completed. But if you will be using sync multiple times, it would be ideal if there is a field that you know is unique and can specify as such. If there is none, you may be able to create a new compound field from several other fields that will always be unique.<br><br>\
1306If there is no unique field, but there is a field whose value for the default record is unique, you can flag that as the "summary" field. For example, if you know that there is only one Mike Granger, or just that the correct Mike Granger has the lowest record ID, you could flag the Full Name field as being the "summary" field. The "summary" field is specified using the Options tab of the field editor.
1307modularity.export.warning.nosummary.record=The source table "{0}" does not have any unique fields or a field flagged as the "summary" field, so any records transferred from this table will be matched with the corresponding record in the target table based upon it's ID.<br><br>\
1308Lets illustrate with an example: If a user with a Full Name of John Smith had an ID of 5 in the target KB and Jane Doe had an ID of 5 in the source KB, they will be treated as the same. So a rule that set "John Smith" as the default Assigned To person in the source KB would set Jane Doe as that person in the target KB. This is quite probably wrong. The best course of action in this example would be to flag Full Name as being a "summary" field and rerun sync, or even better, flag a field such as the Email field as being "unique".<br><br>\
1309For your use case, this may not matter. But the recommended course of action in your case is to review the "{0}" table and use the table editor to flag an appropriate field as a "summary" or "unique" field.
1310modularity.export.warning.team.empty.name=Team {0} has empty name, please edit the team and correct the problem
1311modularity.export.warning.team.empty.description=Team {0} {1} has empty description, please edit the team and correct the problem
1312modularity.export.warning.unique=Field "{0}.{1}" marked as unique, but in physical table it is not unique. Please either change field to non-unique or check all subtables of "{2}" and make sure field is unique everywhere.
1313modularity.export.warning.duplicate_labels=Table "{0}" contains {1} fields with label "{2}"
1314modularity.export.warning.spfield.nodefault=Survey Presentation Field "{0}.{1}" has no default value.
1315modularity.export.warning.spfield.notselected=Survey Presentation Field "{0}.{1}" has no default survey selected. Edit the field and complete selection on Options tab.
1316modularity.report.seereport=<a class=pointable href="#" onclick="{0}">Click here</a> to see a detailed transfer report
1317modularity.report.column.type=Object type
1318modularity.report.column.name=Name
1319modularity.report.column.op=Operation done
1320modularity.report.column.progress=Progress made
1321modularity.report.column.warning=Warning
1322modularity.report.entityname.action=Action
1323modularity.report.entityname.choicelist=Choice list
1324modularity.report.entityname.group=Group
1325modularity.report.entityname.imageregitem=Picture
1326modularity.report.entityname.lfscheme=Look and feel scheme
1327modularity.report.entityname.rule=Rule
1328modularity.report.entityname.ssearch=Saved search
1329modularity.report.entityname.syncconfig=Extrenal sync configuration
1330modularity.report.entityname.team=Team
1331modularity.report.entityname.view=Table view
1332modularity.report.entityname.emailtemplate=Email Template
1333modularity.report.entityname.emailinbound=Email Inbound Settings
1334modularity.report.entityname.emailpersonalinbound=Email Personal Inbound Settings
1335modularity.report.entityname.emailoutbound=Email Outbound Settings
1336modularity.report.seecomparereport=<a class=pointable href="{0}">Click here</a> to see a detailed comparison report
1337
1338modularity.import.title=Import Objects
1339modularity.import.source.tabname=Source
1340modularity.import.source.caption=Data Source
1341modularity.import.source.hint=Please upload an export file or select a source KB.
1342modularity.import.source.upload=Upload an export file (a source KB)
1343modularity.import.target.selectkb=Transfer from existing KB
1344modularity.import.set.tabname=Entity Set
1345modularity.import.set.caption=Entity Set
1346modularity.import.set.hint=Please select an entity set in the source KB. There could be several such sets in the KB. For example, every external synchronization configuration is associated with its own entity set.  
1347modularity.import.details.tabname=Details
1348modularity.import.details.hint=You may customize objects to import here. Note: non-importing a related object may break KB functionality. Unless you are 100% certain, we recommend you to leave default settings and import all relevant objects.
1349modularity.import.importnow.hint=Press this button to start import process.
1350modularity.import.edit.hint=Press this button to edit the set of objects to be imported.
1351modularity.import.details.auto=Import
1352modularity.import.details.custom=Customize
1353modularity.import.validate.nokb=Please select a source KB or upload an export file.
1354modularity.import.validate.noset=Please select an object set to transfer.
1355modularity.import.process.importing=Importing carrier KB...
1356modularity.import.process.error.patchers=There was a patcher error during import. Please use the Help/About $global_variable.ProductName to check that you are using a version at least as recent as the release ({0}), used to create the export file.
1357modularity.import.process.error=Error importing: {0}
1358modularity.import.process.transferring=Transferring changes...
1359modularity.import.process.cleaning=Cleaning up...
1360modularity.import.process.completed=Transfer completed
1361modularity.import.process.completed.successfully=successfully.
1362modularity.import.process.completed.error=with errors, please check logs.
1363modularity.import.process.completed.close=<a class=pointable href="{0}">Click here</a> to close this window.
1364modularity.import.validate.selectset=Select import source set.
1365modularity.import.validate.uploadsource=Upload the source file.
1366modularity.import.validate.selectsource=Select import source.
1367
1368modularity.compare.target.hint=Select KB to compare
1369modularity.compare.target.selectkb=Compare to existing KB
1370modularity.compare.run=Run compare
1371modularity.compare.process.transferring=Comparing KBs...
1372
1373modularity.updater.chartreports.reportname=Charts & Reports updater
1374modularity.updater.choicelists.reportname=Choice lists updater
1375modularity.updater.emailtemplate.reportname=Email Template updater
1376modularity.updater.rules.reportname=Rules updater
1377modularity.updater.actions.reportname=Actions updater
1378modularity.updater.ssearch.reportname=Saved Search updater
1379modularity.updater.tables.reportname=Tables & Fields updater
1380modularity.updater.views.reportname=Views updater
1381modularity.updater.workflow.reportname=Workflow updater
1382modularity.updater.GlobalVariablesUpdater.reportname=Global Variables updater
1383modularity.updater.RecordsUpdater.reportname=Records updater
1384modularity.updater.GroupsUpdater.reportname=Groups updater
1385modularity.updater.TeamsUpdater.reportname=Teams updater
1386modularity.updater.ImageRegItemUpdater.reportname=Images updater
1387modularity.updater.ColorSchemeUpdater.reportname=L&F updater
1388modularity.updater.SyncConfigUpdater.reportname=Sync Configurations updater
1389modularity.updater.EmailInboundSettingsUpdater.reportname=Email Inbound Settings updater
1390modularity.updater.ConversionUpdater.reportname=Data Conversion updater
1391table.help.popup=A Table is a collection of fields, records, relationships, and rules on which individual records are based.<br><br>Tables in Agiloft have a hierarchical structure, and subtables inherit fields and rules from their parent tables.
1392table.notdeleteable.message=This table has the \u201CDeletable\u201D property set to \u201CNo\u201D. You must set the \u201CDeletable\u201D property to \u201CYes\u201D before deleting the table.<br><br>Note: This option is designed to help you protect tables that are critical to your business processes, as well as the {0} internal tables. Please exercise caution when deleting them! If in doubt, don\u2019t hesitate to ask your administrator.
1393table.nosubtypes.message=This table does not allow the creation of subtypes!
1394table.outbound.displayfrom.label=Display the \u2018From\u2019 field to these Groups:
1395table.outbound.displayfrom.hint=Select which groups should see the \u2018From\u2019 field for user-initiated outgoing emails.
1396table.outbound.displayfrom.ifviewable.label=These groups can see FROM address as per their group permissions
1397table.outbound.displayfrom.ifviewable.hint=Only these groups will see FROM address based on their group permissions on the All Communications table. Their ability to do so can be restricted for this specific table by removing their permissions here.
1398table.outbound.editfrom.label=Allow these Groups to edit the \u2018From\u2019 address
1399table.outbound.editfrom.hint=Select which groups have the right to change the default sender\u2019s email address.
1400table.outbound.editfrom.ifeditable.label=These groups can edit FROM address as per their group permissions
1401table.outbound.editfrom.ifeditable.hint=Only these groups will be able to edit FROM address based on their group permissions on the All Communications table. Their ability to do so can be restricted for this specific table by removing their permissions here.
1402table.outbound.cancreate.hint=This setting specifies which groups can create new mails/notes
1403table.outbound.cancreate.label=These groups can create new mails/notes
1404table.outbound.cancreate.ifcreateable.hint=Only these groups will see the whole action bar on the communication table that allows them to create new communications, reply and forward, and so on. They will only be able to create, delete, and edit communications based on their group permissions on the All Communications table. Their ability to do so can be restricted for this specific table by removing their permissions here.
1405table.outbound.cancreate.ifcreateable.label=These groups can create new communications as per their group permissions
1406table.outbound.outgoing.from.personal=Personal Inbound Account
1407table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.caption=Default \u2018From\u2019 address for system-generated emails
1408table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.defaultoutgoing=Default system outgoing address {0}
1409table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.emailfor=Email address for field
1410table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.hint={0} can use different email addresses for the \u2018From\u2019 address and the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address when sending email.  This way, an email may look like it is coming from a particular salesperson (the \u2018From\u2019 address), however, if the recipient replies, the reply is sent to the system address (\u2018Reply-To\u2019 address) to update the appropriate record, rather than being sent back to the salesperson.<br><br>Enter the email address you wish to use as the \u2018From\u2019 address (as displayed to the recipient) when sending system emails about records in this table as a result of workflow or business rules.
1411table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.lastupdatedby=Email address of person who last updated the {0}
1412table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.tableincomaddress=Table\u2019s inbound address
1413table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.userDefined=User defined
1414table.outbound.outgoing.from.rules.userfrom=Link to Contact from field
1415table.outbound.outgoing.from.usersent.caption=\u2018From\u2019 address for user emails
1416table.outbound.outgoing.from.usersent.hint=You may want to use different logic when users <span class=SIBoldMark>manually</span> send emails from within the system.  Similarly, you can distinguish between the \u2018From\u2019 and \u2018Reply-To\u2019 addresses.<br><br>Use this option to set the default \u2018From\u2019 (as displayed to the recipient) address for user-originated (as opposed to system-generated) emails from staff interface.
1417table.outbound.outgoing.from.usersent.senderEmail=Sender\u2019s Email Address
1418table.outbound.outgoing.from.eui.usersent.caption=\u2018From\u2019 address for EUI user emails
1419table.outbound.outgoing.from.eui.usersent.hint=You can set a different default From address for users who send email from the end user interface, since they will typically be customers who should be sending from their own user address.
1420table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.hint=Choose what to do with bounced emails. The address selected here will be included in the outbound email as the return-path for the email. If you select an inbound {0} account, then the bounced email may be processed by Agiloft and forwarded to users or teams and the outbound communication record and its triggering record may be updated to show it was bounced. You may use the same address as the reply to address so that the bounced email may update the original record or create a new record, but this is not required. You can set up an inbound account just to receive bounced emails and to process them without allowing the creation or updating of any records.<br/> <br/> If you want to create records in some other table for manual review in response to bounces or auto-responses, enter the inbound address of that table in the "User defined" field and deselect the appropriate options on the Filters tab of the Inbound Email settings for that table
1421table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.label=Address to send Bounced Emails to:
1422table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.senderaddress=Sender\u2019s email address
1423table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress=Table\u2019s inbound address
1424table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.ifrecieved=When a bounce notification is received by this account
1425table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.ifrecieved.ignore=Ignore it
1426table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.ifrecieved.forward=Forward it to
1427table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.ifrecieved.forward.teams=Teams
1428table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.ifrecieved.forward.users=Users
1429table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.ifrecieved.forward.email=Email Address
1430table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.tableincommingaddress.updatestatus=Update the communication table email status field to
1431table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.addressfromcontact=Address from Contact field
1432table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.emailfromfield=Email address for field
1433table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.defaultoutboundaddress=Default system outgoing address
1434table.outbound.outgoing.from.bounced.userdefined=User defined
1435table.outbound.displayreplyto.label=Display the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 field to these groups:
1436table.outbound.displayreplyto.hint=Select whether users should see the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 field when creating an email.
1437table.outbound.displayreplyto.ifviewable.label=These groups can see REPLY-TO address as per their group permissions
1438table.outbound.displayreplyto.ifviewable.hint=Only these groups will see REPLY-TO address based on their group permissions on the All Communications table. Their ability to do so can be restricted for this specific table by removing their permissions here.
1439table.outbound.editreplyto.label=Allow these Groups to edit the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address
1440table.outbound.editreplyto.hint=Select which groups have the right to edit the default \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address. It is recommended that you only allow administrators to edit this address.
1441table.outbound.editreplyto.ifeditable.hint=Only these groups will edit REPLY-TO address based on their group permissions on the All Communications table. Their ability to do so can be restricted for this specific table by removing their permissions here.
1442table.outbound.editreplyto.ifeditable.label=These groups can edit REPLY-TO address as per their group permissions
1443table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.enabled.hint=Email tracking is enabled for any table by turning on this option. If emails are sent to records in this table, the system will capture statistics on bounced emails, unsubscribes, opens, and URL clicks within the emails.<br><br>New options are also added to the outbound Email Dialog when this is enabled<br><br>If this option is greyed out here, you must first run the Email Marketing Conversion from the Admin Console to create the necessary fields and tables. This is found on the Knowledgebases/Options screen.
1444table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.enabled.label=Enable Email Marketing on this table?
1445table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.tracking.hint=If you choose yes here, then all outbound emails will be tracked for whether they are opened, bounced, etc.  If No, then you can turn on tracking on a per email basis by checking the box to enable it on the individual email dialog
1446table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.tracking.label=Turn on tracking for all emails sent from this table by default?
1447table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.status.hint=When email marketing is turned on and this wizard is saved, a field called Email Status is needed in the table to hold the results.  This field exists already in the main contact and lead tables.  If you are using this on a different table, you must add it as a choice field with the appropriate choice values (use the choice list called email status).  This field will be updated with the result of the latest marketing email to the record in this table. Choose the Email field that this status should refer to. 
1448table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.status.label=Email Field for recipients:
1449table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.status.field=Field to track Email Status:
1450table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.status.newfieldlabel=Email Status
1451table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.status.optiontext={0} (New)
1452table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.messageerror=The Unsubscribe text must contain the string {0}. When the email is sent, it will be substituted for by the text specified in the \u2018Text for Unsubscribe link\u2019
1453table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.hint=A mailing address and Unsubscribe link should be included with marketing emails to comply with the Can-Spam law.<br><br>When an unsubscribe link is clicked in the email, the Email Status fields in the record for the recipient and in the outbound communication record are both changed to Unsubscribed.<br><br>You can also define the page to take users to after they have unsubscribed.<br><br>The unsubscribe link will be placed at the bottom of the outbound email
1454table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.label=Mailing Address and Unsubscribe
1455table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.include=Include Unsubscribe link in emails by default
1456table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.notinclude=Don&#39;t include it by default
1457table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.text=Show this text to Unsubscribe:
1458table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.linktext=Text for Unsubscribe link in above message
1459table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.url=ExitURL for Unsubscribe click:
1460table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribe.physicaladdress=Enter your company physical address here
1461table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.unsubscribelink.defaulttext=If you no longer wish to receive emails from us, please click here {0}
1462table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.setfieldonunsubscribe.hint=When an Unsubscribe link is clicked by a recipient you can set a field in the person\u2019s record to a particular value. This is in addition to setting the Email Status field to Unsubscribed and it is purely optional.
1463table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.setfieldonunsubscribe.label=Additional Unsubscribe Field:
1464table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.setfieldonunsubscribe.setvalue=Set value:
1465table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaigninfo.field=Field to include in the outbound email:
1466table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.sameemailerror=You have selected the option to Send same email to all recipients while also enabling Email Marketing. These options are incompatible and the result of sending the same email will be to invalidate the counts for marketing emails. Please deselect the Send same email option or disable email marketing.
1467table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaignfilter.hint=This filter controls which Campaigns can be selected on the email dialog. It allows you to prevent confusion and simplify the interface by excluding campaigns that are no longer active.
1468table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaignfilter.label=Filter the records that can be selected:
1469table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaignfilter.all=All Records
1470table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaignfilter.search=those meeting this saved search:
1471
1472table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaigninfo.label=Campaign Table:
1473table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.campaigninfo.hint=When sending a marketing email, you can link it to a particular record in a table that represents the marketing campaign.<br><br>It is strongly recommended that you use the predefined Campaign table, as it is preconfigured with the statistical fields to report on your email campaigns.<br><br>If you choose to use a custom table instead, select it here.  If no campaign table/field is selected here, then the email dialog will not display the linked field.  Tracking may still be done, but no summary information will be collected.
1474table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.missingrecipient=You have defined the {0} as the address that will be tracked for marketing, but you have not selected this field as the default \u2018To\u2019 address. It is advisable to select this field as the default recipient address.
1475table.outbound.outgoing.marketing.missingemailstatus=You have not defined the field to be used to report Email Status. Until you define such a field, the system will not be able to track opens, clicks and so on.
1476table.outbound.outgoing.replyto.rules.caption=Default \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address for system-generated emails
1477table.outbound.outgoing.replyto.rules.hint=Set the email address you wish to use as the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address (the address that is populated into the \u2018To\u2019 field when the user clicks <span class=SIBoldMark>Reply</span>) when system emails are sent about records in this table as a result of workflow or business rules.<br><br>It is highly recommended that you use one of the incoming email accounts for the current table as the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address, so that any replies update the original record.
1478table.outbound.outgoing.replyto.usersent.caption=Default \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address for user emails
1479table.outbound.outgoing.replyto.usersent.hint=Set the default \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address for user-initiated (as opposed to system-generated) emails.<br><br>It is recommended that you use one of the incoming email accounts for the current table as the \u2018Reply-To\u2019 address, so that any replies update the original record.
1480table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultFormatOriginal.caption=Default format for outgoing user emails
1481table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultFormatOriginal.hint=Set the default format of outgoing emails for this account.  If an outgoing email is a reply to or forward of an existing email, it will be sent using the format of the original email.  Otherwise, this setting controls the default format of user emails.  Note: Users can modify the default format as needed.
1482table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultFormatOriginal.html=HTML
1483table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultFormatOriginal.plainText=Plain Text
1484table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultNoteType.caption=By default, new notes are:
1485table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultNoteType.hint=<span style="color:red">The Notes feature is deprecated.</span></br> The Communications table can store user-added notes in addition to email.  Notes may be classified as Internal (viewable by users with the permission to view internal notes) or Public (viewable by all users who can view records in the Communications table).<br><br>Select whether new notes will be Internal or Public by default.<br><br>Note: Users creating the notes can change their type as needed.
1486table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultNoteType.internal=Internal
1487table.outbound.outgoing.to.defaultNoteType.public=Public
1488table.outbound.outgoing.to.editAutomaticCC.caption=Allow these groups to view and edit the CC/BCC fields:
1489table.outbound.outgoing.to.editAutomaticCC.hint=If you have set up a CC or BCC to be sent automatically, select the groups that will have the CC field and the BCC field visible and available for editing (even if these fields are not visible, carbon copies (CC) and blind carbon copies (BCC) are still sent as you configure in this wizard).
1490table.outbound.outgoing.to.formatOriginal.caption=Format original text:
1491table.outbound.outgoing.to.formatOriginal.hint=Select the formatting of the original or quoted text, when replying.
1492table.outbound.outgoing.to.formatOriginal.prefixSymbol.left=Prefix each line of original (quoted) text with
1493table.outbound.outgoing.to.formatOriginal.prefixSymbol.right=if using plain text editor
1494table.outbound.outgoing.to.formatOriginal.quoteColor=Color original (quoted) text if using HTML editor
1495table.outbound.outgoing.to.reply.caption=When replying
1496table.outbound.outgoing.to.reply.hint=Select whether email sent in response to another message should include the original text.
1497table.outbound.outgoing.to.reply.includeInReply=Include original text in Reply
1498table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.bcc=Add BCC to the
1499table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.caption=When users send email from this account
1500table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.cc=Add CC
1501table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.creator=Creator of the record
1502table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.emails=Email address from field(s)
1503table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.hint=When users send an email, you can configure the system to automatically send carbon copies (CC) or blind carbon copies (BCC) of that email to the selected addresses. To create a rule controlling when and how CC\u2019s/BCC\u2019s are sent, click here.
1504table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.nocopy=Do not automatically send a copy
1505table.outbound.outgoing.to.sendingMailFromTable.users=Email address for user(s)
1506table.outbound.outgoing.to.setto.blank=Leave the \u2018To\u2019 field blank
1507table.outbound.outgoing.to.setto.caption=Set the \u2018To\u2019 field to
1508table.outbound.outgoing.to.setto.email=Email address for this field
1509table.outbound.outgoing.to.setto.hint=When the user sends a reply (which can happen, for example, if the user clicks the Reply hyperlink when viewing an email), the \u2018To\u2019 address will automatically take the value of the \u2018From\u2019 address of the original email. The \u2018From\u2019 address is determined by the logic you set on the <span class=SIBoldMark>Account</span> tab.<br><br>If the user sends an email that is not a reply from staff interface, it will have the default \u2018To\u2019 address that you select here. Note: Users will be able to change the \u2018To\u2019 address as needed.
1510table.outbound.outgoing.to.setEUIto.hint=You can set a different default address for users who send email in the end user interface, since they will typically be customers who should be sending to the system incoming address.
1511table.outbound.outgoing.to.setEUIto.caption=Set the \u2018To\u2019 field for mails sent from End User Interface to
1512table.outbound.outgoing.to.setto.this=Email address for this field
1513table.outbound.outgoing.to.setto.user=Contact from this field
1514table.outbound.outgoing.to.doNotSentIDInSubject.caption=Include ID[ ] in Subject
1515table.outbound.outgoing.to.doNotSentIDInSubject.hint=Select whether the message ID should be included to the subject line of the email.<br><br>Warning: {0} also places the message ID in the SMTP headers, but some mail servers discard this information so {0} may not be able to process the reply action when this checkbox is selected.
1516table.outbound.outgoing.to.doNotSentIDInSubjectd.info=Do Not Include ID[ ] in Subject
1517table.outbound.outgoing.to.includeao.hint=Outbound emails from this table can include a hidden code at the top of the email that can be used to truncate previous content when an email response is received to an outbound email from this table.  Suppose your customers often just hit reply to the email, quoting the whole text of previous conversations, and you are mapping their reply into an append only field.<br><br>In the Inbound email setup for this table, you can choose an option to truncate all material in the email update that follows the hidden code when mapping the email body into a field in the table.  The inbound communication record will not be truncated, just the content mapped into a field in the main table.  To enable this, select Yes for this option.
1518table.outbound.outgoing.to.includeao.label=Include hidden code at top of emails to permit truncating mapped replies:
1519table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.hint=Emails sent to multiple recipients can be sent as normal CC's only if the email body contains the same exact text so that an SMTP server can send a single email with standard cc technology.<br/><br/>In many cases, due to permissions, inclusion of hyperlinks for logging in and editing a record, or other field variables included in an email, emails sent to multiple recipients must be sent individually and with distinct content, so the other recipients cannot be put in the cc or to field of the email.<br/><br/>The system can automatically include a text message at the bottom of the email body identifying any other recipients.  If you choose to include this text, you can define whether only email addresses should be shown for all recipients, or whether known recipients (if an email address can be resolved to a user in {0}'s contacts table) should have their Full Name displayed as well or instead of their email address.  If the user is not known, the email address only will be shown no matter which option is selected.
1520table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.info=Include text note at bottom of email body identifying the "To" and "CC" recipients of the email
1521table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.caption=Identifying the "To" and "CC" recipients of the email
1522table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.textToInclude=This email was sent to:
1523table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.emailOnly=Show just the email addresses of recipients
1524table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.emailAndName=Show both email address and Full Name field of recipients known by the system
1525table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOption.nameOnly=Show just the Full Name of recipients known by the system
1526table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOptionSendToAll.hint=Send same email to all recipients. <br/> If selected, the exact same email is always be sent to all the CC/BCC recipients as is sent to the first of the To recipient. Even hotlinks, $name, etc will be the same.
1527table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOptionSendToAll.label=Send same email to all recipients
1528table.outbound.outgoing.to.toccOptionSendToAll.info=Send same email to all recipients
1529table.outbound.outgoing.finish.unexpectedconfigtype=The configuration of the project has been changed by administrator. You will need to re-enter this wizard and re-do the changes to the settings.
1530table.outbound.subtable.label=Copy settings to all subtables
1531table.outbound.subtable.text=You can propagate your settings to all subtables of a given table by selecting this checkbox. You might still need to edit the subtables\u2019 options to provide a different default outbound email address for each subtable.<br><br><span class=SIBoldMark>Warning:</span> A subtable\u2019s current settings might be overwritten if you edit the parent table and choose to propagate the settings down the hierarchy.
1532table.outbound.tab.fromOptions=From Options
1533table.outbound.tab.table=Table
1534table.outbound.tab.toOptions=To Options
1535table.outbound.tab.marketing=Marketing
1536table.emailtemplates.templatesTab=Templates
1537table.emailtemplates.hint=Select the subtype whose email templates you want to edit.
1538table.outbound.table.hint=Select the table for which you want to define outbound email options.
1539table.outbound.table.saveconfirmation=Selection of user table has been changed and you will be offered to configure outbound settings of the user table, but the settings made previously can be lost or saved. Please confirm that you want to save the settings made previously 
1540tables.conversion.overview=This screen defines field mapping and conversion rules so that records in this table can be \u201Cconverted\u201D into records in other tables using the Convert button.<popup title="For instance, when a Lead is qualified, clicking the Convert button can create a record in each of the Contact, Company, and Opportunity tables.<br><br>Records will be created in the order specified. If you are creating records in multiple tables and there are linked fields in those tables, you should create the source table of the linked fields first.  For instance, if you convert a Lead to a Contact, Company, and Opportunity, and the Contact and Opportunity records pull values in from the Company table, the Company record should be created first so that proper links can be created.">   ...More Help</popup>
1541tables.delete.wait=Deleting a table, please wait...
1542tables.fields.additionalmapping.groups=Groups
1543tables.fields.additionalmapping.hint=Additional Mapping
1544tables.fields.additionalmapping.label=Select a system field to be used for the {0} internal logic.
1545tables.fields.additionalmapping.login=Login
1546tables.fields.additionalmapping.password=Password
1547tables.fields.additionalmapping.primaryteam=Primary Team
1548tables.fields.additionalmapping.teams=Teams
1549tables.fields.calcsource.notfound=Calculated field {0} cannot be copied. Source field {1} not found for calculated field {0} in the table
1550tables.fields.calcsource.wrongdomain=Source field {1} for calculated field {0} has a wrong domain {2} instead of swrelateddata or swdao3link
1551tables.fields.choosefield.message=Please select a field.
1552tables.fields.choose-only-one-field.message=You can only select one field for this operation.
1553tables.fields.chooseoperation=Please select the desired operation.
1554tables.fields.column.default=Default
1555tables.fields.column.label=Field label
1556tables.fields.column.dbname=Field DbName
1557tables.fields.column.name=Field name
1558tables.fields.column.required=Required
1559tables.fields.column.type=Data Type
1560tables.fields.communicationtable=Communications table
1561tables.fields.confirmdelete.message=Are you sure that you want to delete the selected field?
1562tables.fields.confirmtabledelete.message=Are you sure that you want to delete this table?
1563tables.fields.copy=Copy fields (attributes only) from other table
1564tables.fields.copy.hint=To copy fields\u2019 definition from another table, press <span class=SIBoldMark>Copy Fields</span>. Once created, these fields become entirely independent of the source table. Only the field definition is actually copied, not the data in the fields.
1565tables.fields.copylink=selected fields from other table
1566tables.fields.copylink.copy=Copy
1567tables.fields.copylink.hint=To copy or link fields and values from other table(s), select an option from the list and press <span class=SIBoldMark>Copy</span>.
1568tables.fields.copylink.type.copy=copy
1569tables.fields.copylink.type.link=link
1570tables.fields.copylinkall=all fields from other table
1571tables.fields.copylinksingle=single field from other table
1572tables.fields.delete=To delete an existing field, select the radio button next to it and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Delete</span>.
1573tables.fields.duplicateMapping=Duplicates found, please check mapping
1574tables.fields.edit=Each record in a table consists of one or several fields that store data of certain type. This tab will help you provide the new table\u2019s definition by using preset fields, creating new fields or modifying existing ones. <br><br>The right-hand side control box shows the fields that this table inherits from its parent. You might want to delete the fields that are not necessary for the table you are creating, or edit the fields\u2019 definition by selecting the radio button next to the field and clicking <span class=SIBoldMark>Edit</span>.
1575tables.fields.hint=The fields that make up your table are listed below. To add a new field, select the <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span> drop-down and choose the field type. <help context="/index_datatypes.jspx.html"/>To move a field to a different subtable in the hierachy, select it and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Move</span>.To find fields that are not being actively used click
1576tables.fields.hint.here=here
1577tables.fields.linkto=Link to
1578tables.fields.list.action.hint=This field type is actually a button placed on the page that performs a specified action, such as running a script or updating a record.
1579tables.fields.list.action.title=Action
1580tables.fields.list.autoincrement.hint=This is an integer field that automatically increments by one for each new record in the table. Values in this field are commonly used as a unique identifier for each record.
1581tables.fields.list.autoincrement.title=Auto-increment
1582tables.fields.list.choice.hint={0} comes with a number of built-in choice lists. An example of a built-in choice list is the list of countries and time zones. Should you need a custom choice list, you can create one using this wizard.<br>
1583tables.fields.list.choice.title=Choice
1584tables.fields.list.communication.title=Communications table
1585tables.fields.list.compound.hint=Compound fields store the result of joining some fields together and displaying them as a single unit. An example of a compound field is the Full Name field, which is the compound of Title, First Name, and Last Name.<br>
1586tables.fields.list.compound.title=Compound
1587tables.fields.list.currency.hint=A currency field stores some money value in one of the national currencies; for instance $30.65 is interpreted as thirty US dollars and sixty-five cents.
1588tables.fields.list.currency.title=Currency
1589tables.fields.list.date.hint=A date field stores a date in one of the selected formats. An example of a date field\u2019s value is May 1, 2004.
1590tables.fields.list.date.title=Date
1591tables.fields.list.datetime.hint=A Date/Time field stores some date and specific time on that date. An example of a date/time field\u2019s value is May 1, 2004, 3:30pm.
1592tables.fields.list.datetime.title=Date/Time
1593tables.fields.list.elapsedtime.hint=An Elapsed Time field stores the amount of time that has elapsed since some point in the past. An example of the elapsed time field\u2019s value is 3 days, 8 hours, and 24 minutes.
1594tables.fields.list.elapsedtime.title=Elapsed Time
1595tables.fields.list.email.hint=An Email field stores one or more email addresses. Email fields can be configured to check email addresses for validity. For example, you can require that all email addresses contain the \u201C@\u201D character in them.
1596tables.fields.list.email.title=Email
1597tables.fields.list.emailpager.hint=An Email Pager field stores the email address of a pager. Email sent to a pager is sent as plain text, and all HTML formatting (if any) is automatically discarded.
1598tables.fields.list.emailpager.title=Email Pager
1599tables.fields.list.emailtree.hint={0} makes it possible to create records based on an incoming email, and, conversely, it allows you to generate email based on some user action on a record. The Email Tree field stores records created from incoming email and records used to create outgoing email.
1600tables.fields.list.emailtree.title=Email Tree
1601tables.fields.list.file.hint=File fields are used to store attached files. For example, a sales proposal or a snapshot of a screen might be attached to a record.<br>
1602tables.fields.list.file.title=File
1603tables.fields.list.float.hint=Floating Point fields are used to store decimal numbers, such as 2.71828183
1604tables.fields.list.float.title=Floating Point
1605tables.fields.list.hint={0} supports a wide range of built-in data types, and it also allows you to create your own complex data types by uniting several fields, linking the fields to other fields in the same or different table or imposing a specific format for a built-in data type. Each of the available data types is described as follows:
1606tables.fields.list.image.hint=Image fields store attached files that are displayed as pictures within the record. For example, an employee record might have a small photo of that employee.
1607tables.fields.list.image.title=Image
1608tables.fields.list.integer.hint=Integer fields are used to store integer numbers, such as 7, 194 or 2435.
1609tables.fields.list.integer.title=Integer
1610tables.fields.list.linkeddata.hint=This field type is used to create a table within a record that is populated with data that the record is linked to.<br>You might need to use this field type to show all the <span class=SIBoldMark>Cases</span> for which each customer is the \u201Cend-user\u201D within the <span class=SIBoldMark>User</span> record itself. This table is fully functional, and it allows users with appropriate permissions to create, edit or delete records.<br>When a new record is created using this table, it is automatically populated with the data from the record that it appears within. For example, when a new <span class=SIBoldMark>Case</span> is created in the previous example, it is created with the \u201Cend-user\u201D field(s) populated with that user\u2019s data.<br>
1611tables.fields.list.linkeddata.title=Related Table
1612tables.fields.list.embeddedtable.title=Embedded Search Result
1613tables.fields.list.emailsearchresult.title=Communications Search Result
1614tables.fields.list.linktoallfields.hint=This field type links to all of the fields in the selected table.
1615tables.fields.list.linktoallfields.title=Link to all fields in another table
1616tables.fields.list.linktoselectedfields.hint=This field type is actually a link to some fields from another table. For example, in the <span class=SIBoldMark>Training Courses</span> table, the <span class=SIBoldMark>Name</span>, <span class=SIBoldMark>Date</span> and <span class=SIBoldMark>Instructor</span> might be imported into the <span class=SIBoldMark>Employee</span> table so that it is possible to see the information on the courses that a particular employee has attended.
1617tables.fields.list.linktoselectedfields.title=Link to selected fields from another table
1618tables.fields.list.linktosinglefield.hint=This field type is actually a link to a field from another table. For example, the <span class=SIBoldMark>Assigned To</span> field is a link to the Login field in the User table.
1619tables.fields.list.linktosinglefield.title=Link to single field from another table
1620tables.fields.list.linkunion.hint=This field type links to the selected fields from two or more tables. An example of such a field is the field \u201CAssigned Party\u201D which can either be a company or an individual and which presents a list of Contacts or Companies to the user.
1621tables.fields.list.linkunion.title=Link to a single field from multiple tables
1622tables.fields.list.multichoice.hint=Multi-Choice fields store the drop-down lists that allow the selection of multiple items using the CTRL and the SHIFT keys. An example of a multi-choice field is the Certifications list.
1623tables.fields.list.multichoice.title=Multi-Choice
1624tables.fields.list.password.hint=A Password field stores passwords encrypted using one-way hash encryption. Passwords are always shown as asterisks on any {0} page.<br>
1625tables.fields.list.password.title=Password
1626tables.fields.list.shorttext.hint=A Short Text field stores some limited amount of text with the maximum length of up to 100000 characters.
1627tables.fields.list.shorttext.title=Short Text
1628tables.fields.list.telephone.hint=A Telephone/Fax field stores a phone or fax no. using a predefined format.
1629tables.fields.list.telephone.title=Telephone/Fax
1630tables.fields.list.text.hint=A Text field stores an amount of text that is considered unlimited for most purposes.
1631tables.fields.list.text.title=Text
1632tables.fields.list.time.hint=A Time field stores the time of day, for example 5pm or 3:30am.
1633tables.fields.list.time.title=Time
1634tables.fields.list.title=Data Type List
1635tables.fields.list.url.hint=A URL field stores a web site address using HTTP://... format.
1636tables.fields.list.url.title=URL
1637tables.fields.move.legend=Please select target subtable for field
1638tables.fields.new=To create a new field, select the type of the field and click <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span>.
1639tables.fields.notdeleteable.message=This field has the <span class=SIBoldMark>Deletable</span> property set to <span class=SIBoldMark>No</span>. You must set the <span class=SIBoldMark>Deletable</span> property to <span class=SIBoldMark>Yes</span>, before deleting or moving it.<br><br>Note: This option is designed to help you protect fields that are critical to your business processes, as well as the {0} internal fields. Please exercise caution when deleting them! If in doubt, do not hesitate to ask your administrator.
1640tables.fields.internal.message=This field is flagged as a system field and is therefore not deletable.
1641tables.fields.operation=Operation:
1642tables.fields.relateddata.kb.current=Current KnowledgeBase
1643tables.fields.relateddata.kb.hint=This field type is used to create a table within each {0} that is populated with data that it is linked to. For example, you might show the Cases for which each customer is the \u2018end-user\u2019 within the User record itself. <help context="/index_Linked_Fields.jspx.html"/> <br><br>This table is fully functional, and it allows users with appropriate permissions to create new records, edit existing records, etc.<br>When a new record is created using this table, it is automatically populated with the data from the record that it appears within. For example, when a new Case is created in our example, it is created with the \u2018end-user\u2019 field(s) populated with that user\u2019s data.
1644tables.fields.relateddata.kb.label=KnowledgeBase
1645tables.fields.relateddata.kb.other=Another KnowledgeBase:
1646tables.fields.relateddata.permissions.restrictfilter.hint=Basic access permissions for the Related table are defined by the user\u2019s access to the source table. For example, users who are only able to view their own entries in the source table are under the same restriction when the table is viewed from within another record.<br>This option applies an additional filter to the user\u2019s access permissions. For example, if they were only able to see their own entries and you add a saved search that selects entries less than three weeks old,  the table would show their own entries created over the last 3 weeks.
1647tables.fields.relateddata.permissions.restrictfilter.label=Additional filters
1648tables.fields.relateddata.permissions.reassign.hint=Allow users to unlink existing records from the related table. The unlink button can be removed from the related table action bar. Choose the action bar for the related table on the Display tab. 
1649tables.fields.relateddata.permissions.reassign.label=Allow users to unlink records.
1650tables.fields.relateddata.relation.hint=Select the relationship to the table whose data is displayed within the record.<br><br>The relationship between this table and field(s) in the current table must already have been established before you can create an \u201CRelated Table\u201D type. The list to the right shows relationships that have already been established using Field(s) from another table.
1651tables.fields.relateddata.relation.label=Table / Relationship
1652tables.fields.relateddata.view.custom=Display {0} using the
1653tables.fields.relateddata.view.default=Display {0} using the user\u2019s default View for {1}
1654tables.fields.relateddata.view.hint=Select whether the display of the Related table should be based on the current user\u2019s default View for that table or another View.<br><br>For instance, if you are setting the display of Cases for a given Customer, choosing the default View would display the Cases in the format the user would see when switching to Cases tab on the main Toolbar. <popup title="Regardless of your selection here, the user will have the option to select a different view that he or she is authorized to use.">   ...More Help</popup>
1655tables.fields.relateddata.view.new=Create New View
1656tables.fields.relateddata.view.edit=Edit View
1657tables.fields.relateddata.menu.custom1=Display the
1658tables.fields.relateddata.menu.custom2=Action Bar above the table
1659tables.fields.relateddata.menu.show=Display the user\u2019s default action bar for the source table
1660tables.fields.relateddata.menu.hide=Do not include an Action Bar with the table
1661tables.fields.relateddata.menu.hint=Select if to show data actions menu for the table
1662tables.fields.relateddata.menu.show.edit=Allow all actions in Action Bar only when editing the main record
1663tables.fields.relateddata.menu.show.editview=Allow all actions in Action Bar when viewing or editing the main record
1664tables.fields.relateddata.menu.show.hint=Allow all actions in Action Bar
1665tables.fields.save.constraintviolation=Existing data does not conform to the condition ({0}={1})
1666tables.fields.save.nonunique=Field \u201C{0}\u201D currently has non-unique values. Run a search with a duplicate filter on this field to find the duplicates and remove them.
1667tables.fields.save.nonunique.add=Field \u201C{0}\u201D currently has non-unique values. Run a search with a duplicate filter on this field to find the duplicates and remove them.
1668tables.fields.save.existingdao=Column \u201C{0}\u201D cannot be created, because it already exists in hieararchy as part of linked field. Change name of field and try again.
1669tables.fields.save.unknownexception={0}
1670tables.fields.type=Type:
1671tables.fields.union=single field from multiple tables
1672tables.finish.mandatory.message=Incomplete entry found, please fill out the required fields.
1673tables.general.calendar.hint=<popup title="record.help.popup">Records</popup> in this table may optionally have Calendar entries. If so, it is possible to schedule <popup title="event.help.popup">events</popup> and view/edit their calendars.   <popup title="** Sample Help Popup ** (The text below is subject to change when the Calendar spec is reviewed and approved by Colin)<br><br>In a default configuration, you can create Schedules for the built-in tables, like User or Meeting Room. You can also create your own tables with calendar entries, which allows you to define a Schedule for them. For example, you can create the Schedule of equipment that is used at trade shows.<br><br>Tables that support Calendar entries have <span class=SIBoldMark>Events</span> tab displayed when an object (record) is created or edited.">   ...More Help</popup>
1674tables.general.calendar.label=Calendar
1675tables.general.calendar.provide.label=Provide calendars for records
1676tables.general.deleteable.hint=This option controls whether it is possible to delete this <popup title="table.help.popup">table</popup>. This option is used to protect tables that are critical to your business processes.    <popup title="If set to <span class=SIBoldMark>No</span>, the system will prevent attempts to delete this table or any table higher up in the hierachy until you change the table\u2019s <span class=SIBoldMark>Deletable</span> property to <span class=SIBoldMark>Yes</span>.">   ...More Help</popup>
1677tables.general.deleteable.label=Deletable
1678tables.general.label.hint=The label is the identifying name of the <popup title="table.help.popup">table</popup> seen by staff and end-users. It can be modified at any time and like all \u201Clabels\u201D in the system, it is NLS compliant, and can be translated into the user's native language. The label is also used for individual <popup title="A Record is a collection of field values. Each record is represented as a row in a database table.<br><br>For example: \u2018<span class=SIItalicMark>Records within the Sales Prospect table contain the fields Customer Name, Address and Telephone Number\u2019</span>">records</popup>.   <popup title="A table\u2019s label is used to tag the table itself or a single record from that table. A table\u2019s label is seen by {0} users.<br><br>The use of blanks in a label is not advised.">   ...More Help</popup>
1679tables.general.label.label=Table Label
1680tables.general.logicalname.label=Logical Table Name
1681tables.general.message.tableExists=Table %0 already exists
1682tables.general.message.tableLabelMandatory=Field \u201CTable Label\u201D is required
1683tables.general.message.tableNameMandatory=Field \u201CTable Name\u201D is required
1684tables.general.name.hint=The internal <popup title="kb.help.popup">KnowledgeBase</popup> name of the table. Staff and end users do not see this name and it cannot easily be changed once it has been set.  <popup title="A table name may not contain spaces or non-alphanumeric characters. By default, a table name is constructed by replacing blanks and special characters in the label with \u201C_\u201D characters.">   ...More Help</popup>
1685tables.general.name.label=Table Name
1686tables.general.overview=This wizard will help you to create a new table, or edit an existing table in the {0} table hierarchy. <help context="/index_Object.jspx.html"/>
1687tables.general.pluralLabel.hint=The Plural Table Label is used when referring to multiple <popup title="A Record is a collection of field values. Each record is represented as a row in a database table.<br><br>Example: \u2018<span class=SIItalicMark>Records within the Sales Prospect table contain the fields Customer Name, Address and Telephone Number\u2019</span>">records</popup> in a table. <help context="/index_Record.jspx.html"/><br>For example: Customer Accounts.<br><br>By default, a Plural Table label is constructed by adding an \u201Cs\u201D to the table label.
1688tables.general.pluralLabel.label=Plural Table Label
1689tables.general.omit.hint=Omit the table label from members of the following groups when they view the table or create or edit records in it.
1690tables.graphics.icon.hint=To change the default icon, please select an icon from the list.
1691tables.graphics.icon.label=Current icon&nbsp;
1692tables.graphics.icon.remove=Remove icon
1693tables.graphics.icon.system=System icons can\u2019t be removed
1694tables.graphics.message.iconAlreadyUsed=Using the same icon for unrelated tables is not recommended. You have selected an icon that is already used for the %0 table(s). Are you sure that you want to proceed?
1695tables.graphics.message.iconIsMandatory=Please select an icon.
1696tables.graphics.overview=Each <popup title="table.help.popup">table</popup> has an icon that provides a visual image of its use. By default, a table inherits the icon from its parent in the hierarchy.
1697tables.graphics.unusedIcons=Available (unused) icons
1698tables.graphics.upload.hint=If the icons above do not meet your needs, you may upload your own icon. To do so, please enter the file name or click <span class=SIBoldMark>Browse</span> to navigate your local hard drive.    <popup title="To upload your own icon, you need to provide a full path to the file located on your computer or across the network, then click <span class=SIBoldMark>Upload</span>. To provide for a consistent appearance, the icon size should be roughly 16 * 16 pixels.">   ...More Help</popup>
1699tables.graphics.usedIcons=Icons already in use as Table Icons
1700tables.graphics.unselected.hint=This icon is used to represent the table in the left hand pane when it is not selected
1701tables.graphics.unselected.label=Icon When Table is Unselected
1702tables.graphics.lastopened.hint=This icon is used to represent a record from the table in the "Last Opened" area of the left pane
1703tables.graphics.lastopened.label=Last Opened Icon
1704tables.graphics.unselected.default=Default unselected icon:
1705tables.graphics.unselected.mono=Auto-create monochrome version of above icon
1706tables.graphics.unselected.color=Use full color version of table icon
1707tables.layout.apply=Apply changes to all users
1708tables.layout.buttons=Buttons
1709tables.layout.changealgnrules=Set Alignment
1710tables.layout.edittext=Edit Text
1711tables.layout.clickdrag=Drag the available fields to the desired tab and position on the form.
1712tables.layout.colisnotempty=The currently selected column is not empty. Please move all fields to a different column before deleting it.
1713tables.layout.column=Column
1714tables.layout.commonarea.hint=Fields placed in the &quot;Common Area&quot; are shown above all the tabs and are therefore always visible.
1715tables.layout.commonareatab=Common Area
1716tables.layout.copylayout=Copy this layout to the End User Layout
1717tables.layout.copylayout.done=The copying has been performed
1718tables.layout.delete=Delete
1719tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.backtotop=Back to top
1720tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.cancel=Cancel
1721tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.columnsalignment.alignallcolumns=Align all columns
1722tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.columnsalignment.contigousrows=Align contiguous rows with same number of columns
1723tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.columnsalignment.hint=You can choose how columns are laid out when the template is generated.<br><br>Selecting <span class=SIBoldMark>Align all columns</span> will automatically align the labels and data input boxes so that all columns are aligned with each other.<br><br>Selecting <span class=SIBoldMark>Align rows with same number of columns</span> will automatically align the labels and data input boxes so that the columns on all lines containing the same number of fields are aligned.<br><br>Selecting <span class=SIBoldMark>Align contiguous rows with same number of columns</span> will automatically align the labels and data input boxes so that the columns on all contiguous rows containing the same number of fields are aligned.<br><br>Selecting <span class=SIBoldMark>Save space</span> will not align any columns, but will move all columns to the left.<br><br><b>Note:</b> If columns do not align, it may be because the leftmost column is wider than the "Width of multi-column fields" specified below, so try increasing that value.
1724tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.columnsalignment.label=Choose how to align columns
1725tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.columnsalignment.rowswithsamecols=Align rows with same number of columns
1726tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.columnsalignment.savespace=Save space
1727tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.finish=Finish
1728tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.labelsalignment.hint=You can choose how field labels are aligned in relation to the input boxes that follow them.
1729tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.labelsalignment.label=Align field labels
1730tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.labelsalignment.left=Left
1731tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.labelsalignment.right=Right
1732tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.expandinpboxes=Expand input boxes that are left aligned to right align them
1733tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.hint=Set the default number of nonbreakable spaces between adjacent columns.<br><br>You can wrap labels that are too long so that they do not push subsequent columns too far to the right.<br><br>You can also expand the input boxes so that any input boxes that are aligned on the left are also aligned on the right (i.e. they are the same size and will line up).
1734tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.label=Set additional spacing options
1735tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.separate=Separate adjacent columns by
1736tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.separate.spaces=spaces
1737tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.wrapafter=Wrap labels after
1738tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other1.wrapafter.characters=characters
1739tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other2.hint=Fields that are wider than the amount specified here are automatically considered to span multiple columns.<br><br>For example, if the multi-column field width was 40 and there were two rows:<ul><li>Row A had 2 fields, 50 characters wide and 30 characters wide<li>Row B had 3 fields, each 20 characters wide</ul>{0} would consider that the first field of Row A took up 2 columns and so would align the second field of Row A with the third field of Row B.
1740tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other2.widthofmulticol=Width of multi-column fields
1741tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other2.widthofmulticol.characters=characters
1742tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other3.alignfirstcolumn=Align first column
1743tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.other3.hint=This setting allows you to specify that the first column in each row is always aligned, no matter how many other rows the columns contain.
1744tables.layout.dialogs.buttons.title=Buttons
1745tables.layout.dialogs.buttons.hint=This group of settings controls navigation buttons in the form
1746tables.layout.dialogs.buttons.label=Buttons
1747tables.layout.dialogs.buttons.finishnext=Save and Next / Cancel and Next
1748tables.layout.dialogs.buttons.finishnew=Save and New / Cancel and New
1749tables.layout.dialogs.alignrules.title=Set Alignment
1750tables.layout.dialogs.edittab.cancel=Cancel
1751tables.layout.dialogs.edittab.editname.hint=This is the name of the new tab that users will see.<br><br>You can change the order of tabs by dragging them in the row of tab names on Layout page.
1752tables.layout.dialogs.edittab.editname.label=Tab name
1753tables.layout.dialogs.edittab.finish=Finish
1754tables.layout.dialogs.edittab.title=Edit Tab
1755tables.layout.dialogs.insertcolumn.cancel=Cancel
1756tables.layout.dialogs.insertcolumn.finish=Finish
1757tables.layout.dialogs.insertcolumn.label=Select new column\u2019s position
1758tables.layout.dialogs.insertcolumn.leftof=Left of selected column
1759tables.layout.dialogs.insertcolumn.rightof=Right of selected column
1760tables.layout.dialogs.insertcolumn.title=Insert Column
1761tables.layout.dialogs.insertrow.aboveof=Above selected row
1762tables.layout.dialogs.insertrow.belowof=Below selected row
1763tables.layout.dialogs.insertrow.selectposition.label=Select position of a new row
1764tables.layout.dialogs.insertrow.title=Insert Row
1765tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.cancel=Cancel
1766tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.finish=Finish
1767tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.tabname.hint=This tab will be visible to users under this name.
1768tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.tabname.label=Tab name
1769tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.tabposition.hint=Select whether the new tab is positioned to the right or left of the currently selected tab.<br><br>You can change the order of tabs by dragging them in the row of tab names at the bottom of the page.
1770tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.tabposition.label=Position new Tab
1771tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.tabposition.leftof=Left of selected tab
1772tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.tabposition.rightof=Right of selected tab
1773tables.layout.dialogs.inserttab.title=Add Tab
1774tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.cancel=Cancel
1775tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.finish=Finish
1776tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.position.aboveof=Above selected Row
1777tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.position.belowof=Below selected Row
1778tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.position.label=Position a comment line
1779tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.text.label=Comment text
1780tables.layout.dialogs.inserttext.title=Insert Comment
1781tables.layout.edittabname=Rename Tab
1782tables.layout.edittabname.unique=Two tabs are going to have the same name, but a tab name should be unique. Enter another name
1783tables.layout.enduser=End user
1784tables.layout.firsttabunrem=There must be at least one tab. You cannot remove the last tab.
1785tables.layout.hiddentab=Hidden
1786tables.layout.new=New
1787tables.layout.newtab=New Tab
1788tables.layout.newfields=Available Fields
1789tables.layout.overview=This wizard will help you design an entry form for <popup title="record.help.popup">records</popup> in your <popup title="table.help.popup">table</popup>. You can arrange the <popup title="field.help.popup">field</popup> inputs on several tabs to group information, and you can add as many tabs as you need to create a highly-efficient layout. <popup title="You can create separate entry forms for records in this table for Staff interface and End-User interface. To select an interface, click its name in the top row.<br>An entry form consists of one or several tabs, and each tab is made up of rows and columns that help you set the positioning of each element, such as a table field or short help text.<br>You can add new tabs, rename existing tabs, or delete the tabs you don\u2019t need. To add a new field to the form or move a field within the tab, drag and drop it to the desired location. To move a field between tabs, drop it to the target tab\u2019s name.<br>To add a new tab, click Tab on the New toolbar and enter the tab name.<br> To create new space for a field, click Row on the New toolbar and specify if you want it created above or below the currently selected field.<br>To add a new Column, click Column on the New toolbar, and specify if you want the column inserted to the right or left of the currently selected column.<br>To add a text label, select Text on the New toolbar, select where you want to position it, and enter the text.<br>To delete a Tab, Column, Row, or Text, select it and then click the desired action on the Delete toolbar.<br>You can specify a custom alignment of the elements on the form by clicking Set Alignment.">   ...More Help</popup>
1790tables.layout.rollback.button=Rollback layout changes
1791tables.layout.rollback.warning=All the changes made after the page is loaded will be lost. Continue?
1792tables.layout.row=Row
1793tables.layout.rowisnotempty=The currently selected row is not empty. Please move all fields to a different row before deleting it.
1794tables.layout.staff=Staff
1795tables.layout.tab=Tab
1796tables.layout.tabisnotempty=The currently selected tab is not empty. Please move all fields to a different tab before deleting this tab.
1797tables.layout.text=Text
1798tables.layout.updatechildren=Propagate layout changes to all subtables
1799tables.move.caption=Moving Table
1800tables.move.legend=Please select a new parent for your table
1801tables.move.nomove=This table can\u2019t be moved within hierarchy
1802tables.move.chosetable=Choose a table
1803tables.permissions.create.hint=This option controls which <popup title="group.help.popup">group\u2019s</popup> members may create new <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>.
1804tables.permissions.create.label=Create {0}
1805tables.permissions.deleteothers.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may delete <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> that other people own.
1806tables.permissions.deleteothers.label=Delete others {0}
1807tables.permissions.deleteown.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may delete <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> that they own.
1808tables.permissions.deleteown.label=Delete own {0}
1809tables.permissions.editothers.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may edit <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> that other people own.
1810tables.permissions.editothers.label=Edit others\u2019 {0}
1811tables.permissions.editown.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may edit <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> that they own.
1812tables.permissions.editown.label=Edit own {0}
1813tables.permissions.hidetable.hint=If you want to hide this table from view for all users, choose the option to remove it from the toolbar. Note that deselecting this option once it has been selected and saved will do nothing. To turn on the table at a later date, edit the group permissions for the groups you wish to enable.
1814tables.permissions.hidetable.label=Option:
1815tables.permissions.hidetable.caption=Hide the table from all users
1816tables.permissions.overview=This page helps you customize user access rights, also known as permissions, for this table. You can assign granular permissions to select groups of users, in order to enable them to create, view, edit, or delete records in this table. <help context="/index_Record_Level_Permissions.jspx.html"/>
1817tables.permissions.ownership1.hint=When setting record and field access  permissions, there is a distinction between a user\u2019s \u201Cown\u201D records and other records. For example, resellers may only be allowed to view Companies that they \u201Cown\u201D.<br><br>Choose the field in this table that is matched against the field in the user record to define \u201Cown\u201D records.<br><br>For instance, if the \u201Cowner\u201D is the person who created the record, choose the Created By field.
1818tables.permissions.ownership1.label=Field used to define ownership
1819tables.permissions.ownership2.hint=Choose the field in the People table that is matched against the field selected above. For example if the \u201CCreated By\u201D field in a record matches the \u201CLogin\u201D field in the People record of the current user, that user is the \u201Cowner\u201D of the record.<br><br>You can also choose a field such as Primary Team which is shared by many users.<br><br>For security reasons, choose a field in the People table that only trusted users can change, otherwise they might gain access to other people\u2019s records by changing their own user record.
1820tables.permissions.ownership2.label=Matching field in People table
1821tables.permissions.ownership.incompatible=Incompatible types of {0} ($type1) and of {1} ($type2)
1822tables.permissions.viewothers.hint=The option controls which group\u2019s members may view <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> that are owned by other people.
1823tables.permissions.viewothers.label=View others\u2019 {0}
1824tables.permissions.viewown.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may view <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> that they own.
1825tables.permissions.viewown.label=View own {0}
1826tables.permissions.export.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may export <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> to an external source, such as an ASCII file..
1827tables.permissions.export.label=Export {0}
1828tables.permissions.import.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may import <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> from an external source, such as an ASCII file.
1829tables.permissions.import.label=Import {0}
1830tables.permissions.cannotset={0} permission cannot be set for this group because it already has a saved search permission filter. You can look at full permissions set at Setup/Access/Manage Groups
1831tables.permissions.view.own=View own
1832tables.permissions.view.others=View others
1833tables.permissions.edit.own=Edit own
1834tables.permissions.edit.others=Edit others
1835tables.permissions.delete.own=Delete own
1836tables.permissions.delete.others=Delete others
1837tables.permissions.massdelete.hint=This option controls which group\u2019s members may delete more than 3 <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> in a single operation.
1838tables.permissions.massdelete.label=Mass delete {0}
1839tables.indexes.fts.label=Create FTS index for this table
1840tables.indexes.ftsoption.hint=This option controls whether or not a Full Text search index should be created for this table and what words/file types should be excluded or included in the index.<br><br>The first option \u201CExclude from index\u201D controls what should be excluded and is the most commonly used. Please note that if you include words with fewer than 3 characters it will greatly increase the size of the database and two letters words such as \u201Cit\u201D, \u201Che\u201D, are so common that they are seldom useful for searching.<br><br>The second option \u201COnly index the following words\u201D allows you to specify that -only- specific words should be included in the index.
1841tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude=Exclude from index
1842tables.indexes.ftsoption.include=Only index the following words:
1843tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.attaches.type=Attached files of type:
1844tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.attaches.excepttype=All attached files except types:
1845tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.attaches.all=All Attached files
1846tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.words.fewer=Words with fewer than
1847tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.words.longer=Words with more than
1848tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.words.hex=Words that are all hex characters 0-9,a-e
1849tables.indexes.ftsoption.exclude.words.common=Common words:
1850tables.indexes.check.hint=If the system is restarted while an index is being created or deleted, it is possible for the database to get out of sync.<br><br>The Check Indexes button compares the indexes found in the database with those recognized by {0} and reports on any discrepancies.
1851tables.indexes.check.label=Index verificiation
1852tables.indexes.check.button=Check Indexes
1853tables.indexes.sync.hint=The Synchronize Indexes button syncs with the database and also syncs the database internal tables.<br>Note: This operation takes about 5 minutes to run on a table with 1M records, there is no need to use it unless you the "Check Indexes" button reports a problem, or log file messages cause you to suspect that the database is out of sync.
1854tables.indexes.sync.button=Synchronize Indexes
1855tables.indexes.sync.confirm=Synchronization process can take several minutes and table will be locked until it completes. Are you sure?
1856tables.indexes.report.name=Index Name
1857tables.indexes.report.ew_columns=Indexed Columns in Agiloft
1858tables.indexes.report.db_columns=Indexed Columns in database
1859tables.indexes.report.status=Status
1860tables.indexes.report.ok=Ok
1861tables.indexes.report.ew_missing=Index is missing in Agiloft
1862tables.indexes.report.db_missing=Index is missing in database
1863tables.indexes.report.mismatch=Indexed columns in Agiloft and database don't match
1864tables.indexes.status=Syncronization completed, {0} indexes added, {1} indexes removed
1865tables.indexes.warning=In order for field $field to be used to define ownership, an index will be added for it. The table contains {0} records, so this may take a while.
1866tables.indexes.analyze.warning=Warning: The Analyze table can lock the table until all the current long running operations are completed. Please verify that there are no Imports, Exports, Long running Reports or KB Backup in progress before running this action. Would you like to continue?
1867tables.indexes.quick-search.hint=Click this button to select which fields should appear to users in the drop-down list of fields in the Search Block above the table view.  You may want to remove fields that are not useful for searching to simplify the user experience.
1868tables.indexes.quick-search.button=Edit Quick Search Fields
1869tables.quick-search.add-new-fields-by-default=Add New Fields by Default
1870tables.quick-search.select-all-fields=Select All Fields
1871tables.quick-search.clear-all-fields=Clear All Fields
1872tables.startDialog.here=here
1873tables.startDialog.text=To create a new table, select the top of the Table Tree if it is not already selected and click New.<br><br>{0} tables are arranged in a hierarchy so that subtables created from an existing table inherit the properties of their parent. <help context="/index_Object.jspx.html"/> <br><br>To create a subtable, select the parent whose properties will be used as a template for the new table and click <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span>. For example, you can select the Contact/User/Employee table and click New to add a Manager table. Managers will automatically inherit the Employee fields in addition to any custom fields that you specify. To edit an existing table, select it and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Edit</span>. To move a subtable to a different position in the hierachy, click <span class=SIBoldMark>Move</span>.<br>To hide an existing table from all users, select it and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Deactivate.</span><br>To turn the toolbar tab on for the admin group, select it and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Activate.</span>
1874tables.tab.conversion=Conversion
1875tables.tab.fields=Fields
1876tables.tab.general=General
1877tables.tab.graphics=Graphics
1878tables.tab.layout=Layout
1879tables.tab.actionbar=Action Bar
1880tables.tab.mapping=Mapping
1881tables.tab.newfield=Field
1882tables.tab.newfields=Fields
1883tables.tab.permissions=Permissions
1884tables.tab.rules=Rules
1885tables.tabs.rules.notsaved=You still have a business rule open for modification in the embedded Rules Wizard. If you continue all unsaved changes will be lost. Stop if you want to save the changes in the Rules Wizard.\u00A0Continue? Yes/No
1886tables.tab.indexes=Indexes
1887tables.tab.api=API
1888tables.tab.email=Email
1889tables.record.size.limit=Note: If all the text fields in a record were filled to their maximum size, it would total {0} bytes and the database will only hold {1} bytes per record ({2}). In practice, this is very rare, so there is probably nothing to worry about, but if it did happen the user would get an error on saving the record. If there are fields you do not need, please consider deleting them.
1890tablesorderwizard.title=Order of Tables
1891
1892team.duplicate.name=Team with name {0} already exists
1893team.parentteam.error=Incorrect parent team for the {0}: team can not be a parent for itself
1894team.namecannotbenull.error=Team name and description can not be null
1895team.namecannotbenull.error1=Team {0} modification failed. Team name and description can not be null
1896team.help.popup=Teams are used to identify working units, and because teams can belong to other teams, they can elegantly model the company hierarchy.<br><br><span class=SIItalicMark>\u201CJack is a member of the N.W Sales team is also a member of the Sales team and is also a member of the Company team.\u201D</span><br><br>Users receive email and calendar notifications based on their team membership.
1897teamCopy.confirm.hint=Please confirm that you wish to copy the selected team.
1898teamCopy.confirm.selected=Selected Team ID: <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>
1899teamCopy.finish.copied=Team {0} is created
1900teamCopy.startup.selectonlyone=Please select only one team
1901teamCopy.startup.selectteam=Please select a team
1902teams.delete.warning=You are a member of the team[s] that you are going to delete. Are you sure you want to proceed? Possible you will be logged out after deleting.
1903teams.details.description.hint=Enter a brief description of the team to help you remember its purpose.
1904teams.details.description.label=Team Description
1905teams.details.name.hint=Enter the name of the team. This name will identify the team in the current KnowledgeBase.
1906teams.details.name.label=Team Name
1907teams.details.noleader=No Leader
1908teams.details.noparent=None
1909teams.details.parentTeam.hint=Select a parent team for your team. <help context="/index_Team.jspx.html"/> <br><br>A parent team can be used as a template for the new team. When changing a parent team\u2019s settings, you can have the changes applied to the teams down the hierarchy. <popup title="If you choose \u2018None\u2019, your team will be placed in the root of the team hierarchy.">   ...More Help</popup>
1910teams.details.parentTeam.label=Parent Team
1911teams.details.teamLeader.hint=Select a team leader<BR>The team leader does not need to be a member of the team.
1912teams.details.teamLeader.label=Team Leader
1913teams.details.teamLeader.none=None
1914teams.details.tablerefreshrate.hint=This option specifies how often the table view is refreshed for users for whom this is their Primary team
1915teams.details.mrssagerefreshrate.hint=This option specifies how often the chat messages are refreshed for users for whom this is their Primary team
1916teams.details.mrssagerefreshrate.label=Message Refresh Rate
1917teams.details.tablerefreshrate.label=Table View Refresh Rate
1918teams.details.refreshrate.never=Never
1919teams.details.refreshrate.every5min=Every 5 Minutes
1920teams.details.refreshrate.every=Every
1921teams.details.refreshrate.seconds=Seconds
1922teams.details.refreshrate.minutes=Minutes
1923teams.details.teamID.hint=The team\u2019s ID is an integer number used to uniquely identify the team in the current KnowledgeBase. The team ID has been pre-populated for you.
1924teams.details.teamID.label=Team Identifier
1925teams.languages.accessible.hint=Which languages are available to this team?
1926teams.languages.accessible.label=Select languages
1927teams.events.description=This wizard helps you schedule events, for instance meetings, announcements or vacations, for the team. <popup title="Use the left-hand calendar to switch to the day, month or year that you wish to set events for. Use <span class=SIBoldMark>Day, Week, Month, 3 Months</span> or <span class=SIBoldMark>Year</span> tabs on top of the scheduler to switch between day views, week views, month views, three-month views or year views.<br><br>When using <span class=SIBoldMark>Day</span> Tab, click on a time link on the left-hand side of the scheduler to set up an event for that time.<br><br>When using <span class=SIBoldMark>Week</span> Tab, click on a day link on the left-hand side of the scheduler to zoom in on that day or click <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span> to set up an event for 2pm on that day.<br><br>When using <span class=SIBoldMark>Month</span> Tab, click on a day number to zoom in on that day or click <span class=SIBoldMark>New</span> to set up an event for 2pm on that day.<br><br><span class=SIItalicMark>Note: On the Day tab, white space on the scheduler denotes working hours for this team.  Shaded/colored space denotes non-working time for this team (e.g. after hours, holidays etc.)</span>">   ...More Help</popup>
1928teams.fatalerror=Fatal Error{0}
1929teams.members.members=Members
1930teams.members.nonmembers=Non-Members
1931teams.members.teamleader=Team Leader
1932teams.open.error=Group with id {0} doesn\u2019t exist
1933teams.tab.cacations=Events
1934teams.tab.customfields=Custom Fields
1935teams.tab.customfields.warning=This dialog allows you to edit the custom fields that have been defined for this Team. Please confirm that you want to do this.
1936teams.tab.details=General
1937teams.tab.languages=Languages
1938teams.tab.formats=Formats
1939teams.tab.workinghours=Working Hours
1940teams.teamexists=Team <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> exists. Enter another name.
1941teams.save.wrong.parent.team=Parent team is incorrect: {0}
1942teams.workinghours.asCompanyTeam=Same as Company Team
1943teams.workinghours.asteam=Same hours as
1944teams.workinghours.asDefinedBelow=As defined below
1945teams.workinghours.day1=Sun
1946teams.workinghours.day2=Mon
1947teams.workinghours.day3=Tue
1948teams.workinghours.day4=Wed
1949teams.workinghours.day5=Thu
1950teams.workinghours.day6=Fri
1951teams.workinghours.day7=Sat
1952teams.workinghours.freedayEnd=Sat, Sun end:
1953teams.workinghours.freedayStart=Sat, Sun start:
1954teams.workinghours.hours.hint=Select the working hours for the team during the week days. If you accept the default setting, the working hours for the team will be the same as the working hours for the Company Team.
1955teams.workinghours.hours.label=Working Hours
1956teams.workinghours.incomplete=Free day <span class=SIBoldMark>working hours start</span> and <span class=SIBoldMark>working hours end</span> should both be set or unset.
1957teams.workinghours.weekdayEnd=Weekday ends:
1958teams.workinghours.weekdayStart=Weekday starts:
1959teams.workinghours.wrong-free-day-time=A wrong work-time range for weekends entered<br>
1960teams.workinghours.wrong-working-day-time=A wrong work-time range for working days entered<br>
1961test.general.label.hint=Users normally see this label.
1962test.general.label.label=Field label:
1963test.general.name.hint=The field name is stored in the KB; it cannot contain spaces or non-alphanumeric characters. End users generally do not see the database field name.  <br><br>By default, field labels are converted to field names by replacing any spaces with \u201C_\u201D characters.
1964test.general.name.label=Field Name:
1965test.rules.length.hint={0} uses text fields of variable length, so if you specify a large number here, the field will still only use as much space as is actually required to display the text entered by the user.  Maximum value: 100000.
1966test.rules.length.label=Set maximum field length:
1967test.rules.required.hint=Required fields must contain a value when a new record is saved. If a field is required and the system does not set a default value or automatically populate the field, then the user must manually enter a value.
1968test.rules.required.label=Make this a required field:
1969test.tab.general=General
1970test.tab.permissions=Permissions
1971test.tab.rules=Rules
1972time.shift.minus=minus
1973time.shift.plus=plus
1974time.units.days=days
1975time.units.hours=hours
1976time.units.minutes=minutes
1977time.units.months=months
1978time.units.seconds=seconds
1979time.units.weeks=weeks
1980time.units.years=years
1981time.unitsCap.days=Days
1982time.unitsCap.hours=Hours
1983time.unitsCap.minutes=Minutes
1984time.unitsCap.months=Months
1985time.unitsCap.seconds=Seconds
1986time.unitsCap.weeks=Weeks
1987time.unitsCap.years=Years
1988tool_tip=Tooltip
1989twitter.functionality.error=Twitter error: {0}
1990twitter.functionality.column.error=Check {0} twitter account settings. Columns for tweets are not set
1991twitter.tab.account=Twitter Account
1992twitter.account.accountEnabled.hint=Select Yes if you want to enable the account. Select No otherwise.
1993twitter.account.accountEnabled.label=Account is enabled
1994twitter.account.screenName.hint=Twitter Account Screen Name
1995twitter.account.screenName.label=Screen Name
1996twitter.account.accessToken.label=Access Token
1997twitter.account.accessTokenSecret.label=Access Token Secret
1998twitter.account.consumerKey.label=Consumer key
1999twitter.account.consumerSecret.label=Consumer secret
2000twitter.account.credentials.hint=Enter Twitter Consumer key, Consumer secret, Access Token and Access Token Secret which is necessary to login Twitter Account you want. To get these infos go to <a href="http://dev.twitter.com" target="_blank">http://dev.twitter.com</a>, login with your account, click "Register a new app", enter required fields, setting Application Type to Client and Default Access type to Read & Write, click "Register Application". Then store your Consumer key and Consumer secret, click "My Access Token", store your Access Token (oauth_token) and Access Token Secret (oauth_token_secret)
2001twitter.account.credentials.label=Twitter Account Credentials
2002twitter.account.description.hint=Twitter Account Description
2003twitter.account.description.label=Description
2004twitter.account.passwd.test=Test login and fetch Screen Name
2005twitter.account.login.successful=Login successful
2006twitter.account.login.failed=Login failed: {0}
2007twitter.table.tree.hint=Select table for this account. You can only link one Twitter account to {0} table
2008twitter.tab.table=Table
2009twitter.tab.options=Options
2010twitter.options.tweetColumn.hint=The body of the tweet can be mapped to a field or entered into the Communications table. Typically you will want to populate a large-text field in the table of your choice with the tweet text.
2011twitter.options.tweetColumn.label=Store tweet in
2012twitter.options.answerColumn.hint=Configure what happens when an answer  to a tweet appears<br>All answers are automatically added to that record\u2019s Communications table and are also mapped into the built-in Last Communication field.
2013twitter.options.answerColumn.label=Store Tweet text in
2014twitter.options.addingOption.hint=To place the tweet text into an existing field, select the field and choose one of the available adding methods:<br>- Prepending, which will place the tweet text before any existing content in the field or,<br>- Appending, which will place it right after any existing content.<br>Selecting Overwrite existing content will replace any existing content in the field.
2015twitter.options.addingOption.label=Add Tweet by:
2016twitter.options.addingOption.prepend=Prepending existing content
2017twitter.options.addingOption.append=Appending existing content
2018twitter.options.addingOption.overwrite=Overwrite existing content
2019twitter.options.pollingFrequency.hint=Specify how often {0} will check Twitter for new tweets for this account
2020twitter.options.pollingFrequency.label=Polling Frequency
2021twitter.options.pollingFrequency.every=Every
2022twitter.options.pollingFrequency.minutes=minutes
2023twitter.options.stopdiscussion.hint=Select a field to control whether the  Twitter discussion should be continued
2024twitter.options.stopdiscussion.label=List of fields of type yes/no choices
2025twitter.reply.title=Reply
2026twitter.reply.notconfigured.error=Twitter integration is not configured for table {0}
2027toolbar.eui.help=The Toolbar is a EU Interface element that consists of tabs arranged in one row. The tabs in the top row usually correspond to the tables defined in the Table Tree. If you hover the mouse over a tab in the top row, you will see a pull-down menu listing the actions available for that table. <br><br>The Toolbar is highly configurable and user specific; the user will only see the Tabs/Tables for which he or she has the appropriate permissions.
2028toolbar.staff.help=The Toolbar is a Staff Interface element that consists of tabs placed in two rows. The top row, usually referred to as the Main Toolbar, has the tabs that correspond to the tables defined in the Table Tree and which the user has the permission to access.<br><br>If you hover the mouse over a tab in the top row, you will get a pulldown that lets you create a new record in that table or view existing records.<br><br>The second row lists functions that are specific to the selected table, for example Export/Import or Charts/Reports.
2029unionfield.display.fieldsorder.hint=Select the views for source tables that will be displayed when a pop-up search returns search results.  These views should help your technicians and users identify the correct record to be imported.
2030unionfield.display.fieldsorder.label=Select the view:
2031unionfield.display.popup.defaultview=--Current view for {0}--
2032unionfield.display.prefix.hint=Select whether the table name is displayed in front of each value followed by a colon.  Example:<br>Team: QA<br>Team: Marketing<br>Team: Sales<br>--------------------<br>Adam Conrad<br>Bill Joseph<br><br>Using a prefix means that the user will not be able to easily type the first letter of a value to select it (i.e. typing B in the drop-down list will not bring up Bill Joseph).
2033unionfield.display.prefix.label=Select whether the table name is displayed as a prefix before each value.
2034unionfield.display.searches.all=All source tables
2035unionfield.display.searches.hint=If you selected the Box with pop-up input aid, select the tables to be searched by default.
2036unionfield.display.searches.label=By default, run searches in:
2037unionfield.display.sourceorder.hint=If you are displaying the values in a list of values, choose the order in which they will be listed on the drop-down list.   Each set of values will be displayed in alphabetical order.
2038unionfield.display.sourceorder.label=Set the order to display values in each table:
2039unionfield.field.hint=The field will be created in the current table.  To modify the field label from the label in the source table, type in a new label here.
2040unionfield.field.label=Import Field Label:
2041unionfield.rules.defaultvalue.hint=If you select <span class=SIBoldMark>The user who creates</span>, {4} will automatically use the value for the user who is submitting the <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>.<br><br>If you choose <span class=SIBoldMark>The user who last edits</span>, the imported field will be updated when the <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span> is edited, based on the user record of the person who does the editing.<br><br>The 3th and 4th options are useful for importing the contact information of a user who is related to the user creating or last editing the record, e.g. the sales rep, manager, backup, etc.  For instance, if a field for Sales Rep or Manager exists in the user record of the creator, selecting one of these options can import any other selected contact fields for that person into the <span class=SIBoldMark>{2}</span> being created.<br><br>The next setting allows you to choose a default <span class=SIBoldMark>{3}</span> from which the imported field will be autopopulated.<br><br>Choosing <span class=SIBoldMark>None</span> will leave the imported field empty until a value is manually selected.
2042unionfield.rules.defaultvalue.label=Set an optional default value for the imported field, based on:
2043unionfield.rules.defaultvalue41=the user in the
2044unionfield.rules.defaultvalue42=the user who creates the {0}
2045unionfield.rules.defaultvalue43=field of the
2046unionfield.rules.defaultvalue51=the user in the
2047unionfield.rules.defaultvalue52=the user who last edits the {0}.
2048unionfield.rules.restrictfilter.filter=Filter values:
2049unionfield.rules.restrictfilter.label=Restrict the records from which the values may be imported?
2050unionfield.rules.restrictfilter.savedsearch=Filter {0} by saved search:
2051unionfield.table.hint=This dialog helps you select source tables for the <popup title="A single field linked to multiple tables allows you to pull the values from any of the preset columns in the source tables you select using this dialog.<br><br>Note: This linked field type does not allow for linking fields from several source tables in the same record.">linked field</popup>. <help context="/index_Linked_Fields.jspx.html"/> <br><br>Select a table and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Add Source Table</span> to add it to the list of source tables. You can add as many source tables as needed.  <popup title="When you select a source table, the values in all of its subtables are included by default.">   ...More Help</popup><br><br>You can also import values for a field in another {0} KnowledgeBase table or from an external database table.<br><br>For another {0} KnowledgeBase, you must provide a login and password for a member of the admin group. For an external database table, you must provide a valid login and password.  <popup title="If connecting to an external database table, consider using the system database login. This login should be given the necessary permissions to read/write data in the target database.">   ...More Help</popup>
2052unionfield.table.label=Select table:
2053unionfield.table.new=Add Source Table
2054unionfield.table.delete=Remove Source Table
2055unionfield.wizard.title=Link fields from multiple tables
2056users.duplicate.login=User with login {0} already exists
2057users.xss.invalid.login=Login {0} is invalid
2058groups.xss.invalid.name=Group name {0} is invalid
2059teams.xss.invalid.name=Team name {0} is invalid
2060validateaction.general.name.hint=Name the validation action
2061validateaction.general.description.hint=Describe the purpose of the validation action
2062validateaction.general.message.hint=Type the message you want the user to see in the status area that explains what he must do to be able to save the record
2063validateaction.general.message.label=Error Message
2064validateaction.general.saving.hint=Choose behaviour for the pop-up
2065validateaction.general.saving.prevent=Prevent saving record if the search condition is met
2066validateaction.general.saving.confirm=Allow saving after confirming the dialog that appears
2067validateaction.popup.ignore=Ignore Warning and Save
2068validateaction.popup.cancel=Cancel and Return to Form
2069popupaction.general.name.hint=Name the browser pop-up action
2070popupaction.general.description.hint=Describe the purpose of the browser pop-up action
2071popupaction.general.message.hint=Define the message text that should pop up in the user's browser
2072popupaction.general.message.label=Message:
2073popupaction.general.recipients.hint=Define the user(s) and/or team(s) that should receive the browser message.
2074popupaction.general.recipients.label=Recipients:
2075popupaction.general.field.user=User in the
2076popupaction.general.field.team=Team in the
2077popupaction.general.field.field=fields
2078popupaction.general.user.logged=Show pop-up to logged in user whose session triggers the action
2079popupaction.error.team.chain=The field {0} is not linked to Team table and can not be used for team determining.
2080popupaction.error.team.table=No Team table is found in project {0}
2081popupaction.error.user.table=No Contacts table is found in project {0}
2082popupaction.error.user.chain=The field {0} is not linked to Contacts table and can not be used for team determining.
2083popupaction.error.general=Error occured during pop-up sending.
2084vnc.close=close
2085vnc.defaultInvitation.text=I would like to invite you to share my desktop. You will be able to view my screen so that we can work together.
2086vnc.error.badEmail=Error in email address. Please correct the error.
2087vnc.error.badEmailWRef=Error in email address in string \u201C{0}\u201D. Please correct the error.
2088vnc.error.badEmailWRefPos=Error in email address in string \u201C{0}\u201D in position {1}. Please correct the error.
2089vnc.error.badpassword=Wrong password
2090vnc.error.emailSendingFailed=Sending email failed. Please ensure that the outbound email account is configured properly.
2091vnc.error.emptyEmail=Please enter email address of the recipient of your invitation.
2092vnc.error.hrefRemoved=You removed or changed the link to your desktop. Improper linking will void your invitation.<br>The correct link text has been added to the end of your message.
2093vnc.error.nomoreinteractive=This desktop is already connected to the full control viewer.
2094vnc.error.nosuchdesktop=The desktop doesn\u2019t exist. It might have been deleted by another user.
2095vnc.error.offline=This desktop is not online now.
2096vnc.error.passwordsempty=Please enter full access password or remote access password.
2097vnc.error.unathorized=You are not athorized to see this page.
2098vnc.expiresAfter.label=Invitation expires after:
2099vnc.expiresAfterUnit.days=days
2100vnc.expiresAfterUnit.hours=hours
2101vnc.expiresAfterUnit.minutes=minutes
2102vnc.expiresAfterUnit.months=months
2103vnc.expiresAfterUnit.years=years
2104vnc.fullAccessPassword.hint=The full access password to operate a remote desktop.
2105vnc.fullAccessPassword.label=Full access password
2106vnc.invitationEnding=Follow this link to connect to {0}
2107vnc.invitationSubj=Invitation to join remote desktop from user {0}
2108vnc.invitationText.label=Invitation text
2109vnc.message.close=To close this window. press this link
2110vnc.rbLogMeIn.label=Just log me in
2111vnc.rbSendInvitation.label=Send invitation to email addresses:
2112vnc.rbSendInvitation.emails=Email addresses
2113vnc.tab.invitation=Invitation
2114vnc.tab.passwords=Passwords
2115vnc.tab.passwords.hint=Please enter one of the passwords to begin
2116vnc.viewPassword.hint=Remote access password to view remote desktop
2117vnc.viewPassword.label=remote access password
2118vnc.wizard.title=Connection to Remote Desktop
2119wmiaction.communication.exception=Unable to connect host {0}: {1}
2120wmiaction.unknownhost.exception=Host {0} is unknown
2121wmiaction.columnnotfound.exception=Column {0} not found in table {1}, WMI action {2} '{3}' disabled
2122wmi.actions.wrongrequest=Wrong request, possible some requested properties not supported: {0}
2123wmiaction.controller.domainname.hint=Enter a full DNS name of the domain controlled by the domain controller
2124wmiaction.controller.domainname.label=Domain Name
2125wmiaction.controller.name.hint=Enter a name or IP address of the domain controller
2126wmiaction.controller.credentials.hint=Enter the credentials which will be used to contact the domain controller and computers in the domain
2127wmiaction.controller.credentials.login=Login
2128wmiaction.controller.credentials.password=Password
2129wmiaction.controller.credentials.password.confirmation=Type the password to confirm
2130wmiaction.controller.credentials.label=Credentials
2131wmiaction.controller.emptydomaincontroller=Please enter domain controller name<br>
2132wmiaction.controller.emptydomainname=Please enter domain name<br>
2133wmiaction.controller.emptylogin=Please enter login<br>
2134wmiaction.controller.emptymachinename=Please select Machine Name Field<br>
2135wmiaction.controller.name.label=Domain Controller
2136wmiaction.controller.patterns.hint=If you are not going to poll all machines in the domain, enter machine names patterns delimited by commas. Domain parts of names should be omitted. Example: suppose that the domain name is agiloft.com, patterns /^server\n+/, /^w2k$/ inform the system that machines server24.agiloft.com, server1.agiloft.com, w2k.supportwizard.com will be polled but servers servera.agiloft.com and w2kserver.agiloft.com will be skipped
2137wmiaction.controller.patterns.label=Machines names patterns
2138wmiaction.controller.wrongpattern=Pattern '{0}' is invalid: {1}
2139wmiaction.controller.testlogin=Test login
2140wmiaction.controller.establish=Establishing connection...
2141wmiaction.controller.connect=Connecting to the server
2142wmiaction.controller.message.loginsuccess=Login successful
2143wmiaction.controller.message.loginnotsuccess=Login unsuccessful:
2144wmiaction.options.mapping.hint=Select a table field where polled machine name will be stored
2145wmiaction.options.mapping.label=Machine Name Field
2146wmiaction.options.tracking.hint=Machines states tracking
2147wmiaction.options.tracking.label=Tracking
2148wmiaction.options.tracking.deleterecord=Delete record
2149wmiaction.options.tracking.setfield=Set field
2150wmiaction.options.tracking.to=to:
2151wmiaction.options.tracking.available=if the machine is available
2152wmiaction.options.tracking.notavailable=if the machine is not available
2153wmiaction.options.tracking.notfound=if the machine existed before but currently does not exist in Active Directory
2154wmiaction.options.tracking.donottrack=Do not track
2155wmiaction.options.tracking.emptyvalue=Empty value
2156wmiaction.tab.controller=Domain Controller
2157wmiaction.tab.general=General
2158wmiaction.tab.options=Options
2159wmiaction.wizard.title=Configure WMI Action
2160workflow.communicationerror=Error while connecting to the server: {0}
2161workflow.arrow.A=A
2162workflow.arrow.G=G
2163workflow.arrow.actions=Actions:
2164workflow.arrow.guards=Guards:
2165workflow.arrow.inherited=[Inherited]
2166workflow.changeguardfailed=Record ID={0} cannot change state to \u2018{1}\u2019 due to guard: {2}
2167workflow.changeguardsfailed=Record ID={0} cannot change state to \u2018{1}\u2019 due to guards: {2}
2168workflow.changestatedeleted=Cannot change record to the specified state. The state is no longer valid.
2169workflow.conditional=if ({0})
2170workflow.connection.warning=Connection is lost. Click OK to retry
2171workflow.createguardfailed=Could not create due to guard: {0}
2172workflow.createguardsfailed=Could not create due to guards: {0}
2173workflow.createstatedeleted=Cannot create a record with this state. The state is no longer valid.
2174workflow.definemap=You are trying to remove one or several states that currently exist in this workflow.<br><br>To complete the deletion, you need to assign a new state to the records that are currently in the state being removed.<br><br>Please select a new state for these records.
2175workflow.deleteemptystates.confirm=You are about to delete all transitions between states that do not have an action or a guard defined upon them<br><br>Are you sure you want to do this ?
2176workflow.deleteemptystates.title=Delete empty transitions ?
2177workflow.deleteguardfailed=Could not delete \u2018{0}\u2019 due to guard: {1}
2178workflow.deleteguardsfailed=Could not delete \u2018{0}\u2019 due to guards: {1}
2179workflow.deletestate.confirm=Are you sure you want to delete this state because <br>records may currently exist containing this workflow state? <br><br>If you respond \u201CYes\u201D you will be provided with the opportunity to reassign <br>a new state to those records before exiting the Workflow wizard
2180workflow.printconfirm=Do you want to print the workflow ? (this may take several seconds)
2181workflow.printwait=Please wait till printing has actually started before clicking OK. (This is necessary in mozilla based browsers due to the way they handle printing.)
2182workflow.editor.conditional=if ({0}) {1}
2183workflow.editor.notinstalled=In order to edit workflows, you need to install the java applet activeX plugin on your local machine. This should happen automatically, but you may have to adjust your security settings first. To enable the activeX control to run, you need to click on Tools on IE menu bar, then select Internet Options, switch to the security tab and enable the download and running of signed ActiveX controls.
2184workflow.editor.appletsnotsupported=Your browser does not have Java support installed and you need it to use the graphical workflow editor. Please download Java from http://www.java.com/en/download/index.jsp.
2185workflow.editor.addstates=Add States
2186workflow.editor.addstateserror=Please enter a list of states.
2187workflow.editor.confirmactiondelete=Deleting an action is not undoable. The action will no longer be used in any workflow transitions or by any rules. Are you sure you want to delete this action ?
2188workflow.editor.confirmguarddelete=Deleting a guard is not undoable. The guard will no longer be used in any workflow transitions and will not be available as a condition. Are you sure you want to delete this guard ?
2189workflow.editor.confirmdeletetitle=Confirm deleting \u2018{0}\u2019.
2190workflow.editor.creatable=Creatable
2191workflow.editor.invalid=Invalid workflow. One state must be designated as the default state, and that state must be creatable.
2192workflow.editor.invalidtitle=Invalid workflow.
2193workflow.editor.delete=Delete
2194workflow.editor.deleteemptytransitions=Delete Empty Transitions
2195workflow.editor.deleteable=Deletable
2196workflow.editor.defaultstate=Default
2197workflow.editor.deselected=Please select a state first.
2198workflow.editor.edit=Edit
2199workflow.editor.helpmsg=For help on configuring workflows, click here <help context="/index_Workflow.jspx.html"/>
2200workflow.editor.instruction.state.delete=To delete this state, hit Delete key.
2201workflow.editor.instruction.state.edit=To select a state, click it. To edit a state, double-click it. To move a state, drag it.
2202workflow.editor.instruction.transition.addthistransition=Release to add transition
2203workflow.editor.instruction.transition.delete=To delete this transition, hit Delete key.
2204workflow.editor.instruction.transition.dragarrow=Drag arrow to the target state to add transition.
2205workflow.editor.instruction.transition.dragtotarget=Drag to the target state to add transition.
2206workflow.editor.instruction.transition.edit=To select a transition, click it. To edit a transition, double-click it. To unlink a transition, drag it.
2207workflow.editor.makestateavailable=State: \u2018{0}\u2019 already exists as part of the workflow for \u2018{1}\u2019<br>Do you want to make this state available to this workflow too?
2208workflow.editor.makestateavailabletitle=Make state \u2018{0}\u2019 available?
2209workflow.editor.newstatesexample=Enter a comma separated list of states e.g. \u201CClosed, Unverified, Open\u201D
2210workflow.editor.override=Overriding options
2211workflow.editor.reorderstates=Reorder
2212workflow.editor.reorderstates.help=To reorder the states shown above, select the state you wish to move up or down the list and click the \u2018Up\u2019 or \u2018Down\u2019 arrow buttons to get it into the desired position.<br><br>The order of workflow states does not affect workflow operations, but it affects searches on a record\u2019s state. For instance, if a typical Bug goes through the following sequence of states: \u201CUnverifed\u201D, \u201CVerified\u201D, \u201CIn_Progress\u201D, and \u201CClosed\u201D and you are searching for all Bugs where \u2018Workflow State < Closed\u2019, your search would return records with the states of \u201CUnverified\u201D, \u201CVerified\u201D,  and \u201CIn_Progress\u201D.<br><br>If State A has precedence over State B (in other words, A is above B in the list), then A is more than (>) B for search purposes.
2213workflow.editor.showactions=Show Actions
2214workflow.editor.showguards=Show Guards
2215workflow.editor.savingproperties.cancel=Cancel
2216workflow.editor.savingproperties.finish=Finish
2217workflow.editor.savingproperties.headings.optional=Optional
2218workflow.editor.savingproperties.headings.visible=Visible
2219workflow.editor.savingproperties.hint=Workflow actions and guards are usually executed automatically. You may want to allow people in some groups to view or override the actions that occur as a result of updating the worfkow state. This dialog allows you to do this.<br><br>Please select the groups that should have control over the execution of this workflow. <br><br>If \u2018visible\u2019 is checked, members of the group are informed that the action or guard is about to execute. <br><br>If \u2018optional\u2019 is checked, the group is able to cancel the action or guard.
2220workflow.editor.savingproperties.overriding=Overriding:
2221workflow.editor.savingproperties.title=Override Workflow Actions
2222workflow.editor.savingproperties.windowtitle=Advanced properties
2223workflow.editor.state.confirmdeletetitle=Confirmation
2224workflow.editor.state.inheritdelete=This state is inherited from \u2018{0}\u2019.<br>In order to delete this state,<br>you need to edit the workflow in the parent table.
2225workflow.editor.state.inheritdeletetitle=Cannot delete inherited State
2226workflow.editor.stateproperties.cancel=Cancel
2227workflow.editor.stateproperties.description.hint=Please enter a description to help you remember the purpose of this state.
2228workflow.editor.stateproperties.description.label=Description
2229workflow.editor.stateproperties.finish=Finish
2230workflow.editor.stateproperties.heading=State properties
2231workflow.editor.stateproperties.options.creatable=Creatable
2232workflow.editor.stateproperties.options.deleteable=Deletable
2233workflow.editor.stateproperties.options.hint=\u2018Createable\u2019 means that this state can be assigned to a new record when it is being created.<br><br>\u2018Deletable\u2019 means that records in this state can be deleted.
2234workflow.editor.stateproperties.options.label=State Options
2235workflow.editor.stateproperties.statename.error=Please provide a name that is not already used.
2236workflow.editor.stateproperties.statename.hint=Please enter the state name. This is the name that you will see in the workflow editor.
2237workflow.editor.stateproperties.statename.label=State name
2238workflow.editor.stateproperties.statename.wrongname=Invalid name. A name should only contain alphanumeric characters (0-9a-zA-Z) and should not contain special characters like [,][;][.][-][=][*][/][ ].
2239workflow.editor.stateproperties.title=Edit State Properties
2240workflow.editor.reassigndeleted.cancel=Cancel
2241workflow.editor.reassigndeleted.finish=Finish
2242workflow.editor.reassigndeleted.hint=You are trying to remove one or several states that currently exist in this workflow.<br><br>To complete the deletion, you need to assign a new state to the records that are currently in the state being removed.<br><br>Please select a new state for these records.
2243workflow.editor.reassigndeleted.replacement=Choose Replacement
2244workflow.editor.reassigndeleted.title=Reassign Deleted States
2245workflow.editor.reassigndeleted.windowtitle=Reassign Deleted States
2246workflow.editor.transition.inheritdelete=This transition is inherited from \u2018{0}\u2019.<br>In order to delete this transition,<br>you need to edit the workflow in the parent table.
2247workflow.editor.transition.inheritdeleteempty=Some empty transitions have been not deleted because they are inherited from the parent table(s)<br>In order to delete them,<br>you need to edit the workflow there.
2248workflow.editor.transition.inheritdeletetitle=Cannot delete inherited transition
2249workflow.guard.evalerror=<span class=SIBoldMark>Error evaluating guard {0}, please contact your administrator. Full details are in {1}.</span><br>
2250workflow.guard.explanation=<span class=SIBoldMark>Active Guard:</span>
2251workflow.guards.explanation=<span class=SIBoldMark>Active Guards:</span>
2252workflow.inactive=None
2253workflow.invalidtransition=Record ID={0} cannot change state from \u2018{1}\u2019 to \u2018{2}\u2019. The workflow does not have a transition between these states.
2254workflow.mozilla=We do not currently support the editing of workflows using Mozilla due to incompatibilities in Mozilla\u2019s Java support. Please use IE5.5+ for workflow editing.
2255workflow.notcreateable=Cannot create a record with state \u2018{0}\u2019. Please use a createable state or update the workflow to make this state createable.
2256workflow.notdeleteable=Cannot delete record \u2018{0}\u2019. This record is in a non-deletable workflow state. To delete it, please set this record to a deletable state or update the workflow to make this state deletable.
2257workflow.precondition.explanation=Preconditions are checks made before a state change is allowed.
2258workflow.chrome.startDialog.prompt=You appear to be using Chrome, due to a bug in their handling of Applets the workflow editor does not work properly in Chrome. Please use Firefox or IE instead.
2259workflow.safari.startDialog.prompt=You appear to be using Safari, due to a bug in their handling of Applets the workflow editor does not work properly in Safari. Please use Firefox or IE instead.
2260workflow.startDialog.text=Workflows control what happens to your data as changes are made to it. For example, if an engineer fixes a bug, then you probably want to send an email to the customer who submitted the bug report telling her that the bug has been fixed. You can configure your workflow to perform these kinds of actions automatically. <help context="/index_Workflow.jspx.html"/><br><br>To configure workflow for a particular table, select the table and click <span class=SIBoldMark>Edit</span>.
2261workflow.transition.actionhelp=Actions are tasks that run automatically when a user changes the state of a record. For instance, if a ticket changes state from In Testing to Closed, you might send an email to the person who submitted the ticket stating that it has been closed.<br><br>The left box contains a list of already defined actions and the right box contains the list of actions selected to run on this transition. To specify that an action should run, highlight the action in the <span class=SIBoldMark>Available Actions</span> box and click the <span class=SIBoldMark>&gt;</span> button.  Create a new action by selecting New Action from the drop-down.<br><br>Guards are conditions that are tested before the state transition is allowed to take place.  A guard defines search criteria that the record must meet in order for the transition to be allowed.  For instance, for a transition to Closed, you might set up a guard with the criterion: Solution field is not empty.  This will prevent the state change to Closed if the solution field is empty.  To create a guard, click the Guards tab at the top of the window.<br><br>Conditions are similar to guards, but instead of preventing the state change, they prevent a specific action from running if their search criteria are not met.  For instance, you might want to send an email to the assignee when a ticket is created only if the assignee is not the person who created the ticket.  To set a condition, single click on the action in the <span class=SIBoldMark>Selected Actions</span> box and then set a condition using the <span class=SIBoldMark>Set Condition</span> drop-down.<br><br>View or edit actions by double clicking on the icon. To edit a condition, switch to the Guards tab.
2262workflow.transition.actions=Actions
2263workflow.transition.actions.available=Available
2264workflow.transition.actions.condition=Set Condition
2265workflow.transition.actions.delete=Delete Action
2266workflow.transition.actions.edit=Edit Action
2267workflow.transition.actions.editcond=Edit Condition
2268workflow.transition.actions.exampletext=Enter new action name.
2269workflow.transition.actions.hint=Click an action to select it for transition or double-click an action to edit it.
2270workflow.transition.actions.newemail=New Email Action
2271workflow.transition.actions.newscript=New Script Action
2272workflow.transition.actions.newconvert=New Conversion Action
2273workflow.transition.actions.newconditional=New If-Then-Else Action
2274workflow.transition.actions.newupdate=New Update Action
2275workflow.transition.actions.newpdf=New PDF Action
2276workflow.transition.actions.selectactionfirst=Please select an action before setting a condition.
2277workflow.transition.actions.selected=Selected
2278workflow.transition.cancel=Cancel
2279workflow.transition.condition.newscript=Define Script Condition
2280workflow.transition.condition.newsimple=Define Simple Condition
2281workflow.transition.condition.noprecond=No Condition
2282workflow.transition.erroralert.disallownostates=
2283workflow.transition.erroralert.nostates=With no states defined, no workflow will run for this subtype.<br>If you want to delete this workflow entirely, you must delete the Workflow State column for this table.<br>Are you sure you want no workflow for this subtype ?
2284workflow.transition.erroralert.nostatestitle=No Workflow?
2285workflow.transition.erroralert.wrongactionname=Please enter a name for the new action.
2286workflow.transition.erroralert.wrongguardname=Please enter a name for the new guard.
2287workflow.transition.finish=Finish
2288workflow.transition.guardhelp=Guards are conditions that are tested before the state transition is allowed to take place. Their purpose is similar to that of conditions defined for actions. Unlike conditions though, if a guard\u2019s search criteria is not  met, the state transition itself is not allowed to occur and the user is notified that the state could not be changed.<br><br>For instance, if a user tries to change the state of a bug report from \u2018In Testing\u2019 to \u2018Verified\u2019, you might want to apply the search criterion: Unit Tests Successful = Yes to prevent the state from being changed if this condition is not met.<br><br>The left-hand box contains a list of already defined guards and conditions and the right-hand box contains a list of the guards that will run before this transition is allowed to occur. To place a guard on the selected transition, single-click on the guard in the \u2018Available Guards\u2019 box and then click the \u2018&gt;\u2019 button. If no suitable guards exist, you can create a new guard.<br><br>To view or edit an existing guard, double click it.
2289workflow.transition.guards=Guards
2290workflow.transition.guards.available=Available
2291workflow.transition.guards.delete=Delete Guard
2292workflow.transition.guards.edit=Edit Guard
2293workflow.transition.guards.exampletext=Enter new guard name.
2294workflow.transition.guards.hint=Select guards for transition or double click a guard to edit it.
2295workflow.transition.guards.newscriptguard=New Script Guard
2296workflow.transition.guards.newsimpleguard=New Simple Guard
2297workflow.transition.guards.selected=Selected Guards
2298workflow.transition.moveup=Move Up
2299workflow.transition.movedown=Move Down
2300workflow.transition.newaction=Create New Action
2301workflow.transition.newguard=Create New Guard
2302workflow.transition.scriptguard.bdescr=Provide a description to help you remember the purpose of this guard.
2303workflow.transition.scriptguard.cancel=Cancel
2304workflow.transition.scriptguard.description=A script guard allows you to use an arbitrary java expression as a guard. <br><br>Note:  Keep in mind that a guard/condition is placed between two states, so it can compare the current values in the record to the values that the record would have if the transition was to occur. The fields from your record can be accessed using the forms \u2018after.field\u2019 and \u2018before.field\u2019. So, if the table associated with this guard contains a \u2018question\u2019 field, and you\u2019re using the guard to make sure that this field contains something, and is longer than whatever it contained before, you can use an expression like:<br>\u2018after.question.length() &gt; 0 &amp;&amp; after.question.length() &gt; before.question.length()\u2019.<br><br>Numerical fields behave like numbers, boolean fields behave like booleans and character fields behave like String tables. The expression you enter must be a valid java expression (not a statement) so you should not provide a trailing \u2018;\u2019. If you are unfamiliar with java, you should probably use a Simple Guard instead.
2305workflow.transition.scriptguard.finish=Finish
2306workflow.transition.scriptguard.name=Guard Name
2307workflow.transition.scriptguard.title=Edit Script Guard
2308workflow.transition.simpleguard.after=After
2309workflow.transition.simpleguard.and=AND
2310workflow.transition.simpleguard.bdescr=Provide a description to help you remember the purpose of this guard.
2311workflow.transition.simpleguard.before=Before
2312workflow.transition.simpleguard.cancel=Cancel
2313workflow.transition.simpleguard.contains=Contains
2314workflow.transition.simpleguard.description=A Simple Guard allows you to define a condition based on some values in a record. The record must meet the criteria of the guard in order to pass to the next state.  It is made up of a series of lines where each line corresponds to a single field in the record. The Simple Guard compares the value in the record with an entered value or a value from a different field. If you cannot express a condition using a Simple Guard, you should use a Script Guard.<br><br>Keep in mind that a guard is placed between two states, so the guard can compare the current values in the record (also known as pre- values) to the values that the record would have if the transition was to occur (also known as post- values). For instance, you can have a guard stating that \u2018fieldA post = fieldA pre\u2019 which states that the condition is true if \u2018fieldA\u2019 is not being changed.<br><br>The boolean expression defined within a Simple Guard is made up of one or several logical clauses, separated by AND or OR operators, for example, \u201C((condition1 AND/OR condition2) AND/OR condition3) AND/OR condition4 ..\u201D (If you are mixing ANDs and ORs, the order of the logical clauses is important.)
2315workflow.transition.simpleguard.finish=Finish
2316workflow.transition.simpleguard.ignorecase=Ignore Case
2317workflow.transition.simpleguard.name=Guard Name
2318workflow.transition.simpleguard.or=OR
2319workflow.transition.simpleguard.title=Edit Simple Guard
2320workflow.transition.title=Edit Transition Properties
2321workflow.workfloweditaction.statuscolumn.error=Field \u2018{0}\u2019 doesn\u2019t exist. Please add this field to use workflows for this table.
2322dashboard.type.name=Dashboard
2323dashboard.newwizard.table.tab=Table
2324dashboard.newwizard.table.hint=Please select the table that has the chart you wish to add to the dashboard. <popup title="If the table does not have the chart yet, you may create it by clicking <b>New</b>.">   ...More Help</popup>
2325dashboard.newwizard.charts.tab=Charts
2326dashboard.newwizard.charts.hint=Please select a chart that you wish to add to your dashboard.
2327dashboard.newwizard.choosechart=Choose chart to add
2328dashboard.wizard.tab.tables=Components
2329dashboard.wizard.tables.hint=This wizard helps you customize your dashboard by adding or removing charts.<br><br>To add a chart to the dashboard, click <b>Add</b>. To remove a chart from this dashboard, select it and click <b>Remove</b>. <popup title="Removing a chart from the dashboard does not delete the chart itself, it simply removes it from the dashboard, and you can add it back later.">   ...More Help</popup>
2330dashboard.wizard.tab.layout=Layout
2331dashboard.wizard.tab.title=Title
2332dashboard.wizard.tab.titlemessage=Title is required to be filled in
2333dashboard.wizard.tab.schedule=Schedule
2334dashboard.wizard.tab.options=Options
2335dashboard.wizard.options.access.hint=Select which users should have access to this dashboard. <popup title="The selected groups will not automatically have this dashboard displayed in their list, but they will be able to access it from Dashboards/Manage screen.">   ...More Help</popup>
2336dashboard.wizard.options.access.label=Make this dashboard accessible to:
2337dashboard.wizard.options.hint=Select whether HTML reports or Excel spreadsheets should be added to this dashboard. <popup title="To view a chart, or to access any accompanying reports or Excel spreadsheets, simply click on the chart\u2019s graphic.">   ...More Help</popup>
2338dashboard.wizard.options.createhtml.label=Include HTML reports
2339dashboard.wizard.options.createexcel.label=Include Excel spreadsheets
2340dashboard.wizard.options.createtext.label=Include Text reports
2341dashboard.wizard.options.shownewwindow.hint=Select whether the dashboard should be displayed in a new window.
2342dashboard.wizard.options.shownewwindow.label=Show in new window
2343dashboard.wizard.options.size.hint=Select the size of the dashboard.
2344dashboard.wizard.options.size.label=Dashboard size:
2345dashboard.wizard.layout.rownotempty=The currently selected row is not empty. Please move all charts to a different row before deleting it.
2346dashboard.wizard.layout.colnotempty=The currently selected column is not empty. Please move all charts to a different column before deleting it.
2347dashboard.wizard.layout.dragdesired=Drag the available charts to the desired position on the dashboard.
2348dashboard.wizard.layout.available=Available Charts
2349dashboard.wizard.preview.title=Dashboard Preview
2350dashboard.permissions.message=You do not have enough permissions to edit/delete this dashboard
2351search.options.title=Search Options
2352dashboard.new=Add
2353dashboard.delete=Remove
2354dashboard.addchart=Chart
2355dashboard.addreport=Custom Summary Report
2356dashboard.addcomponent=HTML/Javascript, URL, Google Widget
2357dashboard.nochart=NO CHART DEFINED
2358dashboard.componenttype.hint=Please select type of component.
2359dashboard.componenttype.html=HTML
2360dashboard.componenttype.js=JavaScript
2361dashboard.componenttype.url=URL
2362dashboard.componenttype.google=Google Widget
2363dashboard.componenttext.HTML.hint=Paste your HTML code here.
2364dashboard.componenttext.JS.hint=Paste your JavaScript code here.
2365dashboard.componenttext.URL.hint=Paste your URL here.
2366dashboard.componenttext.Google.hint=Paste your Google Widget code here.
2367dashboard.componenttext.Google.url1=Click here
2368dashboard.componenttext.Google.url2=to open Google Widgets directory
2369dashboard.component.hint=Please enter a title for this component.
2370dashboard.component.title=Component Title
2371chat.popuptext.showtext=Show text
2372chat.popuptext.showimage=Show image
2373chat.popuptext.imageURL=URL of image:
2374csswizard.staff.forms.layouteditor.cell.description=Select the display settings of the layout editor\u2019s cells.
2375csswizard.staff.forms.layouteditor.cell.rightcaption=Layout Editor Cell
2376csswizard.staff.toolbar.inactivetabborder.description=Select the display of <popup title="toolbar.staff.help">Toolbar</popup> tabs\u2019 borders. <popup title="Note that this setting does not apply to the active tab (i.e. a tab that is selected on the Toolbar.)">   ...More Help</popup>
2377csswizard.staff.toolbar.inactivetabborder.rightcaption=Tab Borders
2378csswizard.staff.tables.tableheaderover.rightcaption=Table Header on Hover Over
2379csswizard.staff.tables.tableheaderover.description=Select the display of the table\u2019s header when it is moused over.
2380chat.html.tab=HTML
2381chat.html.hint=If you copy the following HTML into your web page, it will allow you to  automatically enable the logic you defined earlier (for instance, invoking a pop-up when a user visits the page).<br><br>Users who are already logged into the Staff Interface can also join the chat session by selecting the Chat tab.
2382historysync.prjects=These projects are checked for History Synchronization
2383ssloop.prjects=These projects are checked for saved searches reference loops and used choice lines absence.
2384rule.action.actionblocked={0} (Rule {1}: {2}, while applying to record {3})
2385rule.action.actionerror={0} (Rule {1}: {2}, while applying to record {3})
2386rule.action.actionmissing=Rule {0} (ID:{1}), owned by {2} (ID:{3}), could not find its action: {4}
2387rule.action.invalidexitcodeerror=Rule {0} (ID:{1}), owned by {2} (ID:{3}), tried to run an external action on record {7}, which has returned an invalid exit code: {5}, stdout: {6}\u2019, stderr: {7}
2388rule.action.timerbased.failed.subject=Error while running a timer-based rule
2389rule.action.timerbased.failed.body=An error occurred while running a timer-based rule in the project {0} : {1}
2390status.record.profile=Click \u201CMy Profile\u201D tab item again to see your profile record.
2391sw2.find.form.editsavedsearch=Edit Search
2392sw2.chat.timestamp=Show message timestamp
2393project.type.0=OK(admin KB)
2394project.type.1=OK
2395project.type.2=Disabled
2396project.type.3=Importing
2397project.type.4=Invalid
2398project.type.5=Locked
2399project.type.6=Patching
2400project.type.7=Sync Carrier KB
2401project.type.8=Project with closed wallet
2402project.action.disabled=Can't edit KB {0} in status={1}
2403project.enable=Enable
2404project.disable=Disable
2405project.enable.wrong.selection.error=Select at least one project
2406project.enable.enabled={0} projects enabled
2407project.enable.disabled={0} projects disabled
2408project.enable.enabling.confirm=Please confirm that you want to enable the $count projects(s) you selected.
2409project.enable.enabling.confirmmany=WARNING: You have selected <span class=SIBoldMark>$count project(s)</span>. Please confirm that you want to enable them.
2410project.enable.disabling.confirm=Please confirm that you want to disable the $count project(s) you selected.
2411project.enable.disabling.confirmmany=WARNING: You have selected <span class=SIBoldMark>$count project(s)</span>. Please confirm that you want to disable them.
2412licenses.main.request.hint=To request a license after purchasing {0}, submit a license request here.  We will generate a license for your Knowledgebase and email it to you.
2413licenses.main.request.button=Request a New License
2414licenses.main.manage.hint=View installed licenses and install a new license.<br><br><span class=SIBoldMark>Note: </span>After clicking this button, you will see a table that will be empty if no licenses have been installed. Simply click New to install your license.
2415licenses.main.manage.button=Manage Licenses
2416licenses.main.usage.hint=View the usage of your licenses and free up licenses associated with inactive users. Note: Licensing is only active if the KB contains over 1000 records when starting.
2417licenses.main.usage.label=Choose KnowledgeBase:
2418licenses.main.usage.allkbs=Choose one
2419licenses.main.usage.button=View Usage
2420licenses.type.hint=Choose the appropriate license type here.  A free license is available with some limitations that are described <a target=_blank href="http://www.agiloft.com/feature-comparison.htm">here</a>.<br><br>The enterprise license removes all restrictions and can be purchased for any number of users.  It should be accompanied by a purchase order faxed to USA 650-745-1209.
2421license.type.label=Type of License
2422licenses.type.free=Free license for {0}
2423licenses.type.enterprise=Enterprise Production license
2424license.users.unlimited=Unlimited users
2425licemse.users.5users=10 Users (5 staff and 5 end-users)
2426licenses.type.staff=Named staff users
2427licenses.type.named.current=Current # of named users
2428licenses.type.concurrent=Concurrent Staff Users
2429licenses.type.concurrent.current=Current # of concurrent users
2430licenses.type.staff.amount=# of Names Staff Users
2431licenses.type.concurrent.amount=# of Names Staff Users
2432licenses.type.enduser=Unlimited End Users
2433licenses.type.outbound=Outbound Email
2434licenses.type.outbound.amount=Daily outbound emails:
2435licenses.type.outbound.unlimited=Unlimited
2436licenses.type.comments=Comments
2437licenses.comments.hint=If requesting a replacement license, please provide an explanation for why the replacement is needed.
2438licenses.request.type.label=Type of Request:
2439licenses.request.first=1st time permanent license
2440licenses.request.additional=Request to purchase additional users
2441licenses.request.temporary=90 Day temporary license
2442licenses.request.replacement=Replacement permanent license
2443licenses.request.authorized=Authorized by:
2444licenses.startdate.hint=Enter the start date for the license
2445licenses.startdate.label=Start Date:
2446licenses.systeminfo.hint=The system will provide the correct information automatically for the current installation.  If you are requesting a license for a new server which will have a different IP address and/or hostname, you can manually edit these fields.  Otherwise, leave them as they are.<br><br>Note: If the IP Address shows 127.0.0.1 rather than the correct IP address, you should fix the OS configuration so that the machine knows its own address before requesting the license. This can usually be achieved by entering the machine name in the /etc/hosts file and rebooting. For example, you might add a line such as: 72.20.102.100&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;www.agiloft.com.
2447licenses.systeminfo.hostname=Hostname:
2448licenses.systeminfo.ipaddress=IP Address:
2449licenses.systeminfo.os=Operating System:
2450licenses.systeminfo.db=Database:
2451licenses.version.hint=A license with a version number greater than or equal to the version shown here will work.
2452licenses.version.label=Version:
2453licenses.kb.hint=Choose the Knowledgebase for which you are requesting the license.
2454licenses.kb.short=Knowledgebase
2455licenses.contact.hint=Enter your email address so that we can send you the license. Please provide contact information so that we know who is requesting the license and can contact you if there is any problem.
2456licenses.contact.name=Name:
2457licenses.contact.company=Company:
2458licenses.contact.email=Email:
2459licenses.contact.phone=Telephone:
2460licenses.submit=Submit Request
2461licenses.preview.title=License parameters
2462licenses.preview.type=License type:
2463licenses.setup.button=Manage Assigned Licenses
2464licenses.setup.hint=By default, when a user logs in, if there is an assigned license that has not been assigned, it will be provided to the user automatically.  Once all assigned licenses are used up, any concurrent licenses are used.<br><br>You can choose to automatically assign a license upon user creation when the user meets some specific saved search criteria.<br><br>Or if you wish to reserve your assigned licenses to be manually assigned, use the third option.<br><br>Note: These options will be ignored for floating licenses, as all floating licenses are available without assignment.<br><br>If you have more than one active assigned license, any automatic assignment will be done first in the license with the latest end date, and then in the license with the next latest end date, and so on.
2465licenses.setup.label=Assign Available Licenses:
2466licenses.assign.auto=Automatically when a user logs in
2467licenses.assign.restricted=Automatically when a user record is created that meets this saved search:
2468licenses.assign.none=Wait for them to be assigned by an admin
2469licenses.viewassign.hint=You can assign or terminate users from an assigned license in this section.
2470licenses.viewassign.button=View/Manage Assigned License
2471licenses.assign.button=Assign Selected Users
2472licenses.select.status=There are {0} licenses available
2473licenses.select.hint=Use the magnifying glass lookup to find users to assign.
2474licenses.assign.status=Assigned {0} licenses
2475licenses.assigned.already=User {0} already assigned to license #{1}
2476licenses.assign.current=Current Assigned Licenses
2477licenses.preview.kb=Knowledgebase:
2478licenses.free.button=Terminate a user
2479licenses.inactivity.label=Inactivity timeout
2480licenses.assign.hint=Choose a user to whom you would like to assign a \u201Cnamed\u201D staff license.  Note that once you have assigned all of your licenses, any additional staff users will be able to login to the staff interface only if you also have a concurrent staff license.  There is no need to assign individuals to a concurrent user license.
2481licenses.assign.proceed=Assign user to license
2482licenses.assign.nolicense.error=No named license available
2483licenses.assign.nouser.error=Please select user to assign license
2484license.assign.alreadyassigned.error=User {0} already uses license
2485license.assign.status=You have {0} unassigned named licenses
2486license.assign.button1=Assign user to license
2487licenses.free.confirm=The user\u2019s lock on the license will expire within 24 hours, unless he/she logs in, after which time it will be available for use by another user.  Are you sure?
2488licenses.logout.button=Log a user out
2489licenses.logout.confirm=Please confirm you want to log this user out
2490licenses.logoutall.button=Logout all users
2491licenses.logoutall.confirm=All users will be logged out, except for you.  Are you sure?
2492licenses.free.message=The license is now free
2493licenses.pending.message=The license will be freed in 24 hours
2494licenses.logout.message=Request sent, user will be logged out in 5-10 minutes
2495licenses.usages.hint=This table shows all users who are currently using a license and their login status. To disassociate a user from a license, select the user and click Terminate a user. To manually log a user out, select them and click the Log a user out button. A staff user's license will automatically be freed up after 43,200 minutes (30 days) of inactivity.
2496licenses.submit.enduser=Submitting End-User license request ...
2497licenses.submit.staff=Submitting Staff license request ...
2498licenses.submit.concurrent=Submitting Concurrent license request ...
2499licenses.submit.outbound=Submitting Outbound Email license request ...
2500licenses.submit.done=Done
2501licenses.submit.error=Connection to licensing server failed. It may have been taken offline for an upgrade, please try again in an hour. If you are still unable to connect, please submit a ticket at <a href="https://www.agiloft.com/support-login.htm" target="_blank">https://www.agiloft.com/support-login.htm</a>.
2502ifthenaction.wizard.title=If-Then-Else Action
2503ifthenaction.tab.details.caption=Details
2504ifthenaction.tab.general.caption=General
2505ifthenaction.createActions.hint=You can select multiple actions at once. Click the buttons on the right to create an action of the selected type, and then select which of the available actions to use.
2506ifthenaction.tab.details.hint=This dialog helps you create complex If-Then-Else actions. Select the line where you want to edit or insert a statement. The buttons are context-sensitive and show what actions are allowed based on the cursor position. The Empty block <b>. . .</b> cannot be removed or edited, it is used as a place-holder for selection. Please see the tutorials at our website for detailed directions.
2507ifthenaction.button.addaction=Add Action
2508ifthenaction.button.addif=Add If
2509ifthenaction.button.addelse=Add Else
2510ifthenaction.button.addelseif=Add ElseIf
2511ifthenaction.button.addcomment=Add Comments
2512ifthenaction.button.commentInput=Input your comment here
2513ifthenaction.button.moveup=Move Up
2514ifthenaction.button.movedown=Move Down
2515ifthenaction.button.delete=Delete
2516ifthenaction.button.edit=Edit
2517ifthenaction.button.error1=You cannot leave IF criteria empty!
2518ifthenaction.search.complex=Conditions should not use complex criteria. Please review: {0}
2519ifthenaction.error.nonuniquesearch=There are several IF conditions referencing the same filter in the KB. You must keep single one.
2520calendar.events.recurrent=Recurrent event
2521calendar.events.cancelled=Cancelled recurrent event
2522calendar.events.moved=Moved recurrent event
2523calendar.events.usual=Scheduled event
2524calendar.events.remove.usual=Remove event
2525calendar.events.remove.canceled=Cancel cancellation
2526calendar.events.remove.moved=Cancel moving
2527calendar.events.remove.recurrent=Cancel event
2528fields.actionbutton.hint=Select the <span class=SIBoldMark>Add Action</span> button to add or edit actions that should be executed when this button is clicked. You can change the order of action execution by dragging actions up or down with the mouse.<br>The <span class=SIBoldMark>Add Wait Point</span> button is used to cause the system to wait for the preceding action(s) to complete before running the next action or moving to the final step defined in the <span class=SIBoldMark>After executing actions</span> section. This is useful if one of the actions brings up a new window for a manual conversion or runs actions on records in a related table that should be reflected in this table record before proceeding.<br>If you select <span class=SIBoldMark>Open a URL provided by</span>, it will be opened at the specified URL that may include variables from the record.<br>If the action button opens a script in a window with a URL that is defined by a Script Action, the last script in the list of Execute Actions could use <span class=SIBoldMark>EWset::setRedirect</span> to define what this URL should be.<br>If you enter the URL manually, please, note that URL to open is a <span class=SIBoldMark>Formula</span> and special syntax is required.<br><ul><li>If you want  to open a <span class=SIBoldMark>static URL</span>, enter your URL enclosed in double quotes. For example <span class=SIItalicMark>"http://www.agiloft.com"</span>.<li>If you want to open a <span class=SIBoldMark>URL, where   the main address depends on some record data</span>, you should concatenate static parts, enclosed in double quotes and fields or variables names (prefixed by $) using a plus sign. For example, if your record contains a field named \u201Ccompany\u201D, you could specify a URL like <span class=SIItalicMark>"http://www." + $company + ".com"</span> to go to the company site. Please note that you should not use <span class=SIBoldMark><popup title="fields.actionbutton.popup">urlEncode()</popup></span> in this case.<br><br><li>If you want to open a <span class=SIBoldMark>URL, where parameters (after the main address) depend on record data</span>, you should concatenate fields variable names (prefixed by $) enclosed in <span class=SIBoldMark><popup title="fields.actionbutton.popup">urlEncode()</popup></span> while enclosing the static parts in double quotes with a plus sign.<br><br>Such URL parameters are easy to identify because they come after an equals (=) sign. For example, if you have a URL such as <span class=SIItalicMark>http://www.agiloft.com?login=myLogin&password=myPassword</span>, then "login" and "password" are URL parameters and "myLogin" and "myPassword" are the parameter values.<br><br>To compose such a URL using fields from the current record, you would write:<span class=SIItalicMark>"http://www.agiloft.com?login=" + urlEncode($myLogin) + "&password=" + urlEncode($myPassword)</span>.<br></ul><popup title="fields.actionbutton.popup">Why is urlEncode() added to field variables?</popup>
2529fields.actionbutton.popup=Every web server detects parameters and their values in a URL string by locating <code>?&=</code> characters. That means that a URL parameter value should not itself contain any of these characters, otherwise the web server will not be able to recognize the correct parameter value. To avoid this confusion, each parameter that uses a field variable with <code>$</code> should be <i>URL-encoded</i>, so that dangerous characters in each parameter value are replaced with "safe" character sequences.  The server will understand these sequences and convert them back to source characters when reading the parameters string.<br>If you add variables through the Formula Wizard, variables are added with <code>urlEncode()</code> function for you. <br>You should <b>always</b> use this function, if you are using the variable or field in the parameter part of a URL like <code>"www.b2b.com?param=" + urlEncode($field)</code>.<br> You should <b>not</b> use this function when your field or variable is used in the main address part of the URL, such as <code>"http://www." + $company + ".com"</code>.
2530fields.actionbutton.buttontext.hint=Enter here the text to be shown on your action button
2531fields.actionbutton.buttontext.label=Button text
2532fields.actionbutton.executeaction=Execute Actions
2533fields.actionbutton.chunk.display=-- Wait for Completion --
2534fields.actionbutton.chunk.button=Add Wait Point
2535fields.general.actionbutton.onclick.label=Actions on button click
2536fields.general.actionbutton.additionalactionsettings.label=Additional options
2537fields.general.actionbutton.addbutton=Add Action
2538fields.general.actionbutton.deletebutton=Remove
2539fields.general.actionbutton.before=Before executing actions:
2540fields.general.actionbutton.before.donothing=Do nothing
2541fields.general.actionbutton.before.save=Save record
2542fields.general.actionbutton.after=After executing actions:
2543fields.general.actionbutton.after.dontsave=Close record without saving
2544fields.general.actionbutton.then=then
2545fields.general.actionbutton.viewrecord=Save and Open record for view
2546fields.general.actionbutton.reopen.tab.current=Reopen to the tab that was being viewed/edited
2547fields.general.actionbutton.reopen.tab.next=Reopen to the next tab after the one that was being viewed/edited
2548fields.general.actionbutton.reopen.tab.select=Reopen to a specified tab
2549fields.general.actionbutton.reopen.tab.staff=For Staff users:
2550fields.general.actionbutton.reopen.tab.enduser=For End users:
2551fields.general.actionbutton.editrecord=Save and Open record for edit
2552fields.general.actionbutton.saverecord=Save record
2553fields.general.actionbutton.donothing=Do nothing
2554fields.general.actionbutton.executeactivex=Execute activeX
2555fields.general.actionbutton.setupactivex=Setup activeX
2556fields.general.actionbutton.openwindow=Open a URL provided by
2557fields.general.actionbutton.openwindow.failure=Unable to open popup with url\n{0}\n\nPossible reasons:\n* Popup Blocker prevents the one from opening.\n* The URL or URL-formula specified is wrong.
2558fields.general.actionbutton.skypecall=Make a Skype call to Skype ID provided by
2559fields.general.actionbutton.fieldsinrecord=fields in record
2560fields.general.actionbutton.addfield=Add field
2561fields.general.actionbutton.scriptaction=action
2562fields.general.actionbutton.createemail=Create email
2563fields.general.actionbutton.paypal=Paypal
2564fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.account=Select Payment Account
2565fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.amount.column=Select column for the item price
2566fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.response.column=Select column for the payment result info
2567fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.item.description.column=Select column for the item description
2568fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.item.quantity.column=Select column for items quantity<br>Single item assumed if no column is selected
2569fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.item.currency.column=Select column for currency code<BR>USD assumed if no column selected
2570fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.payment.not.selected=Not selected
2571fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.paymenttype.expresscheckout=Express Checkout
2572fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.paymenttype.subscription=Subscription
2573fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.type.days=Days
2574fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.type.weeks=Weeks
2575fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.type.months=Month
2576fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.type.years=Years
2577fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.type=Recurring payment period type
2578fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.recurrences.days=Recurrences. Allowable values from 1 to 90
2579fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.recurrences.weeks=Recurrences. Allowable values from 1 to 52
2580fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.recurrences.months=Recurrences. Allowable values from 1 to 24
2581fields.general.actionbutton.paypal.subscription.period.recurrences.years=Recurrences. Allowable values from 1 to 5
2582fields.general.actionbutton.createnote=Create note
2583fields.general.actionbutton.usestandardlayout=Use standard email layout
2584fields.general.actionbutton.userecordlayout=Use record layout
2585fields.general.actionbutton.populatefromtemplate=Populate from template
2586fields.general.actionbutton.ina=In a
2587fields.general.actionbutton.newwindow=New window
2588fields.general.actionbutton.samewindow=Same window
2589fields.general.actionbutton.parent.hint=Choose the field here that will define which actions are available.
2590fields.general.actionbutton.parent.label=Parent choice field:
2591fields.general.actionbutton.wait.label=Wait limit is
2592fields.general.actionbutton.wait.seconds=seconds
2593fields.mapping.actionbutton.choicevalue=Choice value:
2594fields.wrong.restrictfilter=The selected search {0} does not exist. Possibly it has been removed
2595actionbutton.badformula=You have entered URL in wrong format, error message: {0}. <br> Make sure you place string literals in quotes and use + sign to make concatenation.
2596actionbutton.paypal.account.not.selected=Paypal account is not selected
2597actionbutton.skypecall.disabled=Skype integration is not active
2598actionbutton.noparameter=There is a problem with parameters of your formula [{1}], error message: {0}. <br>Possible reasons are:<br>this subtype does not contain this field<br>this field was deleted from the table<br>you do not have rights for this field
2599actionbutton.badparameter=There is a problem with your formula [{1}], error message: {0}. <br>Make sure you place string literals in quotes and use + sign to make concatenation.
2600fields.appendonly.edit.title=Text entry editing
2601fields.appendonly.edit.hint=Enter new value for text entry or clear it to remove entry.
2602actionbutton.setupactivex.title=Setup ActiveX
2603actionbutton.tab.object=Object tag configuration
2604actionbutton.tab.parameters=Call parameters
2605actionbutton.activexsetup.error.nocab=You should upload cabfile to use with internal codebase.
2606activexsetup.object.codebase.internal=internal
2607activexsetup.object.codebase.external=external
2608activexsetup.object.codebase.version=version
2609activexsetup.object.codebase.upload=Upload
2610activexsetup.object.classid.hint=Classid (URI) This attribute may be used to specify the location of an object\u2019s implementation via a URI. It may be used together with, or as an alternative to the data attribute, depending on the type of object involved. <br> Note: For activeX classid is a string containing ID that allows windows to find in registry and create component.<br> Example: "clsid:56778DD1-7E3B-4CF8-9E58-59DC5AA0A717"<br>Data can be passed to this component or designate some other object (movie, for example). In that case tag will be like<br> &lt;object data="demo.mpg" width="400" height="300" align="left"&gt;&lt;/object&gt;<br>without clsid, so it\u2019s up to browser how to find the proper program for the data to handle.
2611activexsetup.object.classid.label=classid
2612activexsetup.object.codebase.hint=Codebase (URI) This attribute specifies the base path used to resolve relative URIs specified by the classid, data, and archive attributes. When absent, its default value is the base URI of the current document.<br>Example: codebase="/osw/cab/calendar/SwCalendarSync.cab#Version=1,0,0,5"<br>designates that SwCalendarSync.cab should be downloaded and installed in the registry. After that clsid: may be resolved correctly and required component created. Version value allows to control updates and force reload of updated package<br>
2613activexsetup.object.codebase.label=codebase
2614activexsetup.object.codetype.hint=Codetype (content-type) This attribute specifies the content type of data expected when downloading the object specified by classid.<br>This attribute is optional but recommended when classid   is specified since it allows the user agent to avoid loading information for unsupported content types. When absent, it defaults to the value of the type attribute.<br>For example: "application/x-shockwave-flash"
2615activexsetup.object.codetype.label=codetype
2616activexsetup.object.archive.hint=archive (uri-list) This attribute may be used to specify a space-separated list of URIs for archives containing resources relevant to the object, which may include the resources specified by the classid and data attributes. Preloading archives will generally result in reduced load times for objects. Archives specified as relative URIs should be interpreted relative to the codebase attribute.
2617activexsetup.object.archive.label=archive
2618activexsetup.object.data.hint=Data (uri) This attribute may be used to specify the location of the object\u2019s data, for instance image data for objects defining images, or more generally, a serialized form of an object which can be used to recreate it.<br>Note: {0} does nothing with this attribute, it is up to activeX or browser to understand this data.<br>It can be "demo.mpg" - relative url (means - demo.mpg in the same dir as the page in which it is embedded) or something like data="data:application/x-oleobject;base64, ...base64 data..."> (that\u2019s serialized form) <br>If given as a relative URI, it should be interpreted relative to the codebase attribute.
2619activexsetup.object.data.label=data
2620activexsetup.object.type.hint=Type (content-type) This attribute specifies the content type for the data specified by data. This attribute is optional but recommended when data is specified since it allows the user agent to avoid loading information for unsupported content types. If the value of this attribute differs from the HTTP Content-Type returned by the server when the object is retrieved, the HTTP Content-Type takes precedence.
2621activexsetup.object.type.label=type
2622activexsetup.object.standby.hint=Standby (text) This attribute specifies a message that a user agent may render while loading the object\u2019s implementation and data.
2623activexsetup.object.standby.label=standby
2624activexsetup.object.visibility.hint=Visual parameters. If your ActiveX requires to render something into the page, you can setup the visual appearance parameters here.
2625activexsetup.object.visibility.label=visual parameters
2626activexsetup.parameters.method.hint=ActiveX method name to be called from JavaScript on pressing action button.
2627activexsetup.parameters.method.label=method name
2628activexsetup.parameters.params.hint=Parameters setup list. Call of ActiveX method will be performed with necessary values and in the order you can configure to the right. You can use either constants or formula as property value (that includes ticket fields values, global variables and so on). Parameter value will be passed as string.
2629activexsetup.parameters.params.label=parameters
2630activexsetup.parameters.params.parameter=Parameter value
2631activexsetup.parameters.properties.hint=Properties setup list. Before call of ActiveX method, it will be configured with necessary values and in the order you can configure to the right. <br>You can use either constants or formula as property value (that includes ticket fields values, global variables and so on). Property value will be set as string.
2632activexsetup.parameters.properties.label=properties
2633activexsetup.parameters.params.propval=Property Name/Value
2634activexsetup.object.visibility.display=Displays image
2635activexsetup.object.visibility.notdisplay=Does not display image
2636activexsetup.object.visibility.align=align
2637activexsetup.object.visibility.align.left=left
2638activexsetup.object.visibility.align.right=right
2639activexsetup.object.visibility.align.center=center
2640activexsetup.object.visibility.width=width
2641activexsetup.object.visibility.height=height
2642##new
2643#
2644#
2645#communicationssetup.inbound.settings.buttonText=Configure Inbound Email
2646#communicationssetup.inbound.settings.buttonText=Configure Inbound Email
2647copylinkfields.display.inputaid.popupplain=Plain text box with lookup
2648copylinkfields.display.inputaid.viewonlyplain=Plain text view only
2649copylinkfields.display.inputaid.control=Source field display with lookup
2650copylinkfields.display.inputaid.controlvo=View only source field display
2651# for backward compatibility only
2652# for backward compatibility only
2653dao3.error.notfound=Linked field functionality with the following identifier could not be found: {0}
2654dao3.error.badexttable=The external table: {0} cannot be used as a source table for linked field. Only tables with the single numeric primary key field can be used.
2655dictionary.exceptions.projectnotfound=The KnowledgeBase (ID:{0}) has been deleted already.
2656dictionary.exceptions.projectlocked=The KnowledgeBase <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> is locked or being deleted already.
2657dictionary.exceptions.projectlockwait=Server load is too high for now to safely remove the KB(s) at the moment. The KnowledgeBase <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> is locked by other process. Please, try again later.
2658dictionary.exceptions.indexduplicatedbname=Index with dbname=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2659dictionary.exceptions.indexduplicatename=Index with name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2660dictionary.exceptions.choiceduplicatename=Choice with name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2661dictionary.exceptions.tableduplicatedbname=Table with dbname=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2662dictionary.exceptions.tableduplicatename=Table with name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2663dictionary.exceptions.tablenonremovable=Table {0} is non-removable
2664dictionary.exceptions.columnduplicatedbname=Column with dbname=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2665dictionary.exceptions.columnduplicatename=Column with name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2666dictionary.exceptions.columnnonremovable=Column {0} in table {1} is non-removable
2667dictionary.exceptions.columnbadname=Column with name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> contains invalid characters and cannot be used
2668dictionary.exceptions.columnbaddbname=Column with database name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> contains invalid characters and cannot be used
2669dictionary.exceptions.projectduplicatelabel=Project with label=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2670dictionary.exceptions.projectduplicatename=Project with name=<span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> already exists
2671dictionary.exceptions.columnalreadyartificial=Cannot make column <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> artificial: it is already artificial
2672dictionary.exceptions.columnalreadynonartificial=Cannot make column <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> non-artificial: it is already non-artificial
2673dictionary.exceptions.indexcantbebuildoncolumn=Index cannot be built on column <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> of type <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span>
2674dictionary.exceptions.indexcantbebuildoncolumn.encrypted=Index cannot be built on encrypted column <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>
2675dictionary.exceptions.tabletoobig=Cannot add more columns to table <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> due to Database limitations.<br>Please log in to 'Admin Console', go to setup/patchers and click "Resurrect" for this KB. Then login to the KB, delete few fields from the table <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> , that are not needed. <BR>Then, from the 'Admin Console', reapply patchers from Setup/Patchers for that KB.
2676dictionary.exceptions.columnsize.nonunique.value=Column size cannot be changed for <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> as it contains non-unique value <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span>.
2677dictionary.exceptions.columnsize.nonunique=Column size cannot be changed for <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> as it contains non-unique values.
2678email.account.folders.label=Folders
2679email.account.folders.hint=Please fill process folders separated by semicolon; Note that POP3 type accounts process only {0} folder; The default value is {0}
2680email.account.enabled.label=Activity
2681email.account.enabled.hint=Option to disable email account checking
2682email.account.enabled.opt1=This account is actively polling for emails
2683email.account.enabled.opt2=Disable this account - do not check for emails
2684emailHotlinkAction.hotlinkPopup.loggedin=Leave the user logged in
2685export.exceptions.nosubtype=Cannot export table without subtype column
2686export.exceptions.permissions.tmpdir=Error preparing tmp directory for export file download : <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span>. Please make sure your {2} installation has permissions to access directory <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>
2687export.exception.json.empty.custom.format=Custom format can not be empty
2688export.exception.json.wrong.custom.format=Wrong subitem "{0}". Key/value pair should be delimited by colon.
2689export.exceptions.permissions.tmpdir.create=Error creating tmp directory for export file download. Please make sure your {2} installation has permissions to access directory <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>
2690export.exceptions.permissions.project=Export of this project is not permitted
2691export.exceptions.permissions.table=Export of table {0} is not permitted
2692export.exceptions.permissions.inbox=Export of tables in inbox is not permitted
2693fields.permissions.appendonlyedit.hint=The selected groups will be able to change any appended item of the field when editing {0}.
2694fields.permissions.appendonlyedit.label=Allow group to change any appended item of the field when editing {0}
2695fields.permissions.versioning.delete.hint=The selected groups will also be able to delete files, if they have the edit permissions that allow them to add new files to this field in {0}.
2696fields.permissions.versioning.delete.label=Allow group to delete files, as well as add new ones, when editing {0}
2697fields.permissions.versioning.view_versions.hint=The selected groups will be able to view previous versions of attached items.<br>Note: This permission only applies if the user has general view permissions for this field.
2698fields.permissions.versioning.view_versions.label=Allow group to view previous versions of attached items.
2699fields.general.defoverwritemode.hint=Please select the desired behavior for dynamic default values.  If you choose the first option, once the field has a value, any change in the underlying condition will not cause the field to update.  For example, suppose you have a field called \u2019Closed by\u2019 that is set by default to the user who changed the Status field from any value to Closed.  Suppose now that the record is closed and the field is populated.  Then it is reopened, and then closed again by someone else.  If you choose the first option, the Closed by field will hold the name of the person who first closed it.  If you choose the second option, it will be updated when it is closed again (since the default criteria is met again) with the name of the second person who closed it.  
2700fields.general.defoverwritemode.label=Please select the desired behavior:
2701fields.general.defoverwritemode.set_only_if_null=Once the field has a value, never overwrite it
2702fields.general.defoverwritemode.always_set=Update the field whenever the underlying condition changes
2703fields.general.defoverwritemode.set_only_if_changed=Only update when the field in current table changes
2704fields.rules.url.newwindows.hint=Choose whether the link should be opened in a new window.  This is almost always desirable, as opening it in the same window will cancel editing of the record the user was in when he clicked the link.
2705fields.rules.url.newwindows.label=Open in new window?
2706fields.rules.url.windowsize.hint=You can set the size of the window that is opened when the user clicks the hyperlink
2707fields.rules.url.windowsize.label=Set Window Size to:
2708fields.rules.url.windowsize.default=User\u2019s default browser setting
2709fields.rules.url.windowsize.custom=Custom size:
2710fields.rules.url.windowsize.width=pixels wide
2711fields.rules.url.windowsize.height=pixels high
2712fields.rules.url.windowopt.hint=Define other characteristics of the window that is opened.  Select from the choice list to enable elements in the new browser window such as the Toolbar and Menubar.
2713fields.rules.url.windowopt.label=Enable Window Elements:
2714fields.rules.url.windowopt.location=Addressbar
2715fields.rules.url.windowopt.statusbar=Statusbar
2716fields.rules.url.windowopt.menubar=Menubar
2717fields.rules.url.windowopt.toolbar=Toolbar
2718fields.rules.url.windowopt.resize=Allow Resizing
2719fields.rules.url.windowopt.scroll=Allow Scrolling
2720fields.rules.url.hide.hint=You can choose to hide the actual URL when the user clicks the link so that they cannot access the link outside of the record
2721fields.rules.url.hide.label=Hide URL when clicked:
2722fields.rules.url.cannotbeused=The requested URL cannot be retrieved
2723fields.rules.create.action=Create Action
2724import.file.nofile=No file to import can be found
2725import.file.nofileorurl=Filename or URL is required
2726import.file.url.bad=Invalid URL {0} : {1}
2727import.file.url.download=Problem downloading file to import from URL {0} : {1}
2728import.file.url.download.nofile=File to import not found at URL {0}
2729import.file.url.invalid-protocol=Expected ftp://, ftps://, sftp:// prefix for FTP, FTPS, SFTP protocol
2730import.exceptions.linkedmultivaluenotfound=Problem finding linked record with value \u201C{0}\u201D for field \u201C{1}\u201D.
2731import.exceptions.zip.noentries=Failed to extract importable file from archive.
2732import.exceptions.fatal=Failed to read file: {0}
2733import.exceptions.xml.notables=Failed to parse any metadata in .xml import file. Please make sure that file has a valid XML format.
2734import.exceptions.xml.sax=Failed to parse any data in.xml import file. Please make sure that file has a valid XML format. {0}
2735import.exceptions.json.error=Failed to parse json data {0}
2736import.exceptions.csv.badseparator=Bad CSV file format: Expecting {0} in position={1} at line={2}
2737import.exceptions.csv.delimiterequalsquote=Quote and delimiter chars for .csv file format must be different
2738import.exceptions.json.wrongcustomformat=Error in JSON custom format
2739import.exceptions.invalidstring=Problem importing field "{0}". {1}
2740import.exceptions.newchoice=New choice value \u201C{0}\u201D has been added to field \u201C{1}\u201D
2741import.exceptions.newchoice.questionnaire=New choice \u201C{0}\u201D has been added for field \u201C{1}\u201D
2742import.exceptions.newchoice.system=New choice value \u201C{0}\u201D can't be added to field \u201C{1}\u201D that uses a \u201C{2}\u201D system choice.
2743import.exceptions.nofileindir=Cannot find file {0} to import in accessible directories
2744import.exceptions.nosubtypes=Can not import data in table {0} because there are no head subtypes
2745import.exceptions.sw1.noexpfile=Export datafile name must have a (\\d+).exp format
2746import.exceptions.sw1.badexpformat=Bad sw1 file format - failed to find {0} section
2747import.exceptions.sw1.notable=Bad sw1 file format - {0} table not found
2748import.exceptions.sw1multi.notables=Multi export file is corrupted and cannot be processed: Cannot find tables folder in sw1 export file
2749import.exceptions.salesforce.nodocuments=SalesForce export file format failed check for presence of <span class=SIBoldMark>documents</span> folder.
2750import.exceptions.jira.nodocuments=Jira export file format failed check for presence of <span class=SIBoldMark>documents</span> folder.
2751import.exceptions.badauditlogrule=Got invalid auditlog setting (ID={0}). Valid ID={1}.
2752import.exceptions.badlinks=Cannot link non-imported records (ID={0})
2753import.exceptions.noimportablesheets=For each datasheet, select the table to be imported
2754import.exceptions.nomatchingrecord=Skipping input row. No matching record found for <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> = <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span>
2755import.exceptions.skipmatchingrecord=Skipping input row. Matching record found for <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> = <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span>
2756import.exceptions.skipduplicaterecord=Skipping input row. Duplicate record found for <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span> = <span class=SIBoldMark>{1}</span> in source file
2757import.exceptions.oomstring=Truncating too large string({1}MB &gt; {2}MB limit) in <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span></span>.
2758eui2.error.notfound=Cannot find template:
2759icons.alt.date=Click to enter Date
2760icons.alt.time=Click to enter Time
2761icons.alt.lf=Click to search records
2762icons.alt.record.edit=Edit record
2763icons.alt.record.locked=Record is locked by $1
2764icons.alt.record.view=View record
2765icons.alt.record.history=View detailed info
2766icons.alt.web=Click to use editor
2767icons.alt.choice=Click to select values
2768icons.alt.lfdefault=Click to chosoe defaults
2769icons.alt.aoedit=Edit text entry
2770icons.alt.mailreport=Mail Report
2771server.down.soon=Please save your work and logoff, the server is going to be restarted for two system checks in {0} minutes. It will be available in 10 minutes.
2772server.started={0} started
2773messagetouser.debug=DEBUG:
2774messagetouser.info=INFO:
2775messagetouser.warn=WARN:
2776messagetouser.error=ERROR:
2777messagetouser.fatal=FATAL:
2778index.wizard.caption=New Index
2779quick-search.wizard.caption=Edit Quick Search Fields
2780index.columns.limit=The maximum number of columns per index is {0}
2781fields.general.calcresult.hint=You can use both native fields and fields held in records that are linked to the current record through a linked field or related data relationship.<br><br>For instance, you may want to multiply the number of hours worked in a time report by the hourly rate of the technician who did the work.  The rate may be held in the Employee table, while the time may be held in the Time entry table.<br><br>In this dialog you are selecting the records that you want to use in the calculation, if any, other than the current record.  Select the first table, then click the ?Add the table? button to add it and if necessary, select another and repeat until finished.
2782fields.general.calcresult.label=Select a table and record(s):
2783letter.include.all.recipients.info.prefix=This email was sent to:
2784letter.include.all.recipients.info.prefix.TO=TO:
2785letter.include.all.recipients.info.prefix.CC=CC:
2786letter.include.all.recipients.info.prefix.BCC=BCC:
2787main_tabs_admin.tab.runsst=Performance
2788runsst.start.hint=Click this button to run a performance test. The test will take about 5 minutes and will significantly slow the server while it is running.<br><br>Guidance: If your server take over 250 seconds to import the KB or over 150 seconds to generate 4000 records, you are likely to suffer from performance problems during production use. For comparison purposes, a $1,700 PC running Windows 7 with 16G RAM, an Intel i7 950 CPU and one SSD hard drive takes 155 seconds to import the KB and 79 seconds to generate 4000 records<br><br>For optimum performance, we strongly recommend SSD hard drives, Intel E5 processors and sufficient RAM. Please see our <a href=http://www.agiloft.com/system-requirements.htm#hardware target="_blank">hardware recommendations</a> page for further details. Unless you have 10G Ethernet or Infiniband networking, we strongly recommend using a locally installed database, such as the version of MySQL that may be downloaded during installation. If you prefer MS SQL Server, please use SQL Server 2012+.
2789runsst.start.caption=Run Performance Test
2790runsst.finish.caption=Finish
2791runsst.unexpected.exception=Unexpected error: {0}
2792runsst.debug.message=Runsst debug message: {0}
2793runsst.running.wait=Performance test is running...
2794runsst.delete.test.kb=Deleting existing temporary KB
2795runsst.import.test.kb=Importing temporary KB
2796runsst.warmup=Preparing data for performance test
2797runsst.perform.sst=Creating test tickets
2798runsst.result=Performance test results: Time taken to import KB: {0} seconds, time taken to generate {2} records: {3} seconds.
2799runsst.result.note=Note: Our standard turnkey server imports the benchmark KB in {2} seconds and generates {0} records in {1} seconds
2800main_tabs_admin.tab.brgsrvctl=Background services
2801bgrsrvctl.current.state.label=Current status: 
2802bgrsrv.are.enabled=All background services are running
2803bgrsrv.are.disabled=All background services are stopped
2804bgrsrv.are.partially.enabled=Some but not all background services are running
2805bgrsrv.do.disable=Stop all background services
2806bgrsrv.do.enable=Start all background services
2807bgrsrvctl.current.state.single.service.started=Service {0} is <span class="SIStatusValue">running</span>
2808bgrsrvctl.current.state.single.service.stopped=Service {0} is <span class="SIStatusValue">stopped</span>
2809bgrsrvctl.current.state.single.service.status.unknown=The status of service {0} is <span class="SIStatusValue">unknown</span>
2810bgrsrv.do.disable.single.service=Stop it
2811bgrsrv.do.enable.single.service=Start it
2812bgrsrvctl.audit.message=Audit message: <i>{0}</i>
2813bgrsrvctl.no.audit.message.for.stopped=No audit message for stopped service, possible error
2814bgrsrv.action.descr=Click the appropriate button to start or stop background services across all knowledgebases on this server. Services may be stopped/started individually or all together. Stopping a service will affect the corresponding features such as chat, indexing and updates propagation. Please be aware that stopping/starting services individually may produce unexpected results and should be avoided unless specifically requested by vendor's Customer Support representative.
2815ddll.tablelockinfo.unlocked=Table unlocked
2816ddll.tablelockinfo.locked=Lock(s) held by {0}
2817ddll.lockwait=Timeout waiting for DDL lock on table '{0}', please try again later. {1}.
2818ddll.ddlinprogress=Structure of the table '{0}' is being modified, please try again later. {1}.
2819inbound.error.handling.syntax.error.subject=Syntax Error
2820inbound.error.handling.syntax.error.text=WARNING: MSG-4000 KB {0}, Date {1}, Email with ID {2}, Subject "{3}" was not treated as a correctly formatted email, but was treated as a plain text email because of the following syntax error: {4}. This error occurred {5} characters from the start of the message. The preceding 500 characters were: "{6}". The following 500 characters were: "{7}".
2821inbound.error.handling.invalid.field.subject=Invalid Field
2822inbound.error.handling.invalid.field.text=WARNING: MSG-4001 KB {0}, Date {1}, Email with ID {2}, Subject "{3}". The following field {4} was not processed because [{5}]
2823inbound.error.handling.field.permission.subject=Field Permission
2824inbound.error.handling.field.permission.text=WARNING: MSG-4002 KB {0}, Date {1}, Email with ID {2}, Subject "{3}" rejected because: User {4} does not have permission to create/set fields for the following fields: {5}.
2825inbound.error.handling.record.permission.subject=Record Permission
2826inbound.error.handling.record.permission.text=WARNING: MSG-4003 KB {0}, Date {1}, Email with ID {2}, Subject "{3}" was rejected because: User with email {4} does not have permissions to update records of type {5}.
2827inbound.error.handling.record.permission.text.1=not found and the anonymous user does not have group permissions
2828inbound.error.handling.record.permission.text.2=found but does not have group permissions
2829inbound.error.handling.record.error.subject=Record Error processing
2830inbound.error.handling.record.error.text=WARNING: MSG-4004 KB {0}, Date {1}, Email with ID {2}, Subject "{3}" The record can not be updated due to inner error: {4}.
2831inbound.fields.update.parse.error.1=No delimeter determined in a letter
2832inbound.fields.update.parse.error.2=Parsing error of regular expression: ({0})
2833tables.api.java.hint=Click this button to download sample Java Web Services code for
2834tables.api.dotnet.hint=Click this button to download sample .NET Web Services code for
2835tables.api.crud.hint=Create, Read, Update Delete and Select operations on this table
2836tables.api.htmlform.hint=Click this button to generate HTML that you can embed in any web page to allow users to create a record without logging into the system.<br><br>You must select a user in whose name the record should be created, and this user must have both record and field create permissions for the table and fields selected. The user must be in the External Users subtable of the People table. It may make sense to create a special user for this purpose.<br><br>This drop down list determines the layout of the input fields on the form that is inserted into an external web page. Not all field types are supported. Linked fields are not available, except for links to a single field. The Vertical list of fields will show only fields on the End User Layout.<br><br>You can edit the layout manually after downloading the file, but it will save time if you start by choosing a layout close to what you want.
2837tables.api.java.button=Download Java Sample
2838tables.api.dotnet.button=Download .NET Sample
2839tables.api.htmlform.foruser=Name to use for the record creator:
2840tables.api.htmlform.layout=Lay out fields using
2841tables.api.htmlform.layout.vertical=Vertical list of fields
2842tables.api.htmlform.layout.enduser=End User Layout
2843tables.api.htmlform.layout.staff=Staff Layout
2844tables.api.htmlform.currentUser=Current user
2845tables.api.htmlform.user=User:
2846tables.api.htmlform.button=Download HTML
2847tables.api.htmlform.link.label=Hyperlink Text
2848tables.api.htmlform.submit=Submit
2849tables.api.htmlform.createnew=Create new record in {0}
2850tables.api.htmlform.error=Cannot find user with the name {0}
2851tables.api.htmlform.error.emptyuser=Please choose User to use for the record creator
2852tables.api.htmlform.error.nopermissions=User does not have permissions for any field in that table
2853tables.api.htmlform.messages.loading=Loading...
2854tables.api.htmlform.messages.errors.values=There was an error submitting the form:
2855tables.api.htmlform.messages.errors.ajaxrequest=There was an error submitting the form, please try again.<br />If this error persists, please contact the site administrator.
2856tables.api.htmlform.messages.success=Thank you. Record ID: {msg.result} is successfully created.
2857tables.api.htmlform.messages.validation.required=This field is required
2858tables.api.htmlform.messages.validation.email=Please enter a valid email address,<br />example: you@yourdomain.com.
2859tables.api.htmlform.messages.validation.url=Please enter a valid URL,<br />example: http://www.yourdomain.com.
2860tables.api.htmlform.messages.validation.number=Please enter a valid number,<br />example: 12.34.
2861tables.api.htmlform.messages.validation.digits=Please enter only digits,<br/>example 34.
2862record.wrong.value=Wrong value '{1}' specified for column '{0}'. Underlying error message: {2}
2863record.wrong.value1=Wrong value specified for column '{0}'. Underlying error message: {1}
2864imageregedit.error.common=Error on performing image registry editing: {0}
2865imageregedit.error.image.non.removable=Image {0} cannot be removed
2866imageregedit.error.image.is.not.removed=Image {0} is not removed
2867imageregedit.error.unexpected.error=Unexpected error: {0}
2868imageregedit.error.brokenimagedata=The picture cannot be uploaded: {0}
2869imageregedit.error.image.already.exists=Image {0} already exists
2870imageregedit.error.unsupported.mime.type=Unsupported image type {0}
2871imageregedit.error.datasize.too.big=Image upload failed. The size of the file ({0} bytes) exceeds the allowed maximum of {1} bytes.
2872imageregedit.error.height.too.big=Image upload failed. The height of the image ({0} pixels) exceeds the allowed maximum of {1} pixels.
2873imageregedit.error.width.too.big=Image upload failed. The width of the image ({0} pixels) exceeds the allowed maximum of {1} pixels.
2874imageregedit.message.common=Message from image registry editor: {0}
2875imageregedit.message.no.selected.image.for.removing=No selected image for removing
2876imageregedit.message.image.removed=Image {0} removed
2877imageregedit.message.image.uploaded=Image {0} uploaded as {1} and selected
2878imageregedit.showmode=Display:
2879imageregedit.menu.iconsize.SMALL=small icons (16x16)
2880imageregedit.menu.iconsize.MEDIUM=medium icons (32x32)
2881imageregedit.menu.iconsize.LARGE=large icons (64x64)
2882imageregedit.menu.iconsize.ORIGINAL=original images
2883imageregedit.menu.longlisting.true=detailed image list
2884imageregedit.menu.longlisting.false=images only
2885imageregedit.menu.sort.UNSORTED=unordered
2886imageregedit.menu.sort.NAME=ordered by name
2887imageregedit.menu.sort.NAME_DESC=ordered by descending name
2888imageregedit.menu.sort.SIZE=ordered by size
2889imageregedit.menu.sort.SIZE_DESC=ordered by descending size
2890imageregedit.uploadirectory=Upload directory is <span class=SIBoldMark>{0}</span>
2891imageregedit.uploadreplace=Do you want to replace the existing file under the same name?
2892imageregedit.select.file.to.upload=Image to upload:
2893imageregedit.do.upload=Upload
2894imageregedit.remove.selected=Remove selected
2895imageregedit.ok=Select image and exit
2896imageregedit.select.none=Use No Image
2897imageregedit.cancel=Cancel
2898homepage.new.title.hint=Provide a Title for the home page that will be displayed on the home page
2899homepage.new.title.label=Title:
2900homepage.new.description.hint=Provide a brief description for what the home page will show
2901homepage.new.description.label=Description:
2902homepage.new.updatedby.hint=This shows who last updated this home page
2903homepage.new.updatedby.label=Last updated by: {0} at {1}
2904homepage.new.available=Available widgets
2905homepage.new.selected=Selected widgets
2906homepage.layout.rows.hint=Number of Rows
2907homepage.layout.columns.hint=Please select your desired Layout<br><br>1 Column means your widget will take the entire width of the home page<br><br>2 Columns means each widget uses 50% of the width of the home page OR one column uses 25% and the other uses 75%.<br><br>3 Columns means each widget uses 33% of the width of the home page OR one column uses 50% and the side columns each use 25%.
2908homepage.layout.onecolumn=1 column
2909homepage.layout.twocolumns=2 columns
2910homepage.layout.treecolumns=3 columns
2911homepage.layout.scrolling.hint=Define whether the home page should be sized to fit onto one screen or whether it should be extended vertically and allow scrolling
2912homepage.layout.scrolling.label=Vertical Sizing:
2913homepage.layout.scrolling.no=Fit rows onto one screen (100% height)
2914homepage.layout.scrolling.yes=Allow rows to extend to the maximum size defined next
2915homepage.layout.rowsizes.hint=If you chose to allow rows to expand, for each row, select the maximum vertical size for that row in pixels.  Note that if the content of a particular row does not require the vertical space, then it will be reduced in size to the needed height.
2916homepage.layout.rowsizes.row=Row {0}:
2917homepage.layout.rowsizes.pixels=pixels
2918homepage.layout.rowsizes.percents=percent of visible home page height 
2919homepage.manage.return=Return to home page
2920homepage.manage.widgets=Manage widgets
2921homepage.manage.page=Manage home page
2922homepage.empty.message=No home page template defined, use \u2018Customize\u2019 dropdown in the top left corner to create new one. 
2923tables.fields.select.search=Please create or select saved search
2924tables.fields.list.toolong=Maximum length of drop-down list is 200 entries, please correct Minimum or Maximum value
2925widget.title.hint=Provide a Title for the widget
2926widget.description.hint=Provide a brief description of widget
2927widget.label.label=Label:
2928widget.label.hint=Provide a label to display on home page
2929widget.type.hint=Choose the type of widget from the drop-down list.
2930widget.type.label=widget Type:
2931widget.type.chart=Chart
2932widget.type.hotlink=Hotlink
2933widget.type.table=Table
2934widget.type.url=Embedded webpage
2935widget.type.text=Text
2936widget.type.image=Image
2937widget.type.gadget=Google gadget
2938widget.type.report=Custom Summary Report
2939widget.colspan.label1=This widget should extend across
2940widget.colspan.label2=column(s)
2941widget.tab.options=Options
2942widget.chart.table.hint=Please select the Table.
2943widget.chart.table.label=Table:
2944widget.chart.hint=Available Charts/Reports
2945widget.chart.label=Selected Chart:
2946widget.chart.showtitle.hint=Show Chart Title?<br><br>If a chart title is too long or misleading, you can deselect this option to remove the chart title and only display the widget title.
2947widget.chart.autorefresh.hint=Refresh interval<br><br>If auto-refresh is checked, the widget will refresh its content according to the refresh interval
2948widget.chart.autorefresh.label=Auto-refresh?
2949widget.chart.notpermitted=End Users do not have permission to view reports
2950widget.chart.message=Please select chart for this widget
2951widget.table.search.hint=Define which records to show for this table.
2952widget.table.search.label=Search Condition
2953widget.table.search.new=Create New Search
2954widget.table.view.hint=View. This defines how your data is displayed.
2955widget.table.view.label=Display
2956widget.table.showsearch.hint=This option controls whether to show the search bar
2957widget.table.showsearch.label=Search bar
2958widget.table.showaction.hint=This option controls whether to show the action bar that allows new records creation
2959widget.table.showaction.label=Action bar
2960widget.table.showstatus.hint=This option controls whether to show the status line
2961widget.table.showstatus.label=Status line
2962widget.gadget.code.hint=Please enter the HTML for the Google Gadget you wish to add.<br><br>You can find the HTML code of the Google Gadget from the gadget\u2019s main page, webmaster section, under &quot;Embed this gadget&quot;. Click the Get the Code button and copy and paste the result here.<br><br>Note: Google Gadgets may use http:// rather than https://, resulting in a warning that &quot;this page contains both secure and insecure items&quot; if you are accessing the system using https. You may safely ignore this warning since it only applies to the Gadget, not any other part of the system.
2963widget.gadget.code.label=Code:
2964widget.image.file.hint=Please choose an image file to upload
2965widget.image.caption.hint=Caption<br><br>This text will display beneath the image
2966widget.image.caption.label=Caption:
2967widget.url.hint=Please enter the URL for the embedded webpage
2968widget.url.label=URL:
2969widget.tab.apply=Apply
2970widget.apply.hint=Select which teams can see this widget.
2971widget.apply.label=Make this widget visible to:
2972widget.available.me=widget is available for me
2973widget.text.caption.hint=Please enter the text directly or use the HTML editor
2974widget.report.type.hint=Choose the Report here or create a new report by first choosing the table in which the report will live.
2975widget.report.create.label=New report in the
2976widget.report.create=Create Report
2977widget.report.hint=Choose report
2978widget.report.message=Please select report for this widget
2979page.available.hint=Select which teams should be able to view this home page
2980page.available.label=Make this home page accessible to:
2981page.available.me=Home page available for me
2982page.default.hint=Select which teams should have this home page as their default page
2983page.default.label=Make this a default home page for:
2984page.default.me=Home page default for me
2985page.chart.generated=Generated:
2986homepage.access.hint=Select whether this group can modify home pages
2987homepage.access.label=Allow Modification of home pages?
2988homepage.access.deny=Do not Allow
2989homepage.access.own=Allow group to create/edit their own home pages
2990homepage.access.other=Allow group to create/edit home pages for all users
2991homepage.setdefault=Set As Default
2992widget.access.hint=Select whether this group can modify widgets
2993widget.access.label=Allow Modification of widgets?
2994combinedReports.access.hint=Select whether this group can modify combined reports
2995combinedReports.access.label=Allow Modification of combined reports?
2996widget.access.deny=Do not Allow
2997widget.access.own=Allow group to create/edit their own widgets
2998widget.access.other=Allow group to create/edit widgets for all users
2999combinedReports.access.deny=Do not Allow
3000combinedReports.access.own=Allow group to create/edit their own combined reports
3001combinedReports.access.other=Allow group to create/edit combined reports for all users
3002widget.chart.refresh=Refresh
3003homepage.permissions.warning=You do not have permission to edit/delete this home page
3004widget.permissions.warning=You do not have permission to edit/delete this widget
3005widget.hotlink.text.hint=Provide the hyperlink text.
3006widget.hotlink.padding.hint=Set the vertical padding between each hyperlink. The recommended range is between 1 and 20 pixels
3007widget.hotlink.padding.label1=Use vertical padding of
3008widget.hotlink.padding.label2=pixels
3009widget.hotlinks.all=Available Hotlinks
3010widget.hotlinks.selected=Selected Hotlinks
3011widget.hotlink.hint=Choose the options you want to include in the hyperlink.  Once you have chosen any options, click the Compose Hyperlink button to have the system generate the necessary hyperlink to run the action
3012widget.hotlink.label=Set the parameters you want to include in the hyperlink:
3013widget.hotlink.state.label=What should the link do?:
3014widget.hotlink.state.main=Show Table
3015widget.hotlink.state.chart=Show Charts
3016widget.hotlink.state.newrecord=Create a New Record
3017widget.hotlink.state.convert=Convert a Record
3018widget.hotlink.state.dashboard=Show dashboard
3019widget.hotlink.state.assigned=Show All My Assigned Records
3020widget.hotlink.state.chat=Launch Chat
3021widget.hotlink.state.faq=Show FAQs
3022widget.hotlink.table.label=Table:
3023widget.hotlink.action.label=Action:
3024widget.hotlink.search.label=Search:
3025widget.hotlink.selectnow.label=Select record
3026widget.hotlink.donotselectnow.label=Do not select record
3027widget.hotlink.chart.label=Chart/Report:
3028widget.hotlink.compose=Compose Hyperlink
3029widget.hotlink.mandatory=Hotlink URL must be generated
3030widget.hotlink.url.hint=This will be the final program hyperlink , please make any additional edits you need.  Once you have made any changes, you can test the hyperlink (as yourself) by clicking the Test Hyperlink button.
3031widget.hotlink.url.label=URL:
3032widget.hotlink.url.test=Test Hyperlink
3033widget.hotlink.newwindow.hint=Choose whether the action should be executed in a new window or should replace the current home page window.
3034widget.hotlink.newwindow.label=Run action in:
3035widget.hotlink.newwindow.new=New Window
3036widget.hotlink.newwindow.current=Current Window
3037widget.hotlink.image.hint=You may upload an icon for this link to be displayed to the left of the text.
3038widget.hotlink.dashboard.label=Select dashboard
3039widget.hotlink.instruction.hint=Define any instructional text
3040widget.hotlink.instruction.place1=Display the instruction
3041widget.hotlink.instruction.place2=the hyperlink text
3042widget.empty.warning=Please click on a widget to edit.
3043hotlink.empty.warning=Please click on a hotlink to edit.
3044widget.empty.warning1=Please click on a widget to delete.
3045hotlink.empty.warning1=Please click on a hotlink to delete. 
3046nls.system.table.title.dashboards=Dashboards
3047nls.system.table.title.widget=Widgets
3048nls.system.table.title.homepage=Home pages
3049nls.system.table.title.swlicenses=Setup;Licenses;Manage
3050nls.system.table.title.swlicenseusage=Setup;License;Usage
3051nls.system.table.title.swrepcharts=Charts/Reports
3052licenses.nokb.warning=Warning: KB {0} doesn't exist, license will be activated when KB loaded
3053main_tabs.home.preferences.msoutlook.download.hint=In case you do intensively use MS Outlook, you may download Agiloft Outlook Plugin. Once installed, it will add 2 buttons into Outlook toolbars, allowing to Forward email to Agiloft inbound account or set Agiloft on CC.
3054preferences.msoutlook.downloads.hint=Please select {0} Inbound mail Account to route emails to, and press \u201CDownload\u201D link next to it.<br><br>A plugin is pre-configured to use the account selected; if you want to change an account for the plugin, simply re-download and install the plugin for newly selected account.<br><br>You will be prompted to Save the .msi file (Windows Installer package). Double-click on the downloaded file to install the plugin.
3055preferences.msoutlook.downloads.label={0} Inbound Accounts
3056preferences.msoutlook.downloads.button.text=Download Outlook Plugin
3057preferences.msoutlook.downloads.download.tab.title=Download Outlook Plugin
3058preferences.msoutlook.downloads.64bit.title=(for 64-bit Outlook)
3059preferences.msoutlook.downloads.link.to.download=Download...
3060setup.hint.tables=Create, edit and delete:<br>Tables and relationships, fields and action buttons, custom forms and layouts.<br>Generate sample Web Services code.
3061setup.hint.rules=Rules automate your business:<br>Send automatic emails, update fields, run scripts, auto-create new records, schedule data imports, validate user entries and set up escalation rules. 
3062setup.hint.workflow=Map your process flow and automate work assignments and notifications.<br>Ensure full auditability and control.
3063setup.hint.access=Manage permission groups.<br>Manage working teams.<br>Configure LDAP/MS AD. <br>Setup single sign-on.<br>Set Hotlink security/encryption.<br>Configure two-factor authentication
3064setup.hint.email=Configure the email and SMS servers.<br>Setup inbound email and SMS accounts.<br>Setup outbound email and SMS behavior.<br>Create/edit email and SMS templates.
3065setup.hint.system=Set the KnowledgeBase Time.<br>Configure activity log for auditing.<br>Manage global variables for timeouts, locking, security, etc.<br>Edit HTML header text.<br>Manage web services<br>Customize Help.
3066setup.hint.lf=Manage look and feel schemes to control fonts, colors and graphics.<br>Set the order of tabs.<br>Define required field appearance.
3067setup.hint.eui=Setup FAQs for end users and the display of My Items records.<br>To create a fully custom GUI, see online help <help context="/index_eui2_introduction.jspx.html"/>
3068setup.hint.chat=Configure the appearance and behavior of chat sessions between staff and end-users.
3069setup.hint.license=Request or install a license.<br>View current license usage and assign or terminate licenses.
3070setup.hint.import=Import data from ASCII, Excel, XML, or {0} formats.
3071setup.hint.export=Export data to ASCII, Excel, XML or {0} format.
3072setup.hint.localization=Translate choice lists and all program text into other languages.
3073setup.hint.sync=Sync with Exchange, Quickbooks, file systems and third-party software.
3074setup.hint.integrate=Create, edit and delete settings for integration with Twitter, Skype, LogMeIn Rescue, DocuSign, Bomgar, and payment accounts.
3075setup.hint.integrate.twitter=Create, edit and delete settings for integration with Twitter
3076setup.hint.integrate.skype=Enable, disable and set integration with Skype
3077setup.hint.integrate.skype4b=Enable, disable and set integration with Skype for Business
3078setup.hint.integrate.logmein=Create, edit and delete settings for integration with LogMeIn Rescue
3079setup.hint.integrate.payments=Create, edit and delete settings for integration with Payment Systems
3080setup.label.homepage=Setup home page
3081setup.label.integrate=Integration
3082password.reset.title=Password Reset
3083password.reset.button=Password Reset Email
3084password.reset.hint=If you allow users to use the password reset and send function, the system will send the user an SMS code or an email with an encrypted hotlink to allow them to reset their password. If they select to receive an email, you can edit the standard message text here.
3085password.reset.label=Send Email using:
3086password.reset.defaultfrom=default system from address
3087password.reset.fieldfrom=from address from this contact field:
3088password.reset.subject=Subject:
3089password.reset.body=Body:
3090yesno.option.show=Show
3091yesno.option.hide=Hide
3092unify.messaging.label.constant=Type of used communications. Change this value from admin console in the the Setup > KnowledgeBases > [select KB to edit] > Options tab. Allowed values:
3093lowres.ada.frame.attach=List of attachments
3094lowres.ada.frame.htmleditor=Rich text editor
3095lowres.ada.search.field=Field Name
3096lowres.ada.search.oper=Operator
3097lowres.ada.search.pattern=Pattern
3098lowres.ada.tables.gotonext=Go to next table
3099lowres.ada.tables.gotoprev=Go to prev table
3100lowres.home.contacts=Contacts
3101lowres.home.lo=Last Opened Records
3102lowres.home.recentss=Recent Searches
3103lowres.login.wellcome=Welcome to {0}
3104lowres.preferences.tablessearches=Tables,Searches and Reports
3105lowres.preferences.agenda=T=Table, S=Search, R=Report/Chart   
3106lowres.preferences.favorites=Favorites
3107lowres.home.title=Home
3108lowres.nav.back=Back
3109lowres.tables.repchart=Repchart
3110lowres.toolbar.skip=Skip table toolbar and navigation
3111lowres.toolbar.new=New
3112lowres.toolbar.new.with.name=New {0}
3113lowres.toolbar.delete=Delete
3114lowres.toolbar.edit=Edit
3115lowres.toolbar.search=Search
3116lowres.toolbar.options=Options
3117lowres.toolbar.options.hide=Hide options
3118lowres.toolbar.selection=Selections Column
3119lowres.table.body.select=Select record ID {0}
3120lowres.dao.embedded=Click to open {0} table ...
3121lowres.error.dao3.opener=Search window was closed, cannot operate.
3122lowres.error.dao3.select=You have not selected any record to be imported.
3123lowres.error.use.more.options.for.mass.delete=Use 'Options' to delete more than one record
3124lowres.more.options.new.email=New Email
3125lowres.more.options.add.note=Add Note
3126lowres.more.options.copy=Copy
3127lowres.more.options.mass.edit=Mass Edit
3128lowres.more.options.mass.delete=Mass Delete
3129lowres.more.options.cancel=Cancel
3130lowres.no.records.found=No records found
3131lowres.chart.image=Chart
3132lowres.chart.html=HTML
3133lowres.chart.no=This format is not supported for mobile interface, or error occured.
3134lowres.search.all=All saved searches
3135lowres.datacopy.window.title=Copy items
3136lowres.datacopy.confirm.selected=Are you sure you want to copy the selected {0} ({1}s: {2})?
3137lowres.datacopy.confirm.selected.finish=Finish
3138lowres.datacopy.confirm.selected.cancel=Cancel
3139lowres.datacopy.supply.unique.hint=Supply unique values for the required field(s):
3140lowres.datacopy.record.id.label=Record ID
3141lowres.search.status=Search:
3142lowres.search.status.found=record(s) found
3143lowres.search.status.foundnew={0,number,######} record(s), {2,number,#######} pages <a href="javascript:void(0);" onclick="alert('{1}')">Show filter</a>
3144lowres.search.status.foundneweui={0,number,######} record(s) <a href="javascript:void(0);" onclick="alert('{1}')">Show filter</a>
3145lowres.search.status.foundneweui.nosearch={0,number,######} record(s)
3146lowres.search.status.foundnew.about={0,number,######} record(s), {2,number,#######} pages <a href="javascript:void(0);" onclick="alert('{1}')">Show filter</a>. <a href="{3}">Re-count records</a>
3147lowres.search.status.foundnew.toomuch=More than {0,number,######} records found <a href="javascript:void(0);" onclick="alert('{1}')">Show filter</a>. <a href="{3}">Count records</a>
3148lowres.search.status.foundnew.nosearch={0,number,######} record(s), {2,number,#######} pages
3149lowres.search.status.foundnew.about.nosearch={0,number,######} record(s), {2,number,#######} pages. <a href="{3}">Re-count records</a>
3150lowres.search.status.foundnew.toomuch.nosearch=More than {0,number,######} record(s). <a href="{3}">Count records</a>
3151lowres.search.status.linkedto=linked to [{0}]
3152lowres.search.status.zero=No records <a href="javascript:void(0);" onclick="alert('{1}')">Show filter</a>
3153lowres.search.status.zero.nosearch=No records
3154lowres.search.status.summary.null=No data
3155lowres.search.status.summary.function.min=<span class=LRStatusLabel>Minimum of {0}: </span><span class=LRStatusValue>{1}</span>
3156lowres.search.status.summary.function.max=<span class=LRStatusLabel>Maximum of {0}: </span><span class=LRStatusValue>{1}</span>
3157lowres.search.status.summary.function.sum=<span class=LRStatusLabel>Sum of {0}:</span> <span class=LRStatusValue>{1}</span>
3158lowres.search.status.summary.function.avg=<span class=LRStatusLabel>Average of {0}:</span> <span class=LRStatusValue>{1}</span>
3159lowres.search.status.summary.function.formula=<span class=LRStatusLabel>Formula {0}:</span> <span class=LRStatusValue>{1}</span>
3160lowres.record.checker={0} field :
3161lowres.sod.header=Submit Error
3162lowres.login.usual=Go to desktop interface
3163lowres.search.runtime=Run Search
3164hotlinks.keys.notgenerated=Encryption keys are not generated
3165hotlinks.malformed.hotlink=Malformed hotlink : {0}
3166no.license.rest.and.ws.disabled=REST and Web Services programs are disabled without a license, please contact {0} to purchase a license.
3167no.license.rest.and.htmlform.disabled=Embedded Forms require use of a license for the REST API. Please contact {0} to purchase a license.
3168index.creation.in.progress=Index creation in progress, please wait
3169login.example.welcome=Welcome
3170login.example.login=Login:
3171login.example.login.button=Login
3172login.example.password=Password:
3173login.example.windows.authentication=Click <a href="/gui2/sso.jsp?autoLogin=true&project={0}&exiturl={1}&loginurl={1}">here</a> for automatic login with Windows authentication</a>
3174login.example.notes.header=Notes
3175login.example.notes=<li>This page provides a sample front end in standard HTML so you can easily edit it or embed it in your website. In this example, it logs users into the {1} knowledgebase, but you can edit it to log them into your choice of knowledgebase by changing all occurances of the word "{1}".</li> <li>The default administrator login/password is admin/qwerty. It is a good idea to change this password as soon as you login (click the Users tab, then click the edit icon next to the admin user and enter a new password in the admin user record).</li> <li>The very first time that you login, the system may be slow to respond because it has to start up some background processes, but provided the server has at least 2G RAM, it will be much faster the second time.</li> <li>For details on creating hyperlinks/login pages to access SupportWizard, read <a target=admin_guide href="{0}">this</a> Admin Guide section.</li> <li>For security reasons, the default installation does not allow members of the staff or admin groups to be sent passwords via email. You can set which groups may be sent passwords from Setup > Access > Manage Groups, then edit group permissions.</li> <li>Automatic login with Windows authentication uses the Windows login name. To configure it for your server, login as the admin and select Setup > Access > Single Sign-On</li> <li>Click here to <A HREF="/gui2/login.jsp">login to another knowledgebase.</a></li>
3176read.me.page.title=Welcome to {0}
3177read.me.page.preface=This file contains some useful links that will help you get started with your installation.
3178read.me.page.sample.login.page.title=Sample Login Page
3179read.me.page.sample.login.page.p1=A sample custom login page has been created for you and stored <a href="{0}">here</a>. \
3180   We recommend bookmarking this page for quick access.  Below are a few default logins that you can use to see the system from different perspectives:
3181read.me.page.sample.login.page.descr.admin= - the main admin user
3182read.me.page.sample.login.page.descr.chris= - a support staff member
3183read.me.page.sample.login.page.descr.internal= - an internal end user, such as a helpdesk customer
3184read.me.page.sample.login.page.descr.customer= - an external end user, such as a customer
3185read.me.page.sample.login.page.go.to=Go to the login page now
3186read.me.page.ui.title=User Interfaces and Customization
3187read.me.page.ui.preface=There are four different interfaces for {0}.
3188read.me.page.ui.staff=Staff interface - this is the interface used by staff and admin users. Its colors, styles, graphics, and logo are easily customizable \
3189   through the Look and Feel wizard (go to Setup > Look and Feel > Manage Staff Schemes)
3190read.me.page.ui.eui=Basic End User Interface - this is the interface you go to if you login as an end user in the normal staff login block. \
3191    Its logo and colors are defined in the end user look and feel schemes in the Look and Feel Wizard (go to Setup > Look and Feel > Manage End User Schemes). \
3192    This interface changes dynamically based on who is logged in and their group permissions, and requires no setup or maintenance.
3193read.me.page.ui.portal=Custom End User Portal - this interface is fully customizable and is served up through HTML records held in a special table \
3194   in Agiloft called EUI Templates.  To modify the entire look of this interface, you simply edit the different HTML pages stored in the records \
3195  there (Go to Tables > EUI Templates).  This interface uses macros for the different elements of the program, which can be placed on the pages wherever \
3196  you want them.  It is more work to set up this interface and to match it to your own styles, but it provides ultimate flexibility.  We have set up a \
3197  default version for you that is accessed by the second login block on the sample login page.  You can read a \
3198  <a href=http://www.agiloft.com/ew-eui-portal-reference.pdf>PDF Tutorial in how to set up the Custom Portal</a> for more details.
3199read.me.page.ui.low.res= Mobile and ADA compliant interface - this is a clean interface with simplified HTML on each page for faster loading.  \
3200  It is accessed through the login page by selecting the Mobile radio button or by adding the "GUI=LowRes" parameter to any customized login string.  \
3201  It can be customized for each user in the Home > Preferences screen.
3202read.me.page.system.login.page.title=System Login Page
3203read.me.page.system.login.page.p1=There is a system login page that allows you to manage multiple knowledgebases and to access the admin console, \
3204  where some administrative functions, such as setting up backups and licenses, managing knowledgebases, and managing email and debugging are performed.  \
3205  This login screen is located at <a href="/gui2/login.jsp">/gui2/login.jsp</a>.  Once there, select the admin console radio button to go there.  \
3206  The default password for the admin login is qwerty.  It is essential to change this password and to store the new password in a safe place, as it \
3207  is difficult to recover.   <a href="/gui2/login.jsp">/gui2/login.jsp</a>.
3208read.me.page.free.license.title=Free License Request
3209read.me.page.free.license.p1=The admin user can always access the system without any license installed. \
3210  Other users will be unable to access it without a license. \
3211  You can request a free permanent license for 5 staff users and 5 end users for the Free Edition of {0}. Go to  \
3212  Setup > License > Request a new license to manage licenses. \
3213  You can upgrade to the Enterprise edition at any time to provide additional functionality. See \
3214  our <a href=http://www.agiloft.com/feature-comparison.htm target=new>edition comparison</a> for more \
3215  details.<i>Call our sales department at 650-587-8615 x1 to purchase an Enterprise license.</i>
3216read.me.page.tutorials.title=Helpful Tutorials
3217read.me.page.tutorials.p1=We have several tutorials available at our website that help you get started using {0}.  \
3218  Go to <a href="http://www.agiloft.com/tutorials.htm">Tutorials</a>.  We also have several video demos that provide insight into how to get the most \
3219  value out of the system.  Go to our <a href="http://www.agiloft.com/demo-center.htm">Demo Center</a>.
3220read.me.page.other.information.title=Other System Information
3221read.me.page.other.information.p1=Detailed system information, including the database password, can be found in the main {0} configuration file.  \
3222  On Windows servers, this is located in c:/EnterpriseWizardConfig.xml.  On Linux servers, it is located in /etc/EnterpriseWizardConfig.xml.
3223login.sample.page.menu.home=Home
3224login.sample.page.menu.why.us=Why Us
3225login.sample.page.menu.applications=Applications
3226login.sample.page.menu.demos=Demos
3227login.sample.page.menu.resources=Resources
3228login.sample.page.menu.upgrade=Upgrade
3229login.sample.page.menu.welcome.to.the.kb=Welcome to the {0} KB
3230login.sample.page.staff.interface.form.title=Standard Interface
3231login.sample.page.form.element.username=Username
3232login.sample.page.form.element.password=Password
3233login.sample.page.form.element.interface=Interface
3234login.sample.page.form.element.interface.staff=Staff
3235login.sample.page.form.element.interface.mobile=Mobile
3236login.sample.page.self.register.instruction=To self-register as a customer, click \
3237  <a href="/gui2/login.jsp?keyID=0&user=guest&password=Guest22x&loginurl={1}&exiturl={1}&project={0}&State=New:contacts.Customer&GUI=No/EUI&field=hide_btn:true" target="_blank">here</a>, \
3238  then login below.
3239login.sample.page.end.user.portal=End User Portal
3240login.sample.page.login.button=Login
3241email.result.processing=It is being processed now
3242email.result.rejected.limit=The KB {0} has reached the email SENDING and POOLING limits. Email {1} is rejected!
3243email.result.postponed.limit=The KB {0} has reached the email SENDING limit. Email {1} will only be stored to the pool and will be sent within next period!
3244email.result.failed=Sending failed due to a reason: {0}
3245email.result.failed.unknownReason=Sending failed, see logs.
3246email.result.success=Email was sent successfully
3247email.result.reject.sendLimitReason=Limit of re-sending failed message reached; {0}
3248email.result.directexception={0};
3249fields.general.swfilefield.convert=Convert to versioned data type
3250fields.general.swfilefield.convert.hint=Click here if you want to convert to a file format that supports versioning and checkin/checkout functionality.
3251fields.general.swfilefield.convert.warning=Please be aware converting this field to the structure that supports versioning will take about one minute for every thousand attached files. It may also break external integrations using scripts or web services that rely on a specific type of data being available in this field.
3252fields.general.swfilefield.convert.error=
3253constant.productname.label=Product Name
3254constant.productname.description=Name of the product
3255constant.manuallicense.label=Manual License Request URL
3256constant.manuallicense.description=Manual License Request URL
3257constant.casserver.label=CAS Server Login URL
3258constant.casserver.description=CAS Server Login URL
3259constant.casticketvalidator.label= CAS Ticket Validator
3260constant.casticketvalidator.description= CAS Ticket Validator to be used for user authentication. Choose the value depending on the CAS Server version available in your setup.
3261constant.updateEmailHotlinks.label=Update already generated Email hotlinks when accessed by user(s)
3262constant.updateEmailHotlinks.description=This variable should have a value Yes, if you want the system to automatically adapt the email hotlinks for a user based on the current Authentication option of the user. <BR>This field value should be set to Yes, if Single Sign-on option is modified for users after email hotlinks are generated.
3263constant.ssoendpoint.label=SSO Endpoint
3264constant.ssoendpoint.description=SSO Endpoint
3265constant.hotlinktype.label=Hotlink Type
3266constant.hotlinktype.description=Hotlink Type
3267constant.hotlinkroot.label=Hotlink Server Root URL
3268constant.hotlinkroot.description=Hotlink Server Root URL. This is the URL that is prefixed to email hotlinks. It defaults to the URL of the server that the system detects as its host and this is correct in almost all cases. It should only be necessary to set this variable if DNS is mis-configured or if the application is told that it is listening on the wrong port, e.g. HTTP rather than HTTPS or vica-versa.
3269constant.hotlinklength.label=Hotlink Length
3270constant.hotlinklength.description=Hotlink length. It is recomended to have hotlink between 128 and 255. Default length is 128. The maximum length is 255
3271constant.hotlinkage.label=Hotlink Age
3272constant.hotlinkage.description=How long to keep hotlink in the database (in days).
3273constant.linkage.label=Email Marketing's URL Age
3274constant.linkage.description=How long to keep marketing's URL in the database (in days).
3275constant.ocr.pdf.with.text.label=OCR PDF files containing text
3276constant.ocr.pdf.with.text.description=If "No", PDF files which contain any text will be attached to file fields with OCR option without OCR-ing
3277constant.errorurl.label=Error URL
3278constant.errorurl.description=Error URL
3279constant.exiturl.label=Exit URL
3280constant.exiturl.description=Exit URL. This is the default URL that users are taken to when they logout or exit from a hotlink.
3281constant.cancelurl.label=Cancel URL
3282constant.cancelurl.description=Cancel URL. This is the default URL that users are taken to when they Cancel out of a record after logging in through a hotlink.
3283constant.bugreportdestination.label=Bug Reports URL
3284constant.bugreportdestination.description=Server where SoD bugs will be submitted
3285constant.headertext.label=Header Text
3286constant.headertext.description=Text to be shown in header to the left of KB
3287constant.allowedhosts.label=Security:Allowed External Hosts
3288constant.allowedhosts.description=If the constant is set, the system will only allow redirection to URLs at one of the specified hosts and so guard against XLS attacks. Multiple hosts may be specified, delimited by spaces, comma or semi-colons. To allow any host set the constant to *. 
3289constant.maxchatrefresh.label=Chat Refresh Rate
3290constant.maxchatrefresh.description=Sets the maximum frequency at which the chat window can refresh
3291constant.reportfreq.label=Report Frequency
3292constant.reportfreq.description=The minimum number of minutes that can be used in the "Every __ minutes" option
3293constant.matchcookie.label=Security:Check Session Match
3294constant.matchcookie.description=Require matching session and passed cookie. If the session ID does not match the cookie associated with that session when the user first logs in, the connection will be rejected. This guards against a hacker who is able to see the user's browser from manually entering the URL.
3295constant.commdummy.label=Dummy Communications
3296constant.commdummy.description=Create a Communication record if the To or From fields are blank
3297constant.maxemailattach.label=Max Email Attach Size
3298constant.maxemailattach.description=Maximum attachments size for email sending (KB)
3299constant.maxemailbody.label=Max Email Body Size (without attachments)
3300constant.maxemailbody.description=Maximum body size (without attachments) for email sending (KB)
3301constant.inboundperiod.label=Checking frequency for inbound emails (minutes)
3302constant.inboundperiod.description=This variable controls the frequency in minutes with which the mail accounts are checked for inbound emails.
3303constant.inbound.strangereplay.label=Should inbound process replies from other tables 
3304constant.inbound.strangereplay.description=Inbound usually does not process the replies sent from other tables. If this constant is set to Yes each inbound in this table will process strange replies.
3305constant.inbound.dsn.label=Process DSN letters as regular ones in specified inbounds
3306constant.inbound.dsn.description=By default Agiloft rejects all letters sent by MTA as Delivery Status Notification (DSN). This option allows to specify inbounds where all DNS should be processed as regular letters. Format inbound email ends by semicolon, no spaces. For instance a1@inbound.com;a2@inbound.org; 
3307constant.qsstring.label=String Option Behavior
3308constant.qsstring.description=String option behavior for Quick Search
3309constant.maxfilesize2fts.label=Maximum size of file to be fulltext indexed.
3310constant.maxfilesize2fts.description=Dangerous if too high. Maximum size of file to extract text from when creating the full text search index. The value used is the minimum of the values set in the admin console and the KB. If the file size exceeds this value, the first max_file_size_to_fts_index Kilobytes of the file will be indexed with "strings" extracting algorithm (like "strings" unix utility).
3311constant.maxarchivesize2fts.label=Maximum size of archive to be fulltext indexed.
3312constant.maxarchivesize2fts.description=Very dangerous if too high. Maximum size of archive to extract files from for fulltext indexing.
3313constant.maxlargefiles2fts.label=Maximum number of large files attached to a record to be indexed.
3314constant.maxlargefiles2fts.description=Dangerous if too high. Stop fulltext indexing files attached to a record after indexing the specified number of files larger than max_file_size_to_fts_index Kilobytes.
3315constant.ftsresponse.label=FTS Response Time
3316constant.ftsresponse.description=Average FTS response time limit
3317constant.maxconcurentfts.label=Pool size of additional concurrent FTS calls for auto-completion.
3318constant.maxconcurentfts.description=In order to increase auto-completion speed, the requests to RDBMS can be run simultaneously. Every auto completion starts one FTS call and can use shared additional FTS calls from the pool of default size 20. Valid value of pool size is integer form 3 to 1000.
3319constant.cwspoolsize.label=Maximum number of Chinese Word Segmenter objects in the system.
3320constant.cwspoolsize.description=Chinese Word Segmenter sequentially consumes third-party library objects meant for splitting Chinese text without spaces into words. This variable determines the number of CWS processes that can run simultaneously on this server. Enable CWS if you need full-text searching over Chinese words by setting a number between 1-10. A higher values means more resources are used but also speeds up text processing. Setting this to \u20180\u2019 disables CWS on this server.
3321constant.cws.label=Enable Chinese Word Segmenter.
3322constant.cws.description=Chinese Word Segmenter sequentially consumes third-party library objects meant for splitting Chinese text without spaces into words. Set this variable to \u2018Yes\u2019 to enable CWS if you need full-text searching over Chinese words.
3323constant.cwsstartpercent.label=Chinese Text Threshold -- Percentage of Chinese symbols in text before using Chinese Words Segmenter
3324constant.cwsstartpercent.description=Chinese Word Segmenter sequentially consumes third-party library objects meant for splitting Chinese text without spaces into words. By default it is used only if more than 1% of the text is Chinese characters. Set this variable to 0 if you want to use CWS for any text in the system that contains at least one Chinese character.
3325constant.maxnumberoftemptables.label=Maximal number of temporary tables.
3326constant.maxnumberoftemptables.description=Some Agiloft operations require creation of temporary tables. In order to reduce required disk space, the number of temporary tables is restricted by this variable.
3327constant.avoidtemptables.label=Use sub-selects rather than temp tables
3328constant.avoidtemptables.description=If set to Yes, the system will use subselects rather than temporary tables to display the results of related table filters and linked field multi value filters.
3329constant.forceavoidtemptables.label=Force use sub-selects rather than temp tables for complex filters.
3330constant.forceavoidtemptables.description=If this variable is set to Yes, the system will always avoid using temporary tables and will use sub-selects instead.
3331constant.hotkeys.label=Enable Hotkeys
3332constant.hotkeys.description=Enable Hotkeys
3333constant.sodlogs.label=Security:Include Jboss Logs to SoD
3334constant.sodlogs.description=Include Jboss Logs to SoD. If set to Yes, the JBoss log files are included with the information dumped to the ticket following a program error. Generally this is just an error dialog, but in deference to another well known software supplier, it is refered to as SoD or Screen of Death. JBoss log files may contain data about other KBs on the server, so this variable should be set to No on high security servers or servers with with multiple KBs
3335constant.excelmaxexport.label=Maximum XLS Size To Export
3336constant.excelmaxexport.description=Maximum size of the excel(.xls/.xlsx) file to export (MB), larger exports are truncated. Excel files are loaded in memory during creation so setting a very large number can cause an Out of Memory error that crashes the system.
3337constant.excelmaximport.label=Maximum XLS Size To Import
3338constant.excelmaximport.description=Maximum size of the excel(.xls/.xlsx) file to import(MB). Excel files are loaded in memory during import so setting a very large number can cause an Out of Memory error that crashes the system.
3339constant.reportmaxsize.label=Maximum Report Size
3340constant.reportmaxsize.description=Maximum report size (MB). This value should not be set too large or it can cause an Out of Memory error.
3341constant.dbupdatewarn.label=Display Database Update Warning
3342constant.dbupdatewarn.description=Defines behavior at record finishing if its data was changed in the background during editing. If Yes, then changed at KB fields will override user's input and record will return to editing. If No - then new data from KB will override manually entered one and record will be saved as usual.
3343constant.time_based_rule_script_timeout.label=Timeout: Script timeout
3344constant.time_based_rule_script_timeout.description=Interrupt time-based rule when script action is working for more than X seconds
3345constant.defaultlanguage.label=Default language
3346constant.defaultlanguage.description=Defines default language if the user's Language is not known
3347constant.list.existing=Customized Variables
3348constant.list.available=Variables with Default Values
3349constant.registry.any=Any well-formed value
3350constant.registry.name=Name
3351constant.registry.label=Label
3352constant.registry.description=Description
3353constant.registry.type=Type
3354constant.registry.units=Units
3355constant.registry.allowed=Allowed Values
3356constant.registry.default=Default Value
3357constant.alreadypresent=Already Present
3358constant.registry.add=Add
3359constant.messagerfc822.label=Treat message/rfc822 email parts as attachments
3360constant.messagerfc822.description=Set this variable to Yes to treat Content-Type: message/rfc822 parts as attachments when processing inbound emails. If set to No, merge the message/rfc822 content with the main email body.
3361constant.dateformatorder.label=Default day/month order for date/time strings
3362constant.dateformatorder.description=Choose how the system will parse date/time strings during record import, email parsing, and web services calls. Allowed values: <br/>LOCALE \u2013 Parse day/month order for dates based on user's locale during login or REST calls.<br/>DMY \u2013 Parse dates in Day, Month, Year order.<br/>MDY \u2013 Parse dates in Month, Day, Year order.<br/>If the system detects date strings that do not fit the specified format, it will automatically switch from day/month to month/day parsing as needed.
3363constant.web_tracking_entry.label=Web Tracking Entry URL
3364constant.web_tracking_entry.description=Location of special page on web site is used as entry point (auto registering users for web tracking).
3365constant.maxnestedactions.label=Maximum Nested Calls
3366constant.maxnestedactions.description=Maximum number of nested calls in conditional actions
3367constant.actionbuttonedits.label=Action Button Edits
3368constant.actionbuttonedits.description=Allow specific action buttons permissions in the table wizard
3369constant.backupactive.label=Backup Active KBs Only
3370constant.backupactive.description=KBs are only backed up if someone has logged into the KB during the past 24 hours
3371constant.maxconcurrentbackups.label=Maximum Concurrent Backups
3372constant.maxconcurrentbackups.description=Maximum number of simultaneously running backups allowed
3373constant.maxhistoryrecordsread.label=Max History Read Size
3374constant.maxhistoryrecordsread.description=History field will include only last N records when displayed as string
3375constant.max_amount_of_user_emails_per_time.label=Max amount of unique user emails generated per time.
3376constant.max_amount_of_user_emails_per_time.description=In case of senting a letter to a huge amount of unique recipients this constant determines how many unique user emails could be generated during one transaction. All remained recipients will be processed in next time (usuallu about 1 minutes later). 
3377constant.revindexoptlimit.label=Revindex Optimization Period
3378constant.revindexoptlimit.description=Revindex optimization allowable period (hours). This variable defines the time of day when the full text search indexes are automatically optimized. For example, a value of "22-05" means between 10pm and 5am.
3379constant.analyzelimit.label=Analyze Tables Period
3380constant.analyzelimit.description=Analyze tables allowable period (hours). This variable defines the time of day when the tables at the project are automatically analyzed at first quiet period. For example, a value of "23-04" means between 11pm and 4am.
3381constant.analyzefreq.label=Analyze Table Frequency
3382constant.analyzefreq.description=How often to analyze table requests placed into queue.
3383constant.analyzeprotectioninactivityseconds.label=Analyze table start protection period of system inactivity.
3384constant.analyzeprotectioninactivitySeconds.description=Analyze table will wait this amount of seconds of system inactivity before start.
3385constant.revindexthreadlimit.label=Revindex Threads Limit
3386constant.revindexthreadlimit.description=Revindex threads limit
3387constant.sodsigar.label=Security:Collect System Data on Error
3388constant.sodsigar.description=This controls whether or not to collect system data such as the OS version on SoD submission. For optimum security, the recommended value is the default of No.
3389constant.stafftitle.label=Staff Title
3390constant.stafftitle.description=Staff Title. This text is shown in the browser title at top left of the screen.
3391constant.loginurl.label=Login URL
3392constant.loginurl.description=Default login URL used on login failure
3393constant.maxcollength.label=Maximum Column Length
3394constant.maxcollength.description=The system does a substring on longvarchar columns in retrievers because we don't need all its content to be displayed in an HTML report when we have a view with width=70 characters only. By changing this constant users can override that behaviour by setting a strict limit on substring. This only has an effect when that limit is higher than the one calculated from a view width, e.g. if view width is set to 2 rows * 70 characters, we use max($max_column_length_per_row, 2*70). If the constant is set to non-integer value, we turn off substring mode completely and use full column's value.
3395constant.rulemaxlimit.label=Max Rule Records Limit
3396constant.rulemaxlimit.description=If a rule matches more than X records only run it on the first X records
3397constant.rulemaxwarn.label=Max Rule Records Warning
3398constant.rulemaxwarn.description=Issue a warning when a rule matches more than X records
3399constant.showstacktrace.label=Security:Show Stack Trace on SoD
3400constant.showstacktrace.description=Show stack trace button on SoD screen. For added security, this should be set to No to prevent users from seeing the stack trace information.
3401constant.lockexpiration.label=Timeout:Record Lock Expiration Time
3402constant.lockexpiration.description=Timeout for user-level record locking. This is the number of minutes after which a lock will be freed automatically. For example, if a user opens a record for edit and then leaves for the day. It should not be set to a value smaller than the maximum time that users may take edit a record.
3403constant.endusertitle.label=Enduser Title
3404constant.endusertitle.description=Enduser Title
3405constant.histlimit.label=Max History Size
3406constant.histlimit.description=If more than the specified number of changes are made to a record by timer-based background rules, then any additional changes do not create History records. The update is still valid, but is not reflected in History.<br>This prevents the KB from growing huge and exhausting disk space because of a mis-configured rule that frequently updates records.<br>If the variable is set to -1 or any negative number, it is ignored and an unlimited number of History entries may be created by background rules.
3407constant.maxtimerrules.label=Max Timer Rules per KB
3408constant.datetimedisplay.label=Time Zone of date/time values
3409constant.datetimedisplay.description=The Time Zone that is used to display date/time values
3410constant.timezonelabel.label=Displaying Time Zone Label next to field
3411constant.timezonelabel.description=Specify when you would like to see Time Zone Label next to field
3412constant.maxtimerrules.description=Maximum number of concurrently running timer and summary based rules per project. If you only have one KB on the server, it is probably optimum to set this to a value between 3 and 6, for example 5. If you set it to a lower value, all the timer based rules will still run, but they will run in sequence, rather than running up to 5 in parallel. Do not set it to a very high value or the occasional spike of timer-based rules will eat up so many resources that interactive performance suffers.
3413constant.autocompletion.label=Text auto completion
3414constant.autocompletion.description=Allow text auto completion
3415constant.oldfilenewmenuitemenabled.label=Enabled Non-versioned File and Image Fields
3416constant.oldfilenewmenuitemenabled.description=Indicate if non-versioned file and image fields should be allowed to be created
3417constant.shortproductname.label=Product Short Name
3418constant.shortproductname.description=A short name for the product
3419constant.productsite.label=Product website
3420constant.productsite.description=This variable defines the value that appears in the Help manual for references to the URL of the product website. It can be set to any URL.
3421constants.maxlfrecordscachedforquicksearch.label=Maximum Number of External Records to Cache
3422constants.maxlfrecordscachedforquicksearch.description=The maximum number of external linked fields record to cache for fast search
3423constant.wsdelay.label=Web Services Delay
3424constant.wsdelay.description=A delay to be introduced after each web services call. A delay of a couple of seconds prevents a mis-configured Web Services or REST program from swamping the server.
3425constant.ws.verbose.messages.label=Security:Web Services Verbose Errors
3426constant.ws.verbose.messages.description=When set to "YES" makes SOAP and REST calls produce verbose error messages for debugging purposes. Keep set to "NO" in production environments.
3427constant.ws.anti.sql.injection.label=Security:Web Services Anti SQL Injection
3428constant.ws.anti.sql.injection.description=When set to "YES" enables anti SQL injection features.
3429constant.disconnecttimeout.label=Timeout:Disconnect Due to Inactivity
3430constant.disconnecttimeout.description=The number of minutes a user can be idle before he/she is automatically disconnected.
3431constant.warningtimeout.label=Timeout:Warning Period
3432constant.warningtimeout.description=The number of minutes warning that a user is given before automatically disconnected due to inactivity. If a disconnect timeout is 30 and the warning timeout is 10, a user will be notified after being idle 20 mins and will be disconnected in another 10 mins (i.e. total 30 mins being idle)
3433constant.seanceoverridetimeout.label=Timeout:Overriden Seance Expiration Period
3434constant.seanceoverridetimeout.description=The number of minutes after which an overriden (internal) seance is timed out. It is strongly recommended that you do not change this variable unless explicitly asked to do so by product support staff.
3435constant.trustedzones.label=Security:Trusted Zones
3436constant.trustedzones.description=In order to protect user data from malicious attacks (XSS, XSRF etc.) you can specify addresses of net resources on which HTML codes in the system can refer - hyperlinks, images, embedded objects etc. Please separate multiple values with comma or CR character.<br>Examples:<ul><li><span class=SIItalicMark>*.agiloft.com, /</span>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Users can refer to agiloft.com domain, its subdomains and the server host (withough defining its name)<li><span class=SIItalicMark>*, /</span>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Users can refer to any domain in the net and the server host<li><span class=SIItalicMark>/</span>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;only references to the current host are enabled (e.g. /home.jsp)<li><span class=SIItalicMark>empty</span>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;references to net resources are disabled</ul>
3437constant.widgetscripts.label=Security:Allow scripts in home page widgets
3438constant.widgetscripts.description=In order to protect users from malicious attacks (XSS, XSRF etc.) you can disable scripting in widgets on the home page so only safe HTML is allowed.
3439constant.tablesearchtimeout.label=Timeout:Table Search Time
3440constant.tablesearchtimeout.description=Defines the maximum time that can be spent searching a single table using "Search All Tables" functionality before the search is cancelled.
3441constant.recordupdatetimeout.label=Timeout:Record Update Time
3442constant.recordupdatetimeout.description=Defines the maximum time in seconds that can be spent on record creation/update at the server. If an update takes longer than the specified amount of time, the transaction fails and is rolled back.
3443constant.lfauto.label=LF Auto Display Type Limit
3444constant.lfauto.description=Specifies the limit for the number of linked source field records that will be displayed as a list when display type is Auto; when exceeded, an input box with lookup will be displayed instead of a list.
3445constant.lflist.label=LF List Maximum Size
3446constant.lflist.description=Specifies the limit for the number of linked source field records that will be displayed as a list when display type is List of values; when exceeded, an input box with lookup will be displayed instead of a list.
3447constant.lfpropagationdelay.label=LF Propagation Delay
3448constant.lfpropagationdelay.description=Specifies the delay in milliseconds before asynchronous propagation gets triggered
3449constant.externalperllocation.label=Location of external Perl directory
3450constant.externalperllocation.description=You can use your own Perl distribution with scripts, rather than the default distribution by setting this variable to the location of the preferred perl.exe. For example, you might set it c:\\Perl64\\bin
3451constant.externalpythonlocation.label=Location of external Python directory
3452constant.externalpythonlocation.description=You can use your own Python distribution with scripts, rather than the default distribution by setting this variable to the location of the preferred python.exe. For example, you might set it c:\\Python34
3453constant.preferfatindex.label=Prefer fat, rather than thin indexes.
3454constant.preferfatindex.description=For MySQL only. If there are more than one suited covering index, prefer to use fat (faster, but more memory), rather than thin (less memory, but little slower) index.
3455constant.useindex.label=Prefer USE INDEX hint, rather than no hints.
3456constant.useindex.description=For MySQL only. If optimizer founds covering index, forces it rather then letting MySQL to choose it.
3457constant.embeddedsearchresult.label=Embedded Search Results
3458constant.embeddedsearchresult.description=This controls what algorithm is used to sort embedded search results.<br>Possible values are "One Step", "Two Step", "Base on View" or a number between 0 and 10000 (Based on Embedded_Search_Results_Size variable). If the variable is not set or is set to an invalid value, it will be treated as "Base on View".<br>"One Step" specifies that a standard database select should always be used to obtain the sorted results.<br>"Two Step" specifies that the sorted results should always be obtained by first selecting the results and then sorting them. This can be much faster than the One Step approach if the number of results is less than 500, but may be very slow if the number is large.<br>"Base on View" specifies that the One Step or Two Step approach is dynamically selected, depending upon whether the number of results obtained is more or less than the number in the view.<br>A number specifies that the One Step or Two Step approach is dynamically selected, depending upon whether the number of results obtained is more or less than the specified number.
3459constant.embeddedsearchresultsize.label=Embedded Search Results Size
3460constant.embeddedsearchresultsize.description=This controls records size (see Embedded Search Results variable description)
3461constant.max_text_field_size_in_db.label=Maximum Text Field Size in the Database
3462constant.max_text_field_size_in_db.description=Maximum number of characters to attempt to store in the database text fields when serializing complex structures
3463stuckThreadDetectionValve.notifyStuckThreadDetected=Thread "{0}" has been active for {1} milliseconds
3464constant.loginless.label=Use loginless user during email processing
3465constant.loginless.description=If user has no login email processing usually uses default user's credentials and information (specified in the inbound settings), Enable this variable allows to use it for create/update ticket keeping permissions of default user. Note at current moment it is not possible to use loginless user for versioned attachments processing.
3466constant.checkip.label=Security:Check client IP
3467constant.checkip.description=Check that requests are from the same IP the session was started. If set to Yes, the system checks that all requests originate from the same IP from which the session was initiated. This helps prevent a hacker who can see the URL/session ID on your PC from initiating a session on another machine. It is not as secure as Security:Check Session Match because if both PC's are accessing the server through the same NAT or Proxy servers, their IP's will appear to be the same. Please note that this feature will cause the user to be logged out if they access the system from an ISP or through a gateway that assigns a dynamically changing IP address.
3468constant.informative_password_messages.label=Security:Informative Password Messages
3469constant.informative_password_messages.description=If set to YES, diagnostic messages in password-related functions may contain account name (not recommended because of low security)
3470constant.ResetPasswordErrorMessage.label=Security:Custom message for "Reset Password" error
3471constant.ResetPasswordErrorMessage.description=If "Security:Informative Password Messages" set to "YES" it is possible to display custom error message if any error occurs during password reset
3472constant.AggressiveDSRelease.label=Aggressive Data Sessions Releasing
3473constant.AggressiveDSRelease.description=This is an experimental feature that reduces memory use during intense loads, please leave the value set to No on production systems.
3474constant.rest.ip.blacklist.label=Security:REST IP Blacklist
3475constant.rest.ip.whitelist.label=Security:REST IP Whitelist
3476constant.soap.ip.blacklist.label=Security:SOAP IP Blacklist
3477constant.soap.ip.whitelist.label=Security:SOAP IP Whitelist
3478constant.rest.ip.blacklist.description=Blacklist of IP Addresses applicable to access via REST interface. Server-wide settings take precedence over the project ones. If values are set for REST IP Whitelist and SOAP IP Whitelist, it is generally not necessary to set values for REST IP Blacklist or SOAP IP Blacklist. However, these are useful if you allow API access from a constantly changing set of IP addresses that do not live within well-defined ranges and want to block access from other ranges, such as those of foreign countries.
3479constant.rest.ip.whitelist.description=Whitelist of IP Addresses applicable to access via REST interface. Project settings take precedence over the server-wide ones. If a whitelist is set, all other IP's are automatically blocked. IPv4 and IPv6 comma separated IP's and IP ranges may be entered<br><br>Example: 10.168.6.102, 10.169.7.132-10.169.7.150
3480constant.soap.ip.blacklist.description=Blacklist of IP Addresses applicable to access via SOAP interface. Server-wide settings take precedence over project settings.
3481constant.soap.ip.whitelist.description=Whitelist of IP Addresses applicable to access via SOAP interface. Project settings take precedence over server-wide settings.
3482constant.warn.lock.timeout.label=Timeout:Warn Record Lock Expires
3483constant.warn.lock.timeout.description=Define the number of minutes in advance of the record lock timeout to notify users that their lock is about to expire. A zero value will provide no warning.
3484constant.rule_records_per_transaction.label=Records per Transaction
3485constant.rule_records_per_transaction.description=Time-based/summary rules process records in multiple consecutive transactions
3486constant.save_gui_performance_data.label=Save Performance Data
3487constant.save_gui_performance_data.description=This variable controls whether performance data is saved
3488constant.smtp.broken.label=How many minutes to wait before resending failed letters
3489constant.smtp.broken.description=Frequency of resending letters that failed due to SMTP connection, in minutes
3490constant.smtp.broken.limit.label=Do not resend old letters
3491constant.smtp.broken.limit.description=Do not resend failed letters older than N days
3492constant.retain_gui_performance_data.label=Retain Performance Data Period
3493constant.retain_gui_performance_data.description=This variable controls for how many days GUI performance data is retained and has a default value of 7. It is only applicable if the variable Save Performance Data equals Yes
3494constants.Hosts_Allowed_To_Send_Bomgar_Events.description=Comma separated list of Bomgar Host Names or IP Addresses that are authorized to send Session events to Agiloft.
3495constants.Hosts_Allowed_To_Send_Bomgar_Events.label=Bomgar Host Names or IP Addresses
3496constants.show_kb_names.label=Security:Show KB Names
3497constants.show_kb_names.description=This variable controls whether generic login page shows dropdown with KB names
3498x509auth.main.x509AuthEnabled.hint=These options controls access using Common Access Card, otherwise known as CAC, or X.509 authentication.
3499skypeSetup.main.skypeEnabled.hint=This option controls Agiloft integration with Skype
3500skypeSetup.main.skypeEnabled.caption=Enable integration with Skype
3501skype4BSetup.main.skypeEnabled.hint=This option controls Agiloft integration with Skype for Business
3502skype4BSetup.main.skypeEnabled.caption=Enable integration with Skype for Business
3503skype4BSetup.main.clientid.hint=Client ID of your Skype for Business application (GUID obtained from Azure app registration).
3504skype4BSetup.main.clientid.label=Client ID
3505skype4B.incoming.chat.confirmation.part1=Accept
3506skype4B.incoming.chat.confirmation.part2=&nbspincoming chat invitation?
3507skype4B.incoming.chat.title=Chat with {0}
3508skypeSetup.main.incomingCallsGroups.hint=The option allows the specified groups to receive Skype incoming calls.
3509skype4BSetup.main.incomingCallsGroups.hint=The option allows the specified groups to receive Skype incoming calls.
3510skypeSetup.main.incomingCallsGroups.label=Allowed groups
3511skypeSetup.main.outgoingCallsGroups.hint=The option allows the specified groups to make Skype calls.
3512skype4BSetup.main.outgoingCallsGroups.hint=The option allows the specified groups to make Skype calls.
3513skypeSetup.main.outgoingCallsGroups.label=Allowed groups
3514skype.contacts.notfound=There is no user with skype login &quot;{0}&quot;
3515skype.contacts.notfound.create=Create {0}
3516skype.javaplugin.notinstalled=Skype integration will not work because Java plugin is not installed or configured. Please install it from <br><a href="http://www.java.com/en/download/index.jsp" target="_blank">http://www.java.com/en/download/index.jsp</a>
3517skype.skype.notinstalled=Skype integration will not work because Skype client is not installed.
3518skype.skype.notrunning=Skype integration will not work because Skype client is not running.
3519x509auth.main.x509AuthEnabled.caption=Enable CAC (X.509) authentication
3520x509auth.main.inAdditionToOtherAuthForms.hint=The first option requires that the specified groups use CAC and another form of authentication such as login/password or (if enabled) SSO via LDAP
3521x509auth.main.inAdditionToOtherAuthForms.caption=In addition to other forms of authentication
3522x509auth.main.standaloneAuthForm.hint=The second option requires that the specified groups use CAC authentication, but not does require that they also use another form of authentication
3523x509auth.main.standaloneAuthForm.caption=As a stand-alone form of authentication
3524x509auth.main.alternativeToOtherAuthForms.hint=The third option allows the specified groups  to use CAC or another form of authentication.
3525x509auth.main.alternativeToOtherAuthForms.caption=As an alternative to other forms of authentication
3526x509auth.main.groups=For the following groups:
3527x509auth.main.groups.intersected=<li>Group {0} is selected to use CAC as both \u201C{1}\u201D and \u201C{2}\u201D. Please de-select the group from one of these options.
3528x509auth.certs.error.not.found=Authentication failed: client X.509 certificate not found
3529x509auth.login.not.allowed={0} membership does not allow login
3530question.wizard.title=Create/edit Question
3531question.wizard.question.hint=Enter question text
3532question.wizard.question.label=Question Text
3533question.wizard.domain.hint=Select answer type
3534question.wizard.domain.hint.label=Answer Type
3535question.wizard.description.label=Internal Notes
3536question.wizard.description.hint=Internal notes allow you to specify that a question is used by more than one Survey or to provide other useful information to staff users when they are defining Surveys. They are not seen by the end users of the Survey.
3537question.duplicate.field=A question with field name = '{0}' already exist
3538question.duplicate.textcomment=A question with same Question Text and Internal Notes already exists.
3539survey.default.hint=This option controls which Survey will be used to form the set of questions.<br><br>Generally only one Survey should be matched, but if several are found, the first in the list will be used.
3540survey.default.label=Default Survey
3541survey.default.in=Survey defined in
3542survey.default.at=at field
3543survey.default.ss=which matches SS
3544survey.default.of=of current record.
3545survey.default.table=Select Table
3546survey.default.column=Select Field
3547survey.default.needtable=Please select table from list
3548survey.default.needcolumn=Please select field from list
3549survey.default.needrecord=Please select record using lookup tool
3550survey.default.needsearch=Please select saved search from list or create new one
3551survey.default.text=Record: {0}
3552survey.duplicate.prefix=Survey prefix '{0}' is already used at column {1}
3553survey.changed.prefix=Survey prefix shouldn't be changed (from '{0}' to '{1}')
3554survey.popup.search1=Search table
3555survey.popup.search2=where field
3556survey.popup.search3=matches current one.
3557survey.popup.view1=Use
3558survey.popup.view2=to display items for import
3559survey.popup.view3=Put
3560survey.popup.view4=from selected record into
3561survey.popup.view5=in current record.
3562survey.popup.view6=Display mismatch warning to user
3563question.field.button=Edit Question
3564survey.field.button=Edit Survey
3565survey.wizard.title=Create/edit Survey
3566survey.wizard.label=Survey Label
3567survey.wizard.source=Questions source
3568survey.wizard.qlist.available=Available Questions
3569survey.wizard.qlist.used=Used Questions
3570survey.wizard.qlist.moveup=Move Up
3571survey.wizard.qlist.movedown=Move Down
3572survey.wizard.qlist.reqired=Change Required
3573survey.wizard.qlist.visible=Change Visible
3574survey.wizard.qlist.exclude=Exclude
3575survey.wizard.visibility.label1=Make the visibility of this question conditional:
3576survey.wizard.visibility.label2=Only show this question if answer to the question
3577survey.wizard.visibility.label3=contains one of these values: 
3578survey.wizard.require.label1=Make the question required:
3579question.wizard.choicetable.hint=You can populate this question with values from an existing choice list. If none of the available choice lists meet your needs, create a new set of values by clicking <span class=SIBoldMark>Create Choice List</span>.
3580question.wizard.name.hint=If you want to search among answers to this question, give it a unique name that will be used in search dialog; otherwise leave this field empty. Note: Making too many questions searchable may slow down the system.
3581question.wizard.name.label=Name
3582survey.wizard.prefix.hint=Enter up to 10 characters of prefix text that will appear in the field names of answers that can be searched.
3583survey.wizard.prefix.label=Answers Fields Prefix
3584survey.control.loadfrom.label=Load from {0}...
3585survey.control.loadfrom.error.record=Record not found!
3586survey.control.loadfrom.error.spvalue=Survey Presentation is not found in the record.
3587survey.control.loadfrom.error.spcolumn=No requested SurveyPresentation field was found in import table.
3588survey.control.loadfrom.error.sptable=No requested import table was found.
3589survey.control.reset.label=Reset
3590survey.control.reset.hint=Reset questions set to latest version
3591survey.control.loadfrom.warning1=The list of questions has changed. Please review your answers
3592survey.control.loadfrom.warning2=Cannot load answers from different survey
3593survey.control.wrapquestion.hint=Wrap questions text after the specified length (in chars).
3594survey.control.wrapquestion.label=Wrap questions
3595survey.error.question.absent=Can't find question source for the survey.
3596diff.error=Unexpected error during diff: {0}
3597hotlink.error.url=Cannot use URL {0} because this domain name is not included in the  global variable 'Allowed External Hosts'. Please add the domain to this variable.
3598hotlink.expired.url=Hotlink has expired.
3599licenses.preview.closewindow=Close Window
3600licenses.usage.state.active=Active
3601licenses.usage.state.terminated=Terminated
3602licenses.status.free=Inactive, because free license is installed
3603licenses.status.paid=Inactive, because paid license is installed
3604licenses.status.english=Inactive, because KB {0} contains too many English text entries.<br><br>In order to use the free language license, you must start with a knowledgebase (KB) that is in pure {1}<br><br>If you just installed, please uninstall, then re-install and choose {1} at the first step of the installer. Alternately, you can import the sample KB from {2}, then login and and request a free license from Setup > License > Request a New License.<br><br>If you installed previously and have added English labels/choices/etc, you need to replace them. Please <a href="#" onclick="{3}">click here</a> to see a report of the English text
3605licenses.status.name=Inactive, because KB name in license ("{0}") does not match name of KB where license is installed ("{1}")
3606licenses.status.activekbs={0} Active, {1} license(s) are used, {2} are terminated
3607licenses.language.all=All
3608licenses.status.activelang=Active, language :{0}
3609licenses.status.active=Active, {0} license(s) are used, {1} are still available, {2} are terminated
3610licenses.status.unlimited=Active, unlimited licenses available
3611licenses.status.kb= (for KB "{0}" only)
3612licenses.status.invalid=Inactive, because the license string is invalid. It does not match the encrypted string that is expected for this combination of Start date, End date, Quantity, IP Address, Version Number and Knowledgebase
3613licenses.status.version=Inactive, because the Version Number ("{0}") in the license is earlier than the {2} version number ("{1}")
3614licenses.status.ip=Inactive, because the IP address in the license ("{0}") does not match the IP address by which you accessed this machine ("{1}")
3615licenses.status.host=Inactive, because the host name in the license ("{0}") does not match the host name by which you accessed this machine ("{1}")
3616licenses.status.expired=Inactive, because the license has expired
3617licenses.status.nolicense=No license available for IP {0}, KB {1}
3618licenses.status.nolanguage=No Language/Enterprise license available for IP {0}, KB {1}
3619licenses.status.nofreelanguage=Free language license is disabled as KB {0} contains wrong NLS data
3620licenses.status.wrongfreelanguage=No available license. However, you have a license for use of the product in {0} so if you select {0}, you will be able to login. There is a sample login page that specifies {0} at <a href="http://www.agiloft.com/{1}/custom_login.htm" target="_blank">www.agiloft.com/{1}/custom_login.htm</a>. Please download this page and edit it to specify your KB_NAME and SERVER_NAME, then use this page to login.
3621chat.no.answer=No answer, timeout expired
3622fields.action.print=Print Field Documentation
3623fields.action.print.all=Print Fields for all Tables
3624fields.action.import=Import Admin Notes
3625fields.print.header=Include the following information:
3626fields.print.dbname=Field DB Name
3627fields.print.default=Default
3628fields.print.max=Maximum Size
3629fields.print.options=Required/Dependent/Unique
3630fields.print.layouts=Layouts
3631fields.print.sort=Sort fields by:
3632fields.print.include=Include fields:
3633fields.print.include.marked=Marked to Include in field documentation
3634fields.print.include.all=All fields
3635fields.print.format=Format for output:
3636fields.print.dao.multiple=Allow multiple values:
3637fields.print.record=Record:
3638fields.print.creatordefault=User who created record
3639fields.print.changedefault=User who last edits record
3640fields.print.version=Version
3641fields.print.history=History
3642fields.calcresult.formula.hint=Use the Formula Help to define the formula you wish to apply to the field.
3643fields.calcresult.round.hint=Choose whether to limit the number of decimal places held in the field, if any.   If you set the field to round to a number of digits, the result of the calculation will be automatically rounded to the specified number of digits.  It is the rounded value that will be held in the database.  Go to the Display Dialog to set how decimals are displayed.
3644fields.calcresult.recalc.hint=If you want the value in your output fields to be automatically calculated whenever the fields being used for the calculations are changed, select the first option.  </br>Note that this may not be desirable, for instance if you are calculating a billable amount based on an employee's billable rate and the linked fields holding that value are updated.  In that case, you may not want existing billing records to be updated when an employee's billable rate changes. </br>Choosing the second option prevents the system from overwriting the field once it has a value.
3645fields.calcresult.recalc.auto=Automatically update the calculation if field values change
3646fields.calcresult.recalc.none=Never recalculate automatically once the calculation field has a value
3647fields.calcresult.null.hint=If the formula fields have a null value, you can define whether the calculated field should be given any value or not.
3648fields.calcresult.null.label=Null value handling
3649fields.calcresult.null.zero=Treat null values as 0
3650fields.calcresult.null.none=Do not calculate until all fields have a non-null value
3651fields.calcresult.ignoreerror.hint=Define how you want to handle any errors in formula calculation (for example caused by invalid conditions such as divide by 0)
3652fields.calcresult.ignoreerror.donotignore=Show error message and prevent record saving
3653fields.calcresult.ignoreerror.ignore=Ignore error and set zero value for field with the invalid condition
3654fields.calcresult.currency.label=Currency or percentage symbol
3655fields.calcresult.emptyformula.error=Please enter a formula text
3656fields.creditcard.notselected.error=Please complete options settings for the field
3657actionbar.tab.general=General
3658actionbar.general.label.hint=This label is used to refer to the Action Bar and is seen by system administrators in setup screens.
3659actionbar.general.label.label=Action Bar Label
3660actionbar.general.name.hint=Specify a short unique name. It is used to refer to this action bar in customer EUI template.
3661actionbar.general.name.label=Action Bar Name
3662actionbar.general.name.nonunique=an Action Bar with name {0} already exisits for the table. Please provide a unique name.
3663actionbar.general.description.hint=Provide a description to identify the use of this action bar
3664actionbar.general.description.label=Description
3665actionbar.tab.design=Design
3666actionbar.objecttype.label=Type of Action
3667actionbar.design.help=The vertical main level items in the right pane represent the top level horizontal items on the action bar. Use the Add and Remove buttons to move items to and from the right pane.  Use Type of Action to switch the left pane list of available actions between system actions and action button actions.<br>A plus sign indicates that a main level item has a submenu.  Click on the plus sign to display the submenu.  Drag and drop a menu or submenu item to change its menu location.<br>Click New Menu to create a new menu item.  To make it a submenu item, once it has been created, drag it to the menu item and drop it.<br>Select an item on the right and click Edit to edit its display characteristics.
3668actionbar.objecttype.system=System Menu Item
3669actionbar.objecttype.action=Action Button Item
3670actionbar.btn.add=Add >
3671actionbar.btn.remove=< Remove
3672actionbar.btn.edit=Edit
3673actionbar.btn.sep=Separator >
3674actionbar.btn.rowsep=Row Separator >
3675actionbar.btn.menu=New Menu Item
3676actionbar.dlg.editmenu=Edit Menu
3677actionbar.dlg.editmenu.text=Menu Text
3678actionbar.dlg.noicon=No icon
3679actionbar.dlg.icon=Icon
3680actionbar.dlg.icon.change=Change
3681actionbar.dlg.display=Display
3682actionbar.dlg.display.texticon=Text and icon
3683actionbar.dlg.display.textonly=Text only
3684actionbar.dlg.display.icononly=Icon only
3685actionbar.dlg.editoperation=Edit Action
3686actionbar.dlg.editoperation.text=Action Text
3687actionbar.dlg.editoperation.default=Default for action [&nbsp;$1&nbsp;]
3688actionbar.runaction.warn=You have selected $count records on which to run this action.
3689actionbar.runaction.run=Run the Action
3690actionbar.runaction.title=Action Button Mass Execution
3691actionbar.runaction.statussingle=Action run on record id $record.
3692actionbar.runaction.success=Successfully completed
3693actionbar.runaction.fail=Unsuccessful, not completed
3694actionbar.runaction.break=Break
3695actionbar.runaction.interrupted=Execution was interrupted.
3696actionbar.runaction.completed=Execution completed
3697actionbar.apply.hint=Specify the teams for which this Action Bar is the default for their main table view.   Other table views, such as related tables, embedded searches, or links to selected fields with multiple values enabled, may have different Action Bars specified for their display.  Those action bars are specified in the field definitions.<br><br>If a team currently using this Action Bar as its default is removed from this setting, the table's Default Action Bar will become the new default for that team.
3698actionbar.apply.label=Make this main table default Action Bar for:
3699actionbar.apply.forteam=Action Bar is the default for teams
3700actionbar.removed=Action Bar {0} was successfully deleted.
3701actionbar.removedefault=The Default Action Bar can not be deleted.
3702actionbar.apply.warn=You are removing this Action Bars as the default for teams $1. The table default Action Bar will be used for these teams now.
3703record.newwindow=In new window
3704record.loading=Data is still loading on the other tabs, please try again in a few seconds.
3705views.iconcolumn.define=Define Notification Icons
3706views.iconcolumn.columnsselecttab=Fields
3707views.iconcolumn.iconsselecttab=Icons
3708views.iconcolumn.nochoices=Please describe here a message.
3709views.iconcolumn.noicon=No Icon
3710views.iconcolumn.alttext=Alt Text
3711views.iconcolumn.helpline=Icons can be defined to visually represent the value of one or more choice fields and will be displayed at the start of the row.
3712views.iconcolumn.columnselect.hint=Select one or more choice fields. The next tab will allow you to associate a different icon with each possible value of the selected fields.
3713logmein.company.hint=Your company ID can be found in the <b>LogMeIn Rescue Admin Center &gt; Global Settings &gt; Single sign-on</b><br><br>If you don't have LogMeIn Rescue subscription, click <span class="pointable"><a href="#" onclick="window.open('{0}');return false;">here</a></span><br><br>To open LogMeIn Rescue Admin Center in new window, click <span class="pointable"><a href="#" onclick="window.open('{1}');return false;">here</a></span><br><br>To Learn how to setup LogMeIn Rescue integration, click <span class="pointable"><a href="#" onclick="window.open('{2}');return false;">here</a></span>
3714logmein.company.label=Company ID
3715logmein.sso.hint=Your single sign-on password defined in the <b>LogMeIn Rescue Admin Center &gt; Global Settings &gt; Single sign-on<b>
3716logmein.sso.label=Single sign-on password
3717logmein.error.noemail=Please fill field "Email" in your profile.
3718logmein.error.wrongpassword=Please check your SSO password
3719logmein.error.wrongcompany=Please check your SSO Company ID
3720logmein.pin.text=PIN: {0}
3721logmein.console=Open Technician Console
3722logmein.email.sent=Email has been sent
3723fields.relationshipdiagram.notselected.error=Please complete options settings for the field
3724formatwizard.tab.fields.iconlabel=Show Icon Column
3725formatwizard.tab.fields.checkboxlabel=Show selection checkboxes
3726csswizard.staff.tables.tableheader.divider.width=Divider width
3727csswizard.staff.tables.tableheader.divider.color=Divider color
3728logout.warn.sync.export=Sync export is in progress. You cannot logout until it has finished.
3729logout.warn.sync.import=Sync import is in progress. You cannot logout until it has finished
3730logout.warn.ddl=Setup > Tables operation(DDL operation) is in progress, so you cannot logout until it has finished
3731sync.diff.status.created=Added
3732sync.diff.status.modified=Modified
3733sync.diff.status.conflict=Conflict
3734sync.diff.status.moved=Moved
3735sync.diff.line={0} changed from "{1}" to "{2}"
3736sync.diff.line.long={0} changed from\n"{1}" to\n"{2}"
3737sync.diff.page.tables=Tables Report
3738sync.diff.page.fields=Fields Report
3739sync.diff.column.table=Table
3740sync.diff.column.field=Column
3741sync.diff.column.savedsearch=Saved Search Name
3742sync.diff.column.savedsearch.local=Saved Search Name (language)
3743sync.diff.column.savedsearch.filter=({0})\n with properties [Sorting by next columns={1}, Add summary information={2}]
3744sync.diff.unknown=Unknown
3745sync.diff.column.status=Change Type
3746sync.diff.column.text=Description
3747sync.diff.conflict.name=Conflict because field with Logical Field Name {0} has type "{1}" in {2} and type "{3}" in {4}
3748sync.diff.conflict.lf=Conflict because field with Logical Field Name {0} belongs to LF "{1}" in {2} and to LF "{3}" in {4}
3749sync.diff.conflict.label=Conflict because field with Label {0} has Logical Field Name "{1}" in {2} and Logical Field Name "{3}" in {4}
3750sync.diff.move=Parent table changed from \u201C{0}\u201D to \u201C{1}\u201D
3751sync.diff.error.wrongchoice=Unknown value "{0}"
3752sync.diff.choice.name=Name
3753sync.diff.choice.label.default=Label
3754sync.diff.choice.label.language=Label({0})
3755sync.diff.choice.label.type=Type
3756sync.diff.choice.items.default=Choice Items
3757sync.diff.choice.items.language=Choice Items({0})
3758sync.diff.appendonly.order=Entries order
3759sync.diff.appendonly.scrolling=Entries scrolling
3760sync.diff.appendonly.audittrail=Show author
3761sync.diff.rule.description.default=Description
3762sync.diff.rule.description.language=Description({0})
3763sync.diff.rule.table=Table
3764sync.diff.rule.modified.by=Modified By
3765sync.diff.rule.runrules=Run rules
3766sync.diff.rule.updatedefaults=Update defaults
3767sync.diff.rule.actions=Actions
3768sync.diff.page.choicelist=Choices Report
3769sync.diff.page.rules=Rules Report
3770sync.diff.page.actions=Actions Report
3771sync.diff.page.views=Views Report
3772sync.diff.action.name.default=Name
3773sync.diff.action.name.language=Name({0})
3774sync.diff.action.description.default=Description
3775sync.diff.action.description.language=Description({0})
3776sync.diff.action=Action
3777sync.diff.calc.formula=Formula
3778sync.diff.calc.autoupdate=Auto Update
3779sync.diff.calc.errors=Error handling
3780sync.diff.search.error=Filter cannot be parsed.
3781sync.diff.search.action=saved search used at if-then-else action {0} with criteria {1}
3782sync.diff.search.subtype=saved search used at subtype {0} view restriction with criteria {1}
3783sync.diff.group.description=Description
3784sync.diff.group.name=Name
3785sync.diff.group.staff.type=Staff group
3786sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.login=
3787sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.create_table=Create Table Permission
3788sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.drop_table=Drop Table Permission
3789sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.export=Allow exporting KnowledgeBase
3790sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.import=Allow importing KnowledgeBase
3791sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.send_password=Allow Sending Password
3792sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.access_setup_menu=Allow access to Setup wizard
3793sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.lhm_allow_mod_own=Allow group to modify their own Left Pane
3794sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.lhm_allow_mod_oth=Allow group to modify Left Pane for all users
3795sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.send_messages=Allow access to Messaging wizard
3796sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.dashb_mod_own=Allow group to create/edit their own dashboards
3797sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.dashb_mod_all=Allow group to create/edit dashboards for all users
3798sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.homepage_mod_own=Allow group to create/edit their own home pages
3799sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.homepage_mod_all=Allow group to create/edit home pages for all users
3800sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.widget_mod_own=Allow group to create/edit their own widgets
3801sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.widget_mod_all=Allow group to create/edit widgets for all users
3802sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.show_comm_tab=Show Communications Tab
3803sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.filter_comm_by_search=Limit view of Communications shown in left pane to those found by saved search {0}
3804sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.CREATE_MODIFY_OWN_COMBINED_REPORTS=Allow group to create/edit their own combined reports
3805sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.CREATE_MODIFY_ALL_COMBINED_REPORTS=Allow group to create/edit combined reports for all users
3806sync.diff.group.projectpermissions.SEE_FULL_TEAMS_WIZARD=Allow user to see full team wizard
3807#tables
3808sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.view=Allow this group to view {0} table
3809sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.create_field=Allow this group to create {0} fields
3810sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.modify_field=Allow this group to modify {0} fields
3811sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.delete_field=Allow this group to delete {0} fields
3812sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.create_record=Allow this group to create {0} records
3813sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.modify_record=Allow this group to modify {0} records
3814sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.delete_record=Allow this group to delete {0} records
3815sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.view_own_if_pub_y=Allow this group to view own {0} records if published is Yes
3816sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.view_oth_if_pub_y=Allow this group to view other people's {0} records if published is Yes
3817sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.dele_oth_if_pub_y=Allow this group to delete other people's {0} records if published is Yes
3818sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mod_own_s_searches=Allow this group to view own {0} saved searches
3819sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mod_all_s_searches=Allow this group to view all {0} saved searches
3820sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mod_own_s_views=Allow this group to modify own {0} views
3821sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mod_all_s_views=Allow this group to modify all {0} views
3822sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mod_own_s_reports=Allow this group to modify own {0} reports
3823sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mod_all_s_reports=Allow this group to modify all {0} reports
3824sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.pub_s_reports=Allow group to publish saved {0} reports
3825sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.v_own_with_ssearch=Allow this group to view own {0} records that satisfy saved search
3826sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.v_oth_with_ssearch=Allow this group to view other people's {0} records that satisfy saved search
3827sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.d_oth_with_ssearch=Allow this group to delete other people's {0} records that satisfy saved search
3828sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.acc_oth_cv=
3829sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.acc_oth_cv_py=
3830sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.mass_delete=Allow this group to delete multiple {0} records in a single operation
3831sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.import_multiple=Allow this group to import multiple {0} records
3832sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.export_multiple=Allow this group to export multiple {0} records
3833sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.show_in_main_tabs=Show {0} table on the Toolbar
3834sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.dataconversion=Show conversion button on {0} menu action bar
3835sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.intrctdatacnv=Allow interaction with {0} conversion rules
3836sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.link_multiple_recs=Link multiple {0} records using the Link menu
3837sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.print_recs=Print {0} records using the printer icon
3838sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.copy_recs=Allow this group to copy {0} records
3839sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.CREATE_MODIFY_OWN_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow group to create and modify/delete only {0} print templates they created
3840sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.CREATE_MODIFY_ALL_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow group to create and modify/delete all {0} print templates
3841sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.USE_ALL_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow use of all {0} print templates
3842sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.USE_OWN_AND_PUBL_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow use of their own and published {0} print templates only
3843sync.diff.group.tablepermissions.CAN_PUBLISH_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow group to publish {0} print templates
3844#subtypes
3845sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.create=Allow group to create {0}
3846sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_own=Allow group to view own {0}
3847sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_others=Allow group to view other people's {0}
3848sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.edit_own=Allow group to edit own {0}
3849sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.e_own_with_ssearch=Allow group to edit own {0} that satisfy the saved search 
3850sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.e_oth_with_ssearch=Allow group to edit other people's {0} that satisfy the saved search 
3851sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.edit_others=Allow group to edit other people's {0}
3852sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.delete_own=Allow group to delete own {0}
3853sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.delete_others=Allow group to delete other people's {0}
3854sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_own_if_pub_y= 
3855sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_oth_if_pub_y= 
3856sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.dele_oth_if_pub_y= 
3857sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mod_own_s_searches=Allow group to edit own {0} saved searches
3858sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mod_all_s_searches=Allow group to edit all {0} saved searches
3859sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mod_own_s_views=Allow group to edit own {0} views
3860sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mod_all_s_views=Allow group to edit all {0} views
3861sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mod_own_s_reports=Allow group to edit own {0} reports
3862sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mod_all_s_reports=Allow group to edit all {0} reports
3863sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.pub_s_reports=Allow group to publish {0} saved reports
3864sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.v_own_with_ssearch=Allow group to view own people's {0} that satisfy the saved search 
3865sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.v_oth_with_ssearch=Allow group to view other people's {0} that satisfy the saved search 
3866            
3867sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.d_oth_with_ssearch=Allow group to delete other people's {0} that satisfy the saved search 
3868sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_faq=
3869sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_faq_with_ss=
3870sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.massedit=Allow group to mass edit multiple records in {0} in a single operation
3871sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.mass_delete=Allow group to mass delete multiple records in {0} in a single operation
3872sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.import_multiple=Allow group to Import multiple {0} from a file
3873sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.export_multiple=Allow group to export multiple {0} to a file
3874sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.show_in_main_tabs=Show {0} on the Toolbar
3875sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.apply_to_subtabls= 
3876sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.apply_all_to_subtabls= 
3877sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.acc_oth_ss=Allow creating/editing/deleting all {0} saved searches
3878sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.acc_oth_ss_py= 
3879sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.acc_oth_cv=Allow creating/editing/deleting all {0} Views
3880sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.acc_oth_cv_py= 
3881sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.acc_oth_rp=Allow using all {0} Reports
3882sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.acc_oth_rp_py=Allow using published {0} Reports
3883sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.can_be_assigned= 
3884sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.create_calendar=Create Calendar
3885sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.c_cal_with_ssearch=Create calendar that satisfy the saved search
3886sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_own_calendar=View own calendar
3887sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.v_own_cal_with_ssearch=View own calendar that satisfy the saved search
3888sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.view_others_calendar=View other people's calendar
3889sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.v_others_cal_with_ssearch=View other people's calendar that satisfy the saved search
3890sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.edit_own_calendar=Edit own calendar
3891sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.e_own_cal_with_ssearch=Edit own calendar that satisfy the saved search
3892sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.edit_others_calendar=Edit other people's calendar
3893sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.e_others_cal_with_ssearch= other people's calendar that satisfy the saved search
3894sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.delete_own_calendar=Delete own calendar
3895sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.d_own_cal_with_ssearch=Delete own calendar that satisfy the saved search
3896sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.delete_others_calendar=Delete other people's calendar
3897sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.d_others_cal_with_ssearch=Delete other people's calendar that satisfy the saved search
3898sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.VIEW_COMMUNICATION_FIELD_FROM=View "FROM" communication field for {0}
3899sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.EDIT_COMMUNICATION_FIELD_FROM=Edit "FROM" communication field for {0}
3900sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.VIEW_COMMUNICATION_FIELD_REPLYTO=View "REPLY TO" communication field for {0}
3901sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.EDIT_COMMUNICATION_FIELD_REPLYTO=Edit "REPLY TO" communication field for {0}
3902sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.CREATE_COMMUNICATION_RECORD=Create communication record for {0}
3903sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.CREATE_SMS_COMMUNICATION_RECORD=Create SMS communication record for {0}
3904sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.OMIT_TABLE_LABEL=Omit table label
3905sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.link_multiple_recs=Link multiple {0} records using the Link menu
3906sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.print_recs=Print {0} records using the printer icon
3907sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.copy_recs=Allow group to copy {0}
3908sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.MOD_OWN_EML_TMPL=Allow group to create and modify/delete saved {0} email templates that they created
3909sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.MOD_ALL_EML_TMPL=Allow group to modify/delete all {0} email templates
3910sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.VIEWSEND_OWN_EML_TMPL=Allow viewing/sending only their own created {0} email templates
3911sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.VIEWSEND_OWNPUBLISHED_EML_TMPL=Allow viewing and sending own and published {0} email templates
3912sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.VIEWSEND_ALL_EML_TMPL=Allow viewing and sending of all {0} email templates
3913sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.PUBLISH_EML_TMPL=Allow group to publish {0} email templates
3914sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.CREATE_MODIFY_OWN_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow group to create and modify/delete only {0} print templates they created
3915sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.CREATE_MODIFY_ALL_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow group to create and modify/delete all {0} print templates
3916sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.USE_ALL_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow use of all {0} print templates
3917sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.USE_OWN_AND_PUBL_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow use of their own and published {0} print templates only
3918sync.diff.group.subtypepermissions.CAN_PUBLISH_PRINT_TEMPLATES=Allow group to publish {0} print templates
3919#columns
3920sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.create=Create {0}
3921sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.view_own=View Own {0}
3922sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.view_others=View other {0}
3923sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.edit_own=Edit Own {0}
3924sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.edit_others=Edit other {0}
3925sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.append_only=Append Only {0}
3926sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.append_only_ignore=Append Only Ignore {0}
3927sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.view_earlier_versions=View Earlier versions {0}
3928sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.delete_lobs=Delete Lobs {0}
3929sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.EXECUTE_FOR_ANY_RECORD=Execute for any records {0}
3930sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.ALLOW_TO_ADD_TO_AND_VIEW_IN_TABLE_VIEW=Allow to add to and view in table view {0}
3931sync.diff.group.subtypecolumnpermissions.MAKE_QUESTION_SEARCHABLE={0} Make question searchable
3932sync.diff.team.description=Description
3933sync.diff.team.name=Name
3934sync.diff.team.parentteam=Parent Team
3935sync.diff.team.teamleader=Team Leader
3936sync.diff.team.message.refresh.rate=Message Refresh Rate
3937sync.diff.team.tableview.refresh.rate=Table View Refresh Rate
3938sync.diff.team.working.hours.same.as.team=Same hours as {0}
3939sync.diff.team.working.hours=Working Hours
3940sync.diff.team.languages=Languages
3941sync.diff.team.timeformat=Time Format
3942sync.diff.team.dateformat=Date Format
3943sync.diff.page.teams=Teams Report
3944sync.diff.page.groups=Groups Report
3945sync.diff.page.emailtemplates=Email Templates Report
3946sync.diff.page.inbound=Inbound Settings Report
3947sync.diff.page.personalInbound=Personal Inbound Settings Report
3948sync.diff.page.outbound=Outbound Settings Report
3949sync.diff.action.attachprint.mode=Field mode
3950sync.diff.action.conversion.from=Convert From
3951sync.diff.action.conversion.to=Convert To
3952sync.diff.compound.truncate=Truncate
3953sync.diff.action.import.column=Column #{0}
3954sync.diff.file.checkout=Checkout Mode
3955sync.diff.lf.fields=Fields
3956sync.diff.lf.view=View
3957sync.diff.view.default=Display data using the user\u2019s default View
3958sync.diff.layout.changed=Record {0} Layout has changed.
3959sync.diff.layout.changed.tab.number=Tabs count is changed.
3960sync.diff.layout.changed.tab.name=Tab {0} is {1}.
3961sync.diff.layout.changed.row.count=Rows count is different.
3962sync.diff.layout.changed.row.column=Row {0} has different columns count.
3963sync.diff.layout.changed.tab=Tab {0} is changed.
3964sync.diff.layout.changed.cell.differ=Cell {0} in row {1} has changed.
3965sync.diff.layout.align.differ=Alignment settings are changed.
3966#email templates
3967sync.diff.emailtemplates.publish=Published
3968sync.diff.emailtemplates.owner=Owner
3969sync.diff.emailtemplates.templateID=Template ID
3970sync.diff.emailtemplates.immutableID=Template unique ID
3971sync.diff.emailtemplates.projectID=Project ID
3972sync.diff.emailtemplates.subtypeID=Subtype ID
3973sync.diff.emailtemplates.activityTeams=Active for teams
3974sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender=From:
3975sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from=type
3976sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.0=INBOUND EMAIL
3977sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.1=SENDER EMAIL
3978sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.2=LAST UPDATED
3979sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.3=DEFAULT ADDRESS
3980sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
3981sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.5=DEFINED BY USER
3982sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.6=DEFINED BY USER
3983sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.7=EMAIL FIELD
3984sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.8=USER FIELD
3985sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.from.9=ORDINARY FIELD
3986sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.field=field
3987sync.diff.emailtemplates.sender.address=address
3988sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo=Reply To:
3989sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.0=INBOUND EMAIL
3990sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.1=SENDER EMAIL
3991sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.2=LAST UPDATED
3992sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.3=DEFAULT ADDRESS
3993sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
3994sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.5=DEFINED BY USER
3995sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.6=DEFINED BY USER
3996sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.7=EMAIL FIELD
3997sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.8=USER FIELD
3998sync.diff.emailtemplates.replyTo.from.9=ORDINARY FIELD
3999sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients=To recipients:
4000sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.emails=Addresses
4001sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.contactLinkFields=User Fields
4002sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.teamLinkFields=Link to Team
4003sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.emailFields=Email Fields
4004sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.teams=Teams
4005sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.users=Users
4006sync.diff.emailtemplates.recepients.ordinaryFields=Address in Field
4007sync.diff.emailtemplates.ccRecepients=CC recipients:
4008sync.diff.emailtemplates.bccRecepients=BCC recipients:
4009sync.diff.emailtemplates.message=Template Object:
4010sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.subject=Subject
4011sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.body=Body
4012sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.isHTML=Is HTML format
4013sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.sendMessageID=Include encrypted ID in subject line
4014sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.includeHiddenCode=Include Hidden Code for Truncating replies
4015sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.useFieldsUpdate=Enable field parsing for replies
4016sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToSend=Selected Fields
4017sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToSendMode=Include Fields mode
4018sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToSendMode.0=ALL_FIELDS
4019sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToSendMode.1=BASED_ON_RECIPIENTS_PERMISSIONS
4020sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToSendMode.2=SELECTED_FIELDS
4021sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToSendMode.3=NO_SELECTION
4022sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.skipEmptyFields=Not include empty fields
4023sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToIncludeMode=Include Fields as
4024sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToIncludeMode.1=INCLUDE_AS_INLINE_TEXT
4025sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToIncludeMode.2=INCLUDE_AS_ATTACHED_FILE
4026sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.fieldsToIncludeMode.3=DO_NOT_INCLUDE
4027sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.attachesToSend=Attached files
4028sync.diff.emailtemplates.message.attachesVersionedToSend=Attached versioned files
4029#inbbound settings
4030sync.diff.getAppendNonImageToAttFileOnUpdate=Non Image on update
4031sync.diff.getAppendToAttFileOnUpdate=Image on update
4032sync.diff.getAppendToImageFieldOnUpdate=Image on update
4033sync.diff.getBouncedEmailStatusFieldValue=Status field value
4034sync.diff.getDeadLoopCount=Dead loop count
4035sync.diff.getDefaultOwner=Default Owner
4036sync.diff.getDiscardByAddress=Discard by addresses
4037sync.diff.getDiscardByBody=Discard by body
4038sync.diff.getEmail=Email
4039sync.diff.getFolders=Folders
4040sync.diff.getFu_apply_field_assignments=Field update in place of the mappings
4041sync.diff.getFu_apply_field_assignments.0=INSTEAD OF PLAIN
4042sync.diff.getFu_apply_field_assignments.1=IN-ADDITION TO PLAIN
4043sync.diff.getFu_delimiter=Field update delimiter
4044sync.diff.getFu_field_permission=Field permission error
4045sync.diff.getFu_field_permission.0=DISCARD
4046sync.diff.getFu_field_permission.1=TREAT AS STANDARD EMAIL
4047sync.diff.getFu_field_permission.2=ANY VALID FIELDS
4048sync.diff.getFu_field_permission_to_admin=Notification to admin if field permission error occurred
4049sync.diff.getFu_field_permission_to_admin.0=NOT SEND
4050sync.diff.getFu_field_permission_to_admin.1=SEND
4051sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field=Invalid field error
4052sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field.0=DISCARD
4053sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field.1=ANY VALID FIELDS
4054sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field.2=TREAT AS STANDARD EMAIL
4055sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field_to_admin=Notification to admin if invalid field error occurred
4056sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field_to_admin.0=NOT SEND
4057sync.diff.getFu_invalid_field_to_admin.1=SEND
4058sync.diff.getFu_language=Field update language
4059sync.diff.getFu_letter_from=Field update notification From address
4060sync.diff.getFu_letter_message=Field update notification message
4061sync.diff.getFu_letter_to=Field update notification To addresses
4062sync.diff.getFu_record_permission_to_admin=Email admin about record permission issue
4063sync.diff.getFu_record_permission_to_admin.0=NOT SEND
4064sync.diff.getFu_record_permission_to_admin.1=SEND
4065sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error=Fields update sytax error
4066sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error.0=DISCARD
4067sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error.1=TREAT AS STANDARD EMAIL
4068sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error.2=TREAT AS STANDARD EMAIL
4069sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error_to_admin= email admin about syntax error
4070sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error_to_admin.0=NOT SEND
4071sync.diff.getFu_syntax_error_to_admin.1=SEND
4072sync.diff.getHowOftenToProcess=How often to process
4073sync.diff.getLastTimeOfProcess=Last time of process
4074sync.diff.getLeaveCopyTimeout=Days to keep letters on server
4075sync.diff.getLogin=Login
4076sync.diff.getLoopTime=Loop time
4077sync.diff.getMu_creation_by_domains_text=Creation by domains
4078sync.diff.getMu_creation_by_email_text=Creation by email text
4079sync.diff.getMu_defaultOwnerUpdate=Default owner for update
4080sync.diff.getMu_forward_to_addreses=Rejected emails will be forward to
4081sync.diff.getMu_forward_to_from=Rejected emails will be sent from
4082sync.diff.getMu_forward_to_subject=Rejected emails subject
4083sync.diff.getMu_forward_to_text=Rejected emails text
4084sync.diff.getMu_update_by_domains_text=Update by domain text
4085sync.diff.getNewAttachPlacement=New image attachment placement on update
4086sync.diff.getNewAttachPlacement.1=IMAGE FIELD
4087sync.diff.getNewAttachPlacement.2=ATTACHMENT FIELD
4088sync.diff.getNewAttachPlacement.3=COMMUNICATION TABLE
4089sync.diff.getNewAttachPlacement.4=SKIP
4090sync.diff.getNewMessagePlacement=New Message placement on update
4091sync.diff.getNewMessagePlacement.1=PREPEND
4092sync.diff.getNewMessagePlacement.2=APPEND
4093sync.diff.getNewMessagePlacement.3=REPLACE
4094sync.diff.getNewNonImageAttachPlacement=New attachments placement on update
4095sync.diff.getNewNonImageAttachPlacement.1=IMAGE FIELD
4096sync.diff.getNewNonImageAttachPlacement.2=ATTACHMENT FIELD
4097sync.diff.getNewNonImageAttachPlacement.3=COMMUNICATION TABLE
4098sync.diff.getNewNonImageAttachPlacement.4=SKIP
4099sync.diff.getNoReplyToByAddress=No reply to addresses
4100sync.diff.getNoReplyToByBody=No reply to body
4101sync.diff.getPassword=Password
4102sync.diff.getPersonalInboundConfig=Personal Inbound Mapping
4103sync.diff.getPort=Server port
4104sync.diff.getProtocol=Used Protocol
4105sync.diff.getProtocolName=Protocol name
4106sync.diff.getProtocolObject=Used Protocol
4107sync.diff.getRefwdlength=Max length markers are kept in subject line
4108sync.diff.getServer=Server
4109sync.diff.getStopTime=Stop time
4110sync.diff.getStoreAttachTo=Store attachment to
4111sync.diff.getStoreCCRecepeintsTo=Store CC recipients to
4112sync.diff.getStoreImagesTo=Store image to
4113sync.diff.getStoreMessageTo=Store message to
4114sync.diff.getStoreSenderEmailTo=Store sender email to
4115sync.diff.getStoreSenderNameTo=Store sender name to
4116sync.diff.getStoreSenderTo=Store Sender to
4117sync.diff.getStoreSubjectTo=Store Subject to
4118sync.diff.getStoreTORecipientsTo=Store TO recipients To
4119sync.diff.getswsubtypeid=Subtype
4120sync.diff.getUpdateChoiceFields=Update choice fields
4121sync.diff.getUpdateStoreEmailMessageTextIn=Store email message text in
4122sync.diff.getUUID=uniqie ID
4123sync.diff.isBouncedEmailEnabled=Is bounced email enabled
4124sync.diff.isConvertCID=Convert CID
4125sync.diff.isEnabled=Is inbound settings enabled
4126sync.diff.isFu_enabled=Is field parsing enabled
4127sync.diff.isMu_creation_by_domains=Is creation by domain enabled
4128sync.diff.isMu_creation_by_email=Is creation by email enabled
4129sync.diff.isMu_creation_by_email_reply=Is creation by email reply enabled
4130sync.diff.isMu_forward_allowed=Is forward allowed
4131sync.diff.isMu_update_by_domains=Is update by domain enabled
4132sync.diff.isNotIncludeQuotedContent=Is not include quote context
4133sync.diff.isStoreSenderToSeparately=Store TO separately
4134sync.diff.isStripOut=Is strip out
4135sync.diff.isUpdateFields=Is update enabled
4136sync.diff.isUseSSL=Is to use SSL
4137
4138#outbound settings
4139sync.diff.getBounced_address_from_contact_field=Bounced address from Contact field
4140sync.diff.getBounced_address_from_field=Bounced address from email field
4141sync.diff.getBounced_address_from_inbound_address=Bounced from inbound
4142sync.diff.getBounced_address_type=Bounced address source
4143sync.diff.getBounced_address_user_defined=User defined bounced address
4144sync.diff.getBouncedEmailForwardToCustom=Forward bounced letter to custom Email Address
4145sync.diff.getBouncedEmailForwardToTeams=Forward bounced letter to teams
4146sync.diff.getBouncedEmailForwardTo=Forward bounced letter
4147sync.diff.getBouncedEmailForwardToUsers=Forward bounced letter users
4148sync.diff.getDoNotSentIDInSubject=Do Not Include ID[ ] in Subject
4149sync.diff.getEmailField4marketing=Field for email marketing
4150sync.diff.getEmailFieldFromEuiUserSent=From : email field for EUI emails
4151sync.diff.getEmailFieldFromRules=From : email field for rules emails
4152sync.diff.getEmailFieldFromUserSent=From : email field for user emails
4153sync.diff.getEmailFieldReplyToEuiUserSent=Reply : email field for EUI emails
4154sync.diff.getEmailFieldReplyToRules=Reply : email field for rules emails
4155sync.diff.getEmailFieldReplyToUserSent=Reply : email field for rules emails
4156sync.diff.getEmSavedSearchID=Saved Search
4157sync.diff.getEmSelectAll=Choose All Records
4158sync.diff.getEnableEmailMarketing=Enable Email Marketing
4159sync.diff.getEnableTrackingByDefault=Enable tracking
4160sync.diff.getFieldRepresentsCampaign=Field represents campaign
4161sync.diff.getIncludeUnsubscribeLink=Include unsubscribe link
4162sync.diff.getIncomingAddressFromEuiUserSent=From : inbound address for EUI emails
4163sync.diff.getIncomingAddressFromRules=From : inbound address for rules emails
4164sync.diff.getIncomingAddressFromUserSent=From : inbound address for user emails
4165sync.diff.getIncomingAddressReplyToEuiUserSent=Reply : inbound address for EUI emails
4166sync.diff.getIncomingAddressReplyToRules=Reply : inbound address for rules emails
4167sync.diff.getIncomingAddressReplyToUserSent=Reply : inbound address for user emails
4168sync.diff.getMailFormat=Mail format
4169sync.diff.getNoteType=Default new notes type
4170sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingAction=On email sending type
4171sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingEmailsInclude=On email sending include
4172sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingIncludeEmailsList=On email sending emails list
4173sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingIncludeRecordCreator=On email sending record creator
4174sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingIncludeUserDefinedAddress=On email sending defined address
4175sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingIncludeUserDefined=On email sending emails user defined
4176sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingIncludeUsersList=On email sending user list
4177sync.diff.getOnEmailsendingUsersInclude=On email sending user include
4178sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent=From : type of outgoing address for EUI emails
4179sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.1=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4180sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.2=EMAIL FIELD
4181sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.3=LAST UPDATED
4182sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
4183sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.5=DEFINED BY USER
4184sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.6=SENDER EMAIL
4185sync.diff.getOutgoingFromEuiUserSent.7=CONTACT FIELD
4186sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules=From : type of outgoing address for rules emails
4187sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.1=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4188sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.2=EMAIL FIELD
4189sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.3=LAST UPDATED
4190sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
4191sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.5=DEFINED BY USER
4192sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.6=SENDER EMAIL
4193sync.diff.getOutgoingFromForRules.7=CONTACT FIELD
4194sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent=From : type of outgoing address for user emails
4195sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.1=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4196sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.2=EMAIL FIELD
4197sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.3=LAST UPDATED
4198sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
4199sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.5=DEFINED BY USER
4200sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.6=SENDER EMAIL
4201sync.diff.getOutgoingFromUserSent.7=CONTACT FIELD
4202sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent=Reply : type of outgoing address for EUI emails
4203sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.1=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4204sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.2=EMAIL FIELD
4205sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.3=LAST UPDATED
4206sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
4207sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.5=DEFINED BY USER
4208sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.6=SENDER EMAIL
4209sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToEuiUserSent.7=CONTACT FIELD
4210sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules=Reply : type of outgoing address for rules emails
4211sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.1=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4212sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.2=EMAIL FIELD
4213sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.3=LAST UPDATED
4214sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
4215sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.5=DEFINED BY USER
4216sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.6=SENDER EMAIL
4217sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToForRules.7=CONTACT FIELD
4218sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent=Reply : type of outgoing address for user emails
4219sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.1=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4220sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.2=EMAIL FIELD
4221sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.3=LAST UPDATED
4222sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.4=DEFAULT ADDRESS
4223sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.5=DEFINED BY USER
4224sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.6=SENDER EMAIL
4225sync.diff.getOutgoingReplyToUserSent.7=CONTACT FIELD
4226sync.diff.getStatusField4marketing=Status field for email marketing
4227sync.diff.getTableRepresentsCampaign=Campaign Table
4228sync.diff.getToIncludeTOCC_text=Include text note text
4229sync.diff.getToIncludeTOCC=Include text note
4230sync.diff.getToIncludeTOCC_type=Include text note type
4231sync.diff.getToOptionsColorExistentText=Marker of original (quoted) text
4232sync.diff.getToOptionsColorForExistentText=Color of original (quoted) text
4233sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiToEmailValue=To: email field for EUI emails
4234sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiToInbound=To: Contact from this field for EUI emails
4235sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo=To: Type for EUI emails
4236sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo.1=EMAIL FIELD
4237sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo.2=CREATOR EMAIL
4238sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo.3=LAST UPDATED
4239sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo.4=LEAVE BLANK
4240sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo.5=CONTACT FIELD 
4241sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiTo.6=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4242sync.diff.getToOptionsEuiToUserValue=To: Contact from this field for EUI emails
4243sync.diff.getToOptionsIncludeFields=Include Fields
4244sync.diff.getToOptionsIncludeFieldsType=Include Fields type
4245sync.diff.getToOptionsIncludeTextInForward=Include original text in Forward
4246sync.diff.getToOptionsIncludeTextInReply=Include original text in Reply
4247sync.diff.getToOptionsPrefixEnabled=Enabled prefix
4248sync.diff.getToOptionsPrefix=Prefix
4249sync.diff.getToOptionsToEmailValue=To: email field for user emails
4250sync.diff.getToOptionsToInbound=To: table\u2019s incoming address  for user emails
4251sync.diff.getToOptionsTo=To: Type for user emails
4252sync.diff.getToOptionsTo.1=EMAIL FIELD
4253sync.diff.getToOptionsTo.2=CREATOR EMAIL
4254sync.diff.getToOptionsTo.3=LAST UPDATED
4255sync.diff.getToOptionsTo.4=LEAVE BLANK
4256sync.diff.getToOptionsTo.5=CONTACT FIELD 
4257sync.diff.getToOptionsTo.6=TABLE'S INCOMING ADDRESS
4258sync.diff.getToOptionsToUserValue=To: Contact from this field for user emails
4259sync.diff.getToSendOneInstance=Send same email to all recipients
4260sync.diff.getUnsubscribeCompanyAddress=Company physical address
4261sync.diff.getUnsubscribeExitURL=Include Unsubscribe link in emails by default
4262sync.diff.getUnsubscribeFieldName=Additional Unsubscribe Field name
4263sync.diff.getUnsubscribeFieldValue=Additional Unsubscribe Field value
4264sync.diff.getUnsubscribeTextLink=Text for Unsubscribe link
4265sync.diff.getUnsubscribeText=Unsubscribe text
4266sync.diff.getUserDefinedFromEuiUserSent=From : User defined for EUI emails
4267sync.diff.getUserDefinedFromRules=From : User defined for rules emails
4268sync.diff.getUserDefinedFromUserSent=From : User defined for user emails
4269sync.diff.getUserDefinedReplyToEuiUserSent=Reply : User defined for EUI emails
4270sync.diff.getUserDefinedReplyToRules=Reply : User defined for rules emails
4271sync.diff.getUserDefinedReplyToUserSent=Reply : User defined for user emails
4272sync.diff.getUserFieldFromEuiUserSent=From: Link to Contact from field for EUI emails
4273sync.diff.getUserFieldFromRules=From: Link to Contact from field for rules emails
4274sync.diff.getUserFieldFromUserSent=From Link to Contact from field for user emails
4275sync.diff.getUserFieldReplyToEuiUserSent=Reply: Link to Contact from field for EUI emails
4276sync.diff.getUserFieldReplyToRules=Reply: Link to Contact from field for rules emails
4277sync.diff.getUserFieldReplyToUserSent=Reply: Link to Contact from field for user emails
4278sync.diff.isBouncedEmailUpdateStatusField=Update the communication table email status field
4279sync.diff.isFormatHTML=Default HTML format for outgoing user emails
4280sync.diff.isIncludeHiddenCode=Include hidden code at top of emails
4281sync.diff.outbound.id=Outbound for Subtype
4282sync.diff.isDiscardBounced=Discard bounced letters sent from any sender
4283sync.diff.isDiscardDNL=Discard delivery notification letters sent from any sender
4284sync.diff.isDiscardMDaemon=Discard emails from [MAILER-DAEMON; postmaster; MDaemon]
4285#conversion
4286sync.diff.page.conversions=Data Conversion
4287sync.diff.page.conversions.name=Conversion {0} to {1} ({2})
4288modularity.report.entityname.conversion=Data Conversion
4289sync.diff.page.conversions.creationOrder=Creation Order
4290sync.diff.page.conversions.title=Title
4291sync.diff.page.conversions.implicit.links.creation=Create record required for linked field relationship if a matching record does not already exist.
4292sync.diff.page.conversions.rejectCreationAllowed=Allow user to reject creation of this record or selection of an existing record
4293sync.diff.page.conversions.search.norestriction=No restriction
4294sync.diff.page.conversions.search=Only allow record to be converted if it meets saved search criteria
4295sync.diff.page.conversions.mapping=Source column {0} mapping
4296sync.diff.page.conversions.mapped=Target column {0} mapping
4297sync.diff.page.conversions.mapping.notmapped=Not mapped
4298sync.diff.page.conversions.mapping.mapped=Column {0} is mapped to {1} with options: Editing Allowed = {2}, Match Flag = {3}, Primary Field flag = {4}
4299sync.diff.page.conversions.mapping.notmapped.options=Non-mapped target column {0} has options: Editing Allowed = {1}, Match Flag = {2}, Primary Field flag = {3}
4300sync.diff.lf.name=Linked Field
4301warn.interface.old=Your primary team still uses the deprecated horizontal table layout. Some of the UI components may not be compatible with the new interface. We strongly recommend changing the Layout in the Look and Feel editor as follows:<br>Setup > Look and Feel > Manage Staff Schemes: Edit the Look and Feel that you are using, select Vertical Toolbar at the bottom of the Global tab and then click Finish.<br><br> To learn more about the updated layout, please visit our video gallery and watch Staff Interface Overview: <a href="https://www.agiloft.com/tutorials.htm" target="_blank">https://www.agiloft.com/tutorials.htm</a>
4302constant.print_template_allow_scripts.label=Security: Permit Javascript in print templates
4303constant.print_template_allow_scripts.hint=Allows Scripts In Print Template
4304email.fields.process_cid.label=Images in Email body
4305email.fields.process_cid.hint=This options controls the handling of images in the body of the email.\nIf you choose not to keep them in the body of the text, the image will be handled like an attached image file.
4306email.fields.process_cid.enabled=Keep in body of text
4307sync.diff.kb.hint=Compare two KBs
4308sync.diff.kb.button=Compare KBs
4309sync.diff.kb.source=Source KB
4310sync.diff.kb.target=Target KB
4311sync.diff.set.errors=<b>Cannot create entity set for KB, check erorrs below:</b><br> {0}
4312operationsequence.wait=Waiting for action to complete
4313operationsequence.skip=Press <a href="#" onclick="document.main.submit();">here</a> to skip waiting.
4314constant.full_tables_access.label=Full Tables Access
4315constant.full_tables_access.hint=Allows full access on structure editing for sensitive Agiloft tables (like All Communications, Contacts etc)
4316constant.strip_non_printable_characters.label=Strip non-printable characters
4317constant.strip_non_printable_characters.hint=Removes all non printable characters from all text fields.
4318constant.keep_slash_in_escaped_dollar_sign.label=Keep slash prior escaped dollar sign
4319constant.keep_slash_in_escaped_dollar_sign.hint=Slash \\ sign before $ sign will be kept after formula processing.
4320constant.disable_marketing_email_image_tracking.label=Disable Marketing Email Image Tracking
4321constant.disable_marketing_email_image_tracking.hint=The email marketing functionality embeds a one pixel image in outbound emails in order to track which of them have been opened. This is a standard technique, but can lead to a warning from the email client. <br/>Setting this variable to Yes disables this functionality and so avoids such warnings.
4322constant.disable_email_loop_detection.label=Disable email loop detection
4323constant.disable_email_loop_detection.hint=Automatically apply reject filter for all Rule's emails sent to one of inbound emails of current KB.
4324constant.hotlink_master_password.label=Security: Hotlink Master Password
4325constant.hotlink_master_password.hint=This master password is used for checking cookies for users who selected to save login credentials for generated hotlinks.
4326constant.allowed_referers.label=Security: Allowed Referers
4327constant.allowed_referers.hint=List of host names separated with comma, that allowed as referers except this server. Single * value means "any".
4328samlsso.unsupported_saml_version=Unsupported SAML Version:  {1}.
4329samlsso.invalid_project=The Project / KB you are trying to login is invalid {0}
4330samlsso.LoginFailure.idPInitiated=Agiloft does not support SAML IdP initiated Single Sign-On. <BR>Use a URL of the form https://[Agiloft_server]/gui2/samlssologin.jsp?project=[project_name] to login to Agiloft via SAML SSO
4331samlsso.LoginFailure=Login Failure, contact your System Administrator.
4332samlconfig.wizard.title=SAML Configuration
4333samlconfig.tab.general=General
4334samlconfigstate.general.hint = Enable / Disable SAML SSO
4335samlconfigstate.general.label = Enable SAML SSO
4336samlconfig.altlogin.hint = Allow user to login via the default login URL provided by Agiloft, in addition to SAML Single Sign-On.
4337samlconfig.tab.idpconfig=Identity Provider Details
4338samlconfig.mode.hint=Enable or Disable SAML Mode
4339samlidpconfig.general.hint=Agiloft has been tested to work with a variety of SAML Identity Providers.<BR>To view the details on how to configure these IdPs refer to SAML Configuration documentation.
4340samlconfig.idplogin.hint= Identity Provider login URL to which {0} will forward the login request.
4341samlconfig.entityid.hint = Identity Provider name or an URL that identifies the IdP. 
4342samlconfig.entityid.label = IdP Entity Id / Issuer
4343samlconfig.idptab.skip.validaton.hint=This option allows you to save SAML configuration even when you do not have the Identity Provider(IdP) details. <BR>You may re-open the SAML configuration wizard later on and provide the IdP details<BR><font color="red">Note that SAML SSO will not work until the IdP details are available and are valid.</font> 
4344samlconfig.idptab.skip.validaton.label=Skip the validation of Identity Provider Details while saving SAML configuration
4345samlconfig.idplogin.label = IdP Login URL
4346samlconfig.idplogout.hint = Identity Provider logout URL to which {0} will forward the logout assertion.
4347samlconfig.idplogout.label = IdP Logout URL
4348samlconfig.idpCertificate.hint = IdP Provided X.509 certificate. IdP may provide certitifcate as a file or as part of X.509 tag in SAML Metadata.<br/>If your IdP has provided the certificate as a file, save it on to localdisk, open the certificate in a text editor and paste the contents here.<br>If you have already provided SAML metadata XML, you may leave this field blank.
4349samlconfig.idpCertificate.label = IdP Provided X.509 certificate contents
4350samlconfig.idpCertificate.file = Certificate file path
4351samlconfig.idpCertificate.contents = Certificate Contents
4352samlspconfig.general.hint = You will need to use the below information to create Agiloft Service Provider (SP) Profile within your SAML Identity provider (IdP).
4353samlconfig.spentityid.hint = Entity Id is a unique identifier string for the {0} Project(KB). It can be any unique identifier you may wish to use . In order to handle SAML SSO requests for this project, you should configure the same identifier in your Identity Provider.<BR> The system automatically prepopulates the value with [{0}-server]/[Project Name]
4354samlconfig.spentityid.label = {0} (SP) Entity Id
4355samlconfig.splogin.hint = The Agiloft (SP) SAML Login URL is: <BR> 1. Used by a user in case of SP initiated SSO <BR> 2.  Used by an IdP in case of IdP initiated SSO
4356samlconfig.splogin.label = Agiloft SAML SSO Login URL
4357samlconfig.spcert.hint = Provide the file path ( on the {0} server) of the Keystore file  containing the Private Key and X.509 certificate of the {0} server.
4358samlconfig.spcert.label = Keystore file path on the {0} Server
4359samlconfig.splogout.hint = The SAML Assertion XML for a user logged out by an IdP will be sent to this URL.<BR> Agiloft will process the Assertion XML and invalidate all sessions for the user.
4360samlconfig.splogout.label = Agiloft SAML Logout Consume URL
4361samlconfig.spassertionacs.hint = SAML V2 Assertion Consume Service (ACS) Endpoint is the HTTP(S) POST URL provided by {0}.<br> The selected Identity Provider will use this URL to forward an authenticated user's details in form of the SAML Assertion XML.
4362samlconfig.spassertionacs.label = SAML V2 Assertion Consume Service (ACS) Endpoint
4363samlconfig.spnameid.hint = Specify the format in which the user identity is sent in the SAML assertion by the IdP, in case of a successful authentication.<BR>1. If you choose "User Name" then the user identity obtained from an IdP will be matched against the value of the "Login" field of <b>contacts</b> table.<BR>2.If you choose "Email address" then the user identity obtained from an IdP will be matched against the value of the <b>Email</b> field of <b>contacts</b> table <BR>3. If you choose <b>Federation ID</b> then you also need to select the corresponding field in <b>contacts</b> table against whose value, the Federation Id obtained from IdP will be matched. 
4364samlconfig.spnameid.label = Name identifier format in SAML Assertion sent by IdP
4365samlconfig.spnameidloc.hint = This indicates the XML TAG in SAML Assertion, <br>via which IdP sends the authenticated user details.<br><br>Typically, IdPs send the details in a NameId TAG.<br>However some IdPs choose to send the same as Attributes in SAML assertion. If the user details are present in <b>Attribue</b> tag in SAML Assertion XML, provide the value for the <b>Name field or FriendlyName field </b> of the Attribute tag that will have the user information. This will allow the system to use the right Attribute tag to extract user's login name. <br>Some example values used by IdPs in the Name /FriendlyName fields are uid , login , userid 
4366samlconfig.spnameidloc.label = Name Identifier location in SAML Assertion (Defaults to NameID TAG)
4367samlconfig.spauthprofile.hint = SAML Authentication profile guides how {0} as SP and an IdP will react, when a user is trying to access {0}.<BR>If you select Passive authentication then <BR>only those users who are already authenticated by an IdP will be allowed to use {0}.<BR> If a user is not already authenticated,<BR>{0} will show an error to the user indicating the same (assuming IdP forwards the error).<BR><BR>If forced Authentication is selected then the IdP will prompt for <BR>user name and password from the user even if the user has a valid login session with the IdP.<BR><BR> The default behavior indicates that a user who is already authenticated by IdP<BR> will be able to access {0}. If the user is not authenticated then IdP will prompt user/password screen to user.
4368samlconfig.spauthprofile.label = SAML Authentication Profile
4369access.main.launchsamlconfig.hint = Click <span class=SIBoldMark>SAML 2.0 Single Sign-On</span> to configure {0} to automatically authenticate login requests via a trusted SAML 2.0 Identity Provider.<br>As a pre-requisite for this configuration you should obtain the following details from your SAML 2.0 Identity Provider: <ol><li>IdP Entity Id<li>IdP Login URL<li>IdP Logout URL<li>IdP X.509 certificate.</ol>Depending on the IdP , the above information may be available in SAML Metadata XML or as individual values from IdP UI / Documentation
4370access.button.launchsamlconfig.label = Configure SAML 2.0 Single Sign-On 
4371samlconfig.tab.spconfig = Service Provider Details
4372samlconfig.general = General
4373samlconfig.altlogin.label = Allow users to login via Agiloft login UI
4374samlsso.login.language = Select Language
4375samlsso.login.interface = Select Role
4376samlconfig.spassertion.url = SAML V2 Assertion Consume Service (ACS) Endpoint
4377samlsso.nameId.idp = Name identifier in Assertion sent by IdP
4378samlsso.federationId.map = Choose the field name in Contacts table that represents the above selected Name Identifier.
4379saml.nameId.forsp=User Name
4380saml.email.forsp=Email Address
4381saml.federationId.forsp=Federation ID
4382saml.nameIdLoc.def=Default
4383saml.nameIdLoc.tag=NameID TAG
4384saml.nameIdLoc.attrib=Attribute TAG
4385saml.nameIdLoc.attribName.label=Value of either Name / FriendlyName Field of Attribute tag
4386saml.nameIdLoc.attribName.error=Attribute Name is mandatory, if IdP provides the NameID in Attribute TAG.
4387saml.authProfile.def=Default
4388saml.authProfile.passive= Passive Web Single Sign On with IdP
4389saml.authProfile.forced=Forced Authentication
4390samlconfig.keyStorePassword.hint=Enter the Java KeyStore Password used to add the {0} server certificates to Java KeyStore.
4391samlconfig.keyStorePassword.label=Java KeyStore Password
4392samlconfig.keyStoreAlias.hint=Enter the Java KeyStore Alias used to add the {0} server certificates to Java KeyStore.
4393samlconfig.keyStoreAlias.label=Alias used to add certificate to Java KeyStore 
4394samlconfig.unconfigured.project.error=Unable to login to KB/ Project: {0}. Check if SAML v2 SSO is configured for KB / Project: {0}.
4395samlconfig.login.notvisible=This is the generic login dialog for SAML V2.0 based Single Sign-On
4396samlv2.signin.text=Sign in with SAML v2 Identity Provider
4397saml.idpconfigparams.error=The IdP SAML Metadata XML is not provided, system cannot determine the values of IdP configuration parameter(s): {0}. Please enter the value for {0}.
4398saml.idpCertificate.metadata.error=System cannot determine the IdP Certificate from the SAML Metadata XML. Please enter the value for the IdP Certificate.
4399saml.idpEntityId.metadata.error= System cannot determine the IdP EntityID from the SAML Metadata XML. Please enter the value for the IdP EntityID.
4400saml.idpLoginUrl.metadata.error=System cannot determine the IdP Login URL from the SAML Metadata XML. Please enter the value for the IdP Login URL.
4401saml.idpLogoutUrl.metadata.error=System cannot determine the IdP Logout URL from the SAML Metadata XML. Please enter the value for the IdP Logout URL.
4402saml.idpLoginUrl.invalid.error=Invalid value for IdP Login URL. Please ensure that the URL is valid.
4403saml.invalididpcert.error=IdP Certificate is not valid.
4404saml.invalididpcert.error.notpresent=X.509 certificate of the IdP is not present in SAML metadata.
4405saml.invalidmetadata.error.noentityid=The SAML Metadata XML does not contain the Entity ID of the IdP
4406saml.invalidmetadata.error.noentitydescriptor=Invalid SAML Metadata XML: Root Element EntityDescriptor not found
4407saml.invalidmetadata.version.error=Invalid SAML Metadata version {0}
4408saml.invalidmetadata.noidpssourl=The SAML Metadata does not contain SAML IdP Login URL / Single Sign-On Service URL
4409saml.federation.id.field.notselected=If your IdP sends Federation Id as NameId, then selecting a field from <b>contacts table that holds federation id is mandatory.
4410saml.invalidmetadata.xml.error=Invalid SAML Metadata XML. Check XML syntax.
4411samlconfig.idpMetadata.hint=Copy the contents of the SAML metadata XML provided by the IdP in the text area.<BR>If you provide the IdP SAML metadata contents, then the below fields will be automatically populated when you click the finish button.<BR>If you do not have the IdP SAML metadata with you, you need to enter the values of the below fields manually.<BR>Note that, if you provide both the SAML Metadata XML content and also enter the values manually in the respective fields below, then, the latter takes precedence. 
4412samlconfig.idpMetadata.label=SAML Metadata XML contents obtained from your IdP:
4413samlconfig.disabled.project.error=Unable to login to KB/ Project: {0}.SAML 2.0 SSO is disabled for KB / Project: {0}.
4414saml.downloadcert=Download X.509 Certificate
4415saml.downloadcert.error=Failed to download X.509 Certificate in PEM format.
4416saml.downloadcert.error.noconfig=SAML 2.0 based SSO is not configured. Cannot download X.509 Certificate.
4417saml.downloadmetadata.error=Failed to download SAML 2.0 Service Provider Metadata 
4418saml.downloadmetadata=Download SAML 2.0 Service Provider Metadata 
4419saml.downloadmetadata.noconfig=SAML 2.0 based SSO is not configured. Cannot download SAML Metadata.
4420samlconfigcreateuser.general.hint=If you select create option, {0} will automatically create the SAML IdP authenticated User in this KB if the user does not already exist in {0}.<BR>The User\u2019s field values specified in the Tabs \u2018Group/Team Mapping\u2019 and User Field Mapping will also be updated in {0} for the newly created user.<BR><BR>If you select update option, {0} will automatically update the User\u2019s fields in the {0} KB,based on the User\u2019s attributes available in a successful SAML response.<BR>The Tabs \u2018Group/Team Mapping\u2019 and \u2018User Field Mapping\u2019 lets you update user fields in {0} with any User attributes in the SAML response.<BR>Note: If update option is selected, every time a user successfully logs into {0}  via SAML SSO, the user fields will be updated (if necessary) in the {0} KB.
4421samlconfigupdateattr.general.hint=If you select this option, {0} will automatically update the User\u2019s fields in the {0} KB,based on the User\u2019s attributes available in a successful SAML response.<BR>The Tabs \u2018Group/Team Mapping\u2019 and \u2018User Field Mapping\u2019 lets you update user fields in {0} with any User attributes in the SAML response.<BR>Note: If this option is selected, every time a user successfully logs into {0}  via SAML SSO, the user fields will be updated (if necessary) in the {0} KB.
4422samlConfigGrpMapping.general.hint=<b>User Group Mapping. </b><BR>Choose how a user\u2019s group is set in {0}.<BR>You may specify the default {0} Group to which the user should belong.<BR><BR><BR>Or you can specify an Attribute name in the SAML response that should be used to map the User\u2019s Group(s) in {0}.<BR><BR><BR><BR>Note: If the second option is selected, then any Group names sent in the SAML Response should already be created in {0}.<BR>
4423samlconfigupdateattr.general.label=Update User fields on subsequent logins by an existing user
4424samlconfig.grpmapping.tabtitle=User Group Mapping
4425samlconfig.teammapping.tabtitle=User Team Mapping
4426samlconfig.createuser.label=Create SAML IdP Authenticated user in {0}
4427samlconfig.mapdefault.algroup=Choose a Group existing in {0} as the default Group for the user
4428samlconfig.mapdefault.samlgroup=Map the group(s) from this SAML Attribute
4429samlconfig.grp.attrnamelabel=
4430samlsso.updateGrpForNextLogins.msg=On subsequent logins by an existing user:
4431samlconfig.updateGrpForNextLogins.yes.msg=Update user's group based on the selection above
4432samlconfig.updateGrpForNextLogins.no.msg=Do not update user's group membership in {0}
4433samlConfigTeamMapping.general.hint=<b>User Team(s) Mapping.</b><BR><BR>Choose how the user\u2019s Primary Team and (multi-value) Teams field should be defined.<BR><BR>You can choose default values from the list of {0} Teams.<BR><BR>Alternatively, you can define the SAML attributes that will hold the values to be mapped into the Primary Team and Teams field.  If mapping multiple teams, they should be separate with a comma and no space, i.e. Customer Team,Document Team.<BR><BR>Note: The Team names sent in the SAML Response should already exist  in {0}, or they will not be properly set.  The Teams field is optional, but the Primary Team must have a value for the user to be able to login to {0}.
4434samlconfig.mapteam.alteam=Set the User\u2019s teams to default values from {0}:
4435samlconfig.primaryteam.attr=SAML Attribute Name holding  User\u2019s Primary Team
4436samlconfig.userteams.attr=SAML Attribute Name holding User\u2019s Teams
4437samlconfig.updateTeamForNextLogins.no.msg=Do not update user's Primary Team and Teams fields in {0} based on selection above
4438samlconfig.updateTeamForNextLogins.yes.msg=Update their Primary Team and Teams fields based on the selection above.
4439samlConfigFieldMapping.general.hint=<b>User Field(s) Mapping.</b><BR><BR>This option lets you map fields in the People table of {0} from attributes sent with the SAML response.  Select the fields you wish to map and provide the SAM Attribute name that will hold the appropriate value.<BR>If an attribute is empty in the SAML response, no change will be made to the field in {0}.<BR>If a field is a linked field or choice field (such as Department, Manager Name, Employment Status), and the value mapped from SAML is not a valid value in {0}, the SAML value will be ignored.<BR>Note that the available fields are limited to those available for the Table or Subtable you chose in the first screen.
4440samlconfig.fieldmapping.tabtitle=User Field(s) Mapping
4441samlsso.usercreationFailed.noDefaultGroup=No group information is available in SAML Config, to create a new user / update existing user {0}
4442samlsso.usercreationFailed.noDefaultGroup.saml=No value for user's Group is available in SAML Attribute {0}
4443samlsso.usercreationFailed.noPrimaryTeam=No information for primary team is available in SAML Config, to create a new user / update existing user  {0}
4444samlsso.usercreationFailed.noPrimaryTeam.saml=No value for Primary team is available in SAML Attribute {0}
4445samlsso.usercreationFailed.duplicateUser=Failed to create user with login : {0} , reason : {1}
4446samlsso.usercreationFailed.runtimeerror=Failed to create user with login : {0}
4447samlsso.usercreationFailed.nameiderror={1} SAML Configuration allows only Email address as logins. The login : {0}  is not a valid email address.
4448samlsso.createuser.selecttable.msg= Add the user to / update the user record in the Table/Subtable shown below:
4449samlsso.generic.runtimeerror=Generic error occurred : {0}
4450samlconfig.primaryteam.label=Primary Team:
4451samlconfig.teams.label=Teams:
4452samlconfig.keystorePass.error=The Keystore Password is mandatory
4453samlsso.fieldmapping.altable.msg=Field names of <br> <b>{0}</b> table in {1}
4454samlsso.fieldmapping.samlattr.msg=Mapping SAML attribute names
4455samlsso.error=SAML Error: {0}
4456samlconfig.idpentityidempty.error=IdP Entity ID is not available, check if IdP Provider details are added via SAML configuration wizard.
4457samlconfig.idploginurl.error=IdP Login URL/Sign-on service URL  is not available, check if IdP Provider details are added via SAML configuration wizard.
4458samlconfig.idpcertempty.error=IdP X.509 certificate  is not available, check if IdP Provider details are added via SAML configuration wizard.
4459samlsso.custom.encoding.space=Specify character(s) that will replace spaces in KB names while configuring SAML Identity Provider
4460samlsso.custom.encoding.space.description=Normally, there is no need to set this variable value, if SAML IdPs used by KBs on this server supports space encoding correctly. As an exception, ADFS2.0 and ADFS 3.0 has known issues in supporting encoding of space character.<br>Provide a custom encoding character ( or a sequence of characters ) that will be used in SAML IdP configuration for Assertion URL.<br>Use an <b>uncommon sequence of characters</b> to provide the encoding, for example two underscores.<br>WARNING! Ensure that the sequence of characters you enter are not contained in ANY of the KB names hosted on this server"
4461constant.custom_saml_enc_key_cipher_transform.label=Custom Cipher transform for decrypting SAML Keys
4462constant.custom_saml_enc_key_cipher_transform.description=You may specify a custom transform supported by Java, if the in-built Cipher transforms, namely for rsa, sha1, sha256, sha512 are not applicable for an encryption method used to encrypt X.509 certificate data in SAML Response. If any of the built-in cipher transforms already match, then that gets higher priority, than this custom value.
4463constant.saml_req_enc_digest_algo.label=SAML Request secure Hash Algorithm
4464constant.saml_req_enc_digest_algo.description=The encryption algorithm for SAML Authentication request, typically SHA1 or SHA256
4465default_contact_fields_samlconfig.label=List of fields from 'contact' table/subtable to be used in SAML configuration
4466default_contact_fields_samlconfig.description=Provide a comma separated list if field names in the order you want to view them in UI. Do not use the field labels.
4467db.metric.record=Record size limit
4468db.metric.mysql.page=Page size limit
4469oauth20config.wizard.title=OAuth 2.0 SSO Configuration
4470oauth20config.general=General
4471oauth20config.tab.advanced=OAuth 2.0 Identity Provider Details
4472access.main.launchoauth20ProfileConfig.hint=Click <span class=SIBoldMark>Configure OAuth 2.0 Profiles</span> to manage OAuth 2.0 Profiles based on pre-defined roles. You can create one profile for a role in a KB.<BR>For a profile with SSO Role, {0} will automatically authenticate login requests that are trusted by an OAuth 2.0 Identity /Auth Provider, e.g. www.google.com.<br><br><span class=SIBoldMark>Pre-requisites for this configuration:</span><br><br>\u00A0You should obtain OAuth 2.0 Client details from your OAuth2.0 Identity / Auth Provider. Settings of OAuth 2.0 providers may vary,typically you need at least:<ol><li>ClientID<li>ClientSecret</ol>While setting up the above in your Identity Provider, you also need to provide an \u201CAuthorized Redirect URI / Callback URI\u201D. Enter a value such as \u2013 <br><br><span class=SIItalicMark>https://&lt;{0}-Server&gt;/gui2/oauth20callback</span><br><br>where <span class=SIItalicMark>&lt;{0}-Server&gt; </span>is the IP Address or host name (FQDN) of the server where {0} is installed.<br><br>Refer to the URL on details of how to Configure Google SSO for OAuth 2.0 / OpenID Connect:<br><span class=SIItalicMark>https://developers.google.com/accounts/docs/OAuth2Login#appsetup</span><br><br>In addition, the users being authenticated must have a username or email address in the OAuth Identity Provider (e.g. Google) that matches a login or email address of a user in {0}.
4473access.button.launchoauth20config.label=Configure OAuth 2.0 Profiles
4474oauth20configstate.general.hint = Check the box to Enable OAuth 2.0 SSO.  If SSO is enabled, the user can login by clicking on a hotlink such as<br> <b><i> https://[server]/gui2/oauth20sso?project=KB_NAME</i></b> or <br> by pointing your browser to  <b><i>https://[server]/gui2/googleoauth.jsp</i></b>
4475oauth20configstate.general.label = Enable OAuth 2.0 SSO
4476oauth20config.oauthProviderName.hint=Name of the OAuth 2.0 Identity(Auth) Provider. <br> For Example: www.google.com or Google
4477oauth20config.oauthProviderName.label= OAuth 2.0 Identity(Auth) Provider Name
4478oauth20config.oauthRoleName.hint=The functionality/feature of the the OAuth 2.0 provider that will be integrated / used in {0}.
4479oauth20config.oauthRoleName.label=The role of this OAuth 2.0 Provider
4480oauth20config.oauthClientId.hint=The Client ID / Consumer Key obtained from your OAuth 2.0 Identity / Auth Provider, when you created a project / application for {0} in OAuth 2.0 provider website.<br>For Google, refer to <b><i>https://developers.google.com/accounts/docs/OAuth2Login\#getcredentials</b></i> for details on how to setup and obtain Client ID.
4481oauth20config.oauthClientId.label=Client ID / Consumer Key
4482oauth20config.oauthClientSecret.hint=The Client / Consumer Secret obtained from your OAuth 2.0 Identity / Auth Provider, when you created a project / application for {0} in OAuth 2.0 provider website.<br>For Google, refer to <b><i>https://developers.google.com/accounts/docs/OAuth2Login\#getcredentials</b></i> on details of how to setup and obtain Client Secret.
4483oauth20config.oauthClientSecret.label=Client / Consumer Secret
4484oauth20config.oauthAuthURI.hint={0} connects to this Authentication URI and provides the Client ID, secret and Redirect URI to obtain the one-time Token for the next communication step.  <br>For Google, this is typically: <b></i>https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/auth</b></i> <br>For Salesforce.com, this is typically: <b></i>https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/authorize</b></i>
4485oauth20config.oauthAuthURI.label=Authentication URI
4486oauth20config.oauthTokenURI.hint={0} connects to the Token URI to obtain the status and details of authentication of a user who is successfully authenticated by OAuth 2.0 Identity / Auth Provider.  <br>For Google, this is typically:<b><i>https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/token</b></i> <br>For Salesforce.com, this is typically:<b><i>https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/token</b></i>
4487oauth20config.oauthTokenURI.label=Token URI
4488oauth20config.unconfigured.project.error=Unable to login to KB/ Project: {0}. Check if OAuth 2.0 SSO is configured for KB: {0}.
4489oauth20config.disabled.project.error=Unable to login to KB/ Project: {0}.OAuth 2.0 SSO is disabled for KB: {0}.
4490oauth20config.invalid.projectName=The KB/Project name {0} is invalid.Check if OAuth 2.0 is configured for this KB.
4491oauth20config.oauthRedirectURI.hint=The Redirect URI is the URI on {0} server to which OAuth 2.0 provider will return Access Token, on successful authentication.<br><b><i>Ensure that the Redirect URI configured in {0} matches the Redirect URI you configured on the OAuth 2.0 Identity Provider.</b></i><br>For Google, refer to <b><i>https://developers.google.com/accounts/docs/OAuth2Login\#getcredentials</b></i> on details of how to setup Redirect URI.<br>The text field is auto-populated with the value for the same. It is recommended that you do not modify this.
4492oauth20config.oauthRedirectURI.label=Redirect URI
4493oauth20config.oauthRedirectURIRequest.error=Error processing request sent to {0} Request_URI.
4494oauthTokenURIRequest.error=Error retrieving authentication information from OAuth Provider.
4495oauthAuthURIRequest.error=Failed to retrieve login details from OAuth 2.0 Provider using AUTH_URI.
4496oauthInvalidUser=Invalid User {0}
4497oauthInvalidUser.duplicateEmail=Multiple users with same email address exists. Login access denied for {0}. Refer to server log for more details.
4498oauth20config.fullAccountName.label=Use full OAuth account name as a KB login name / email (recommended)
4499oauth20config.fullAccountName.hint=If a user is logged into Google as John.Doe@gmail.com and "Use full account name" option is checked, {0} will try to match:<br> 1. A user with login as John.Doe@gmail.com <br> 2. A user with email address as John.Doe@gmail.com.<br> If this option is deselected {0} will try to find a user with login John.Doe. <br>If a matching user is found,that user name will be used for logging in.
4500oauth20.antiforgerytoken.error=Invalid Anti Forgery Token sent in callback URI, by OAuth provider.
4501oauth20.kbNameNotPresent=Project / KB Name is mandatory, in the init URL. For Example: http(s)://AGILOFT_SERVER/gui2/oauth20sso?project=Demo)
4502oauth20.login.google=Sign in with Google
4503oauth20.login.notvisible=This is the generic login dialog for Google OAuth 2.0 Single Sign-On
4504oauth20config.oauthRedirectURI.error=The Redirect URI should be of the form http(s)://[Agiloft-Server]/gui2/oauth20callback
4505oauth20config.sso.roleName=OAuth20_SSO
4506oauth20config.googleApps.roleName=Google_Apps
4507oauth20config.oauthprofileandroleexists=An OAuth 2.0 profile with the role {0} already exists. You can create one profile with a given role.
4508oauth20config.wizardHeader=OAuth 2.0 Profile
4509oauth20config.error.noconfig=There is no OAuth2 configured for {0} role. Operation is impossible. Contact your administrator.
4510sso.auth.option.choice.label=SSO Authentication Options
4511sso.auth.method.label=SSO Authentication Method
4512sync.dependency.table.headsubtype=is head subtype of
4513sync.dependency.table.icon=is Action Bar icon for
4514sync.dependency.record.to.record=referenced by field "{0}" of record
4515sync.dependency.survey.to.question=used at survey "{0}"
4516sync.dependency.group.search=used in permissions search of
4517sync.dependency.search.owner=is owner of
4518sync.dependency.record.referred.updateaction=referred by
4519sync.dependency.related.filter=used as restriction filter in
4520sync.dependency.lf.donor=is donor of
4521sync.dependency.lf.contains=is part of
4522sync.dependency.inbound.owner=is owner of
4523sync.dependency.lf.donorsubtype=is donor in
4524sync.dependency.emailtemplate.ccrecipient=used in CC recipient list in
4525sync.dependency.subtype.owner=is owner of
4526sync.dependency.lf.link=contains
4527sync.dependency.lf.default=used in default value of
4528sync.dependency.team.leader=is team leader of
4529sync.dependency.emailtemplate.team=used in
4530sync.dependency.record.of.subtype=is subtype of
4531sync.dependency.record.keycolumn=is key column in
4532sync.dependency.emailaction.template=used by
4533sync.dependency.workflow.action=used in WF of
4534sync.dependency.workflow.guard=used in WF guard of
4535sync.dependency.linkedaction.action=linked to
4536sync.dependency.emailtemplate.senderinbound=is sender inbound in
4537sync.dependency.emailtemplate.replytoinbound=is reply-to inbound in
4538sync.dependency.record.of.table=contains
4539sync.dependency.column.billingsummary=used in
4540sync.dependency.column.billinglink=contains
4541sync.dependency.column.parent=is parent of
4542sync.dependency.column.relatedtable=used as related table in
4543sync.dependency.column.relatedcolumn=used in definition of related table in
4544sync.dependency.calculation.sourcecolumn=used as calculation source in
4545sync.dependency.calculation.relatedcolumn=used as source field in
4546sync.dependency.calculation.relatedtable=used as source table in
4547sync.dependency.view.column=used in
4548sync.dependency.column.view=used in
4549sync.dependency.conversionaction.settings=used by
4550sync.dependency.conversionaction.conversion.corrupted.error=One of conversion actions is corrupted. Run Setup/Sync/Verify KB for details
4551sync.dependency.conversionaction.table=used by
4552sync.dependency.conversionaction.column=used by
4553sync.dependency.ocraction.column=used by
4554sync.dependency.redlineaction.column=used by
4555sync.dependency.pdfmergeaction.column=used by
4556sync.dependency.conversion.column=used in
4557sync.dependency.subtype.column=is column of
4558sync.dependency.subtype.search=is default search for
4559sync.dependency.subtype.icon=is icon for
4560sync.dependency.column.choice=used by
4561sync.dependency.column.choice_parent=used for choice dependency in
4562sync.dependency.column.emailtemplate=used in
4563sync.dependency.configuration.element=used in
4564sync.dependency.conditionaction.search=used in
4565sync.dependency.conditionaction.action=is part of
4566sync.dependency.choicetable.subtype=used in
4567sync.dependency.emailtemplate.fieldtosend=used in "Fields to send" of
4568sync.dependency.inbound.sender=used as Sender in
4569sync.dependency.outbound.table=used for Campaign in
4570sync.dependency.outbound.campaignfield=used for Campaign in
4571sync.dependency.outbound.search=used for Campaign in
4572sync.dependency.conversion.source=used as source in
4573sync.dependency.conversion.target=used as target in
4574sync.dependency.questionnaire.question_table=is question table for
4575sync.dependency.questionnaire.question_column=is question column for
4576sync.dependency.questionnaire.survey_subtype=used in survey for
4577sync.dependency.questionnaire.survey_column=used in survey for
4578sync.dependency.questionnaire.popup_subtype=used for pop-up in survey for
4579sync.dependency.questionnaire.popup_column=used for pop-up in survey for
4580sync.dependency.questionnaire.action=used in survey for
4581sync.dependency.questionnaire.answer_column=used as answer in survey for
4582sync.dependency.field.linked_column_table=contains column linked to
4583sync.dependency.field.linked_column=linked to
4584sync.dependency.field.edit_restriction=used for edit restriction in
4585sync.dependency.inbound.message=is part of
4586sync.dependency.mapping.subtype=used in
4587sync.dependency.outbound.inbound=used in
4588sync.dependency.outbound.tooptionstoemailvalue=used in
4589sync.dependency.outbound.emailfieldfromrules=used in
4590sync.dependency.outbound.userfieldfromrules=used in
4591sync.dependency.outbound.userfieldreplytorules=used in
4592sync.dependency.outbound.emailfieldreplytorules=used in
4593sync.dependency.outbound.userfieldfromusersent=used in
4594sync.dependency.outbound.emailfieldfromusersent=used in
4595sync.dependency.outbound.userfieldfromeuisusersent=used in
4596sync.dependency.outbound.emailfieldfromeuiusersent=used in
4597sync.dependency.outbound.userfieldreplytousersent=used in
4598sync.dependency.outbound.emailfieldreplytousersent=used in
4599sync.dependency.outbound.tooptionstouservalue=used in
4600sync.dependency.outbound.tooptionseuitoemailvalue=used in
4601sync.dependency.outbound.tooptionseuitouservalue=used in
4602sync.dependency.outbound.tooptionsincludefields=used in
4603sync.dependency.outbound.onemailsendingincludeemailslist=used in
4604sync.dependency.outbound.onemailsendingincludeuserlists=used in
4605sync.dependency.outbound.emailfieldformarketing=used in
4606sync.dependency.outbound.statusfieldformarketing=used in
4607sync.dependency.outbound.unsubscribefieldname=used in
4608sync.dependency.outbound.bouncedaddressfromcontact=used in
4609sync.dependency.outbound.bouncedaddressfromfield=used in
4610sync.dependency.personalinbound.field=used in
4611sync.dependency.personalinbound.search=used in
4612sync.dependency.personalinbound.subtype=used in
4613sync.dependency.rule.action=used in
4614sync.dependency.rule.search=used in
4615sync.dependency.rule.subtype=used in
4616sync.dependency.rule.team=used in
4617sync.dependency.colorscheme.image=used in
4618sync.dependency.search.column=used in
4619sync.dependency.search.sortcolumn=used for sorting in
4620sync.dependency.search.view=used in
4621sync.dependency.search.search=is part of
4622sync.dependency.team.table=is table for
4623sync.dependency.team.superteam=is parent team of
4624sync.dependency.column.action=used in
4625sync.dependency.column.icon=used in
4626sync.dependency.inbound.choice=used in
4627sync.dependency.linkedaction.subtype=used by
4628sync.dependency.linkedaction.partnersubtype=used by
4629sync.dependency.questionnaire.question_record=used as question record in
4630sync.dependency.column.compound=is part of
4631sync.dependency.updateaction.column=used in
4632sync.dependency.updateaction.table=used in
4633sync.dependency.formula.constant=used in formula in
4634sync.dependency.formula.contacts=used in formula in
4635sync.dependency.column.creditcard=used by
4636sync.dependency.column.relationship.diagram=used by
4637sync.report.added.system=added by system
4638sync.report.added.user=added by user
4639sync.report.none=There is no debug information in entity set, to generate report you need to re-create entity set.
4640sync.report.entity.table=Table
4641sync.report.entity.subtype=Subtype
4642sync.report.entity.field=Field
4643sync.report.entity.group=Group
4644sync.report.entity.team=Team
4645sync.report.entity.search=Saved Search
4646sync.report.entity.record=Record
4647sync.report.entity.template=Email Template
4648sync.report.entity.action=Action
4649sync.report.entity.inbound=Inbound
4650sync.report.entity.view=View
4651sync.report.entity.choice=Choice List
4652sync.report.entity.conversion=Conversion
4653sync.report.entity.rule=Rule
4654sync.report.entity.outbound=Outbound
4655sync.report.entity.syncconfig=Sync Configuration
4656sync.report.other=Other reports:
4657sync.report.subtypes=Subtypes
4658sync.report.columns=Columns
4659sync.report.groups=Groups
4660sync.report.teams=Teams
4661fields.relationship.diagram.title=Relationship Diagram
4662fields.display.relationship.diagram.displayas.choose=Choose image
4663fields.display.relationship.diagram.displayas.hint=Select the appearance of the field.
4664fields.display.relationship.diagram.displayas.image=Image hyperlink
4665fields.display.relationship.diagram.displayas.label=The field is displayed as
4666fields.display.relationship.diagram.displayas.text=Button Label
4667fields.display.relationship.diagram.control.show.hint=Show Relationships Diagram
4668fields.options.relationship.diagram.parent.lf.hint=Choose a linked field or Related Table that holds the &quot;parent&quot; records in the hierarchy.
4669fields.options.relationship.diagram.parent.lf.label=Choose the Table / Relationship that identifies the Parent record(s):
4670fields.options.relationship.diagram.parent.field.unique.label=Choose the Field that uniquely defines the Parent Record:
4671fields.options.relationship.diagram.relation.name.label=Choose a field that holds Relationship Name:
4672fields.options.relationship.diagram.relation.name.custom=or show this label:
4673fields.options.relationship.diagram.search.label=Choose a Saved Search to further filter the records included:
4674fields.options.relationship.diagram.child.lf.hint=Choose a linked field or Related Table that holds the &quot;child&quot; records in the hierarchy.
4675fields.options.relationship.diagram.child.lf.label=Choose the Table / Relationship that identifies the Child records:
4676fields.options.relationship.diagram.child.field.unique.label=Choose the Field that uniquely defines the Child Record:
4677fields.display.relationship.diagram.maxlevelup.hint=Use this option to designate how many levels above the main item should be displayed by default on the diagram.
4678fields.display.relationship.diagram.maxlevelup.label=Select the number of levels above to show:
4679fields.display.relationship.diagram.maxleveldown.hint=Use this option to designate how many levels below the main item should be displayed by default on the diagram.
4680fields.display.relationship.diagram.maxleveldown.label=Select the number of levels below to show:
4681fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.label.hint=Choose the field to use for the item from which the diagram is launched
4682fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.label.label=Choose the text field for the selected item's label:
4683fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.label.default=Select Field
4684fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.icon.hint=Choose the field to use for the Main Item icon
4685fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.icon.label=Choose the image field for the main item's icon:
4686fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.icon.default=Select Field
4687fields.display.relationship.diagram.parent.label.hint=Choose the field to use for the Name of the Parent Items in the display<br><br>It is best to use the Summary field for the table holding the parent values.
4688fields.display.relationship.diagram.parent.label.label=Name of Parent Items in Diagram:
4689fields.display.relationship.diagram.parent.label.summary.label=Use the table's Summary Field as the name
4690fields.display.relationship.diagram.parent.label.field.label=Select a field to use for the item name:
4691fields.display.relationship.diagram.parent.icon.field.label=Select the image field for the item icon:
4692fields.display.relationship.diagram.child.label.hint=Choose the field to use for the Name of the Child Items in the display<br><br>It is best to use the Summary field for the table holding the child values.
4693fields.display.relationship.diagram.child.label.label=Name of Child Items in Diagram:
4694fields.display.relationship.diagram.child.label.summary.label=Use the table's Summary Field as the name
4695fields.display.relationship.diagram.child.label.field.label=Select a field to use for the item name:
4696fields.display.relationship.diagram.child.icon.field.label=Select the image field for the item icon:
4697fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.item.style.hint=Define the style for the main item in the diagram
4698fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.item.style.label=Choose the Style for the Main Item:
4699fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.item.background.label=Background
4700fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.item.border.label=Border-size, Border-radius, Border-color
4701fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.item.padding.label=Padding
4702fields.display.relationship.diagram.main.item.font.label=Font-size, Font-color
4703fields.display.relationship.diagram.other.item.style.hint=Choose the style for the other items in the diagram
4704fields.display.relationship.diagram.other.item.style.label=Choose the Style for the Other Items:
4705fields.display.relationship.diagram.other.item.background.label=Background
4706fields.display.relationship.diagram.other.item.border.label=Border-size, Border-radius, Border-color
4707fields.display.relationship.diagram.other.item.padding.label=Padding
4708fields.display.relationship.diagram.other.item.font.label=Font-size, Font-color
4709fields.display.relationship.diagram.layout.hint=You can select from different layout options for the relationship diagram.<br><br>The following options are available:<br><br>Vertical Hierarchy: displays the elements in a vertical tree pattern according to their upstream and downstream relationships. This is the default value for the initial display of the map.<br><br>Horizontal Hierarchy: displays the elements in a horizontal tree pattern according to their upstream and downstream relationships.
4710fields.display.relationship.diagram.layout.label=Choose layout:
4711fields.display.relationship.diagram.layout.vertical=Vertical
4712fields.display.relationship.diagram.layout.horizontal=Horizontal
4713fields.display.relationship.diagram.layout.group=Group
4714fields.display.relationship.diagram.edges.hint=You can select from different L&F options to display relations.
4715fields.display.relationship.diagram.edges.label=Choose L&amp;F scheme to display relations:
4716fields.display.relationship.diagram.edges.rounded=Rounded
4717fields.display.relationship.diagram.edges.wavy=Wavy
4718fields.display.relationship.diagram.edges.metro=Metro
4719relationship.diagram.error.value.absent=Can't find relationship diagram value for the chosen record.
4720tableview.action.saveall=Save Changes
4721tableview.action.cancelall=Cancel Changes
4722tableview.action.confcancelall=Are you sure you want to discard all changes?
4723access.main.2fasetup.button.hint=Click <span class=SIBoldMark>Two-Factor Authentication</span> to configure which users must confirm their identity using a second method when logging in. Supported methods include Google Authenticator, SMS messaging and custom API\u2019s.
4724access.main.2fasetup.button.label=Two-Factor Authentication
4725access.main.2fasetup.wzd.hint=You may exclude groups or specific users from Two-Factor Authentication, such as those with fewer access permissions in the system.<br><br>To exclude users, enter one login per line. (Example: admin <br>guest)<br><br>If a user belongs to both excluded and non-excluded groups, they must provide two factor authentication.<br><br>New groups will require two-factor authentication until they are specifically excluded here.
4726access.main.2fasetup.wzd.req2fa.hint=Enable Two-Factor Authentication to require users to provide two forms of authentication in order to log in: a password and verification code sent to a mobile device.
4727access.main.2fasetup.wzd.req2fa.label=Require two-factor authentication
4728access.main.2fasetup.wzd.exceptgroups=Exclude groups
4729access.main.2fasetup.wzd.exceptusers=Exclude users
4730access.main.2fasetup.wzd.excepthint=You may exclude groups or specific users from two-factor authentication, such as those with fewer access permissions in the system.<br>To exclude users, enter one login per line. (Example: admin <br>guest)<br><br>If a user belongs to both excluded and non-excluded groups, they must provide two factor authentication.<br>New groups will require two-factor authentication until they are specifically excluded here.
4731access.main.2fasetup.wzd.whenhint=Choose whether authentication is required for every login attempt, or only the first login from a particular device.<br>Optionally choose an expiration period after which users will be required to reauthenticate.
4732access.main.2fasetup.wzd.everylogin=For every login
4733access.main.2fasetup.wzd.firstlogin=For first login from a particular device
4734access.main.2fasetup.wzd.renew=Renew authentication after
4735access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod=Authentication Method
4736access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod.sms=Text message (SMS)
4737access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod.googleauth=Google Authenticator
4738access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod.sendsms=Send initial secret code by SMS
4739access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod.sendemail=Send initial secret code by Email
4740access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod.subject=Google Authenticator secret key
4741access.main.2fasetup.wzd.authmethod.hint=Choose Text message (SMS) or Google Authenticator.<br>If Text message (SMS) is selected, a verification code is sent to the number in the Cell Phone field in the user\u2019s record.<br>If Google Authenticator is selected, users must download the Google Authenticator app to their mobile device and create an account with a secret code when prompted.<br>Google Authenticator is compatible with Android, BlackBerry, and iOS devices.
4742access.main.2fasetup.wzd.noaccount=An SMS account is needed for two factor authentication. Please go to Setup -> Email and SMS -> SMS Services -> SMS account and set one up before returning to this dialog.
4743access.main.out-of-licenses-email.button.hint=Click <span class=SIBoldMark>Out of Licenses Email</span> to configure the ability to notify someone if a user is prevented from logging in due to no licenses.
4744access.main.out-of-licenses-email.button.label=Out of Licenses Email
4745account.disable.label=Disable Account
4746account.disable.self=You are not allowed to disable your own account. You can disable the {0} account by creating another user in the admin group and logging in as that user.
4747account.disable.success={0} accounts disabled successfully.
4748account.disable.warn=The selected accounts will be disabled and the users logged out. They will not be able to login until their passwords are manually reset.
4749constant.days_to_support_rc4_key.label=Security:Days to continue support of old key
4750constant.days_to_support_rc4_key.description=Days to continue support of old key
4751kb.admin.key.regeneration.hint=Manual will require you to add the key. Automatic will regenerate and register the new key once the server cache is cleared.
4752kb.admin.key.regeneration.label=Encryption Key Regeneration
4753kb.admin.key.regeneration.manual=Manual
4754kb.admin.key.regeneration.auto=Automatic
4755field.duplicate.err.msg=The field {0} must have a unique value, but there is already a record in the system with a value of {1} for {0}
4756calendar.editquestion.text=This event is scheduled to be repeated. Do you wish to edit all instances of this event or just the current occurrence?
4757calendar.editquestion.onlythis=Edit current occurrence only
4758calendar.editquestion.all=Edit all occurrences
4759sync.wizard.editmapping.fields.mapping.lastmodified=Last Modified
4760sync.wizard.edit.mapping.mapping.external.structure.filtering=External Structure Filtering
4761sync.esatype.mysql=MySQL
4762sync.error.conversion.notaappendtext=Can't cast External value "{0}" to append only text value
4763sms.account.id=ID
4764sms.account.name=Name
4765sms.account.label=Label
4766sms.account.description=Description
4767sms.account.prefix=Common:
4768sms.account.error.nonunique=an SMS Account with name {0} already exisits for the project. Please provide a unique name.
4769sms.account.general.name.hint=Enter a unique immutable account name.
4770sms.account.general.name.label=Account Name
4771sms.account.general.label.hint=Provide a label that will be shown to users working with this account.<br>The account label and description are available for localization.
4772sms.account.general.label.label=Account Label
4773sms.account.general.description.hint=Provide a description of how this account is used.
4774sms.account.general.description.label=Account Description
4775sms.account.twilio.sid.hint=Enter your account (subaccount) SID. To obtain your account, please visit Twilio.com and purchase Programmable SMS Messaging service. For example, at https://www.twilio.com/try-twilio, sign up for the SMS Product and specify that you are building Two Factor Authentication.
4776sms.account.twilio.sid.label=SID
4777sms.account.twilio.msid.hint=Enter your MSID. You can obtain it from your Twilio service account. At least one of MSID or From must be settled.
4778sms.account.twilio.msid.label=MSID
4779sms.account.twilio.from.hint=Enter the telephone number or user-friendly number that will appear as the sending number when users receive the SMS message.<br>Twilio supports a flexible From parameter. It may be the phone number associated with the Twilio account, a short number or even an alias name.
4780sms.account.twilio.from.label=From
4781sms.account.twilio.token.hint=Enter your Twillio account (subaccount) authentication token. You can obtain it from your Twilio service account.
4782sms.account.twilio.token.label=Authentication Token
4783sms.account.error.from=At least one value for From or MSID must be filled!
4784sms.account.error.open=Can't open SMS account ID:{0} because of {1}
4785sms.account.error.save=Can't save SMS account Name:{0} because of {1}
4786sms.account.error.notfound.id=Can't find SMS Account with ID:{0}
4787sms.account.error.notfound.name=Can't find SMS Account with Name:{0}
4788sms.account.error.notfound.nameproject=Can't find SMS Account with Name:{0} in current project.
4789sms.account.error.notfound.nameadmin=Can't find SMS Account with Name:{0} in admin project.
4790sms.account.error.notfound.2fany=No SMS accounts for use by 2FA were found in either the admin KB or the {0} KB.
4791sms.account.error.send=Error during SMS sending: {0}
4792sms.account.error.account.mandatory=Some mandatory fields of SMS account {0} are empty!
4793sms.account.error.cellmessage=Both message and cellphone must be not NULL!
4794sms.account.msg.created=SMS Account {0} is created successfully.
4795sms.account.msg.updated=SMS Account {0} is updated successfully.
4796sms.account.msg.deleted=SMS Account {0} is deleted.
4797sms.account.msg.test=This is test message sent from SMS account wizard
4798sms.account.error.wrongselection=Please select an account.
4799sms.account.error.misuse.mass=Account {0} is not allowed for Mass sending
4800sms.account.error.misuse.2fa=Account {0} is not allowed for Two Factor Authentication
4801sms.account.publish.label=Make available for all KBs
4802sms.account.publish.hint=This option makes the account available for all KBs on this server.<br>This does not permit anyone in those KBs to view the account credentials, but makes the name appear in drop-downs where they can select an account for two factor authentication or outbound SMS, depending on the usage defined above.
4803sms.account.use.mass=Mass communication
4804sms.account.use.2fa=Two-factor authentication
4805sms.account.use.hint=Define how this account is used.<br><br>The same account may not be used for both mass communication and two-factor authentication, since it could cause delays for users trying to log in.
4806sms.account.use.label=Usage:
4807sms.account.builtin.name=2FA Built-In Account
4808access.main.2fasetup.wzd.account.hint=Select an SMS account to use for two-factor authentication.<br><br>To configure SMS accounts, navigate to Setup > Email and SMS > SMS Services.
4809access.main.2fasetup.wzd.account.label=SMS account
4810sms.outbound.allowed.hint=Only these groups will see the SMS icon on the action bar allowing them to create new SMS messages. They will only be able to create, delete, and edit messages based on their group permissions on the All Communications table. Their ability to do so can be restricted for this specific table by removing their permissions here.
4811sms.outbound.allowed.label=These groups can see the icon to send SMS messages and the New SMS button in the Communications table:
4812sms.outbound.account.hint=Choose the SMS account to use for outbound communications on this table
4813sms.outbound.account.default=Use the default SMS account for outbound communications
4814sms.outbound.account.custom=Use this account
4815sms.outbound.account.sent=The test message was sent to the cell phone number.
4816sms.outbound.select.hint=Allow these groups to change the SMS account used when sending SMS messages manually.  This will allow the user to select a different account in the SMS dialogue.
4817sms.outbound.recipient.hint=Choose the default cell phone field to which the SMS message should be sent.<br><br>Note that the People table and subtables default Cell Phone field is the field used when a linked user is chosen.
4818sms.outbound.recipient.label=Default Recipient Cell Phone Number:
4819sms.outbound.recipient.field=Cell number for this field
4820sms.outbound.recipient.contact=Contact from this field
4821sms.outbound.recipient.none=None
4822sms.outbound.recipient.userdefined=User defined
4823sms.outbound.table.hint=Select the table for which you want to define outbound SMS options.
4824sms.outbound.subtable.text=You can propagate your settings to all subtables of a given table by selecting this checkbox. You might still need to edit the subtables\u2019 options to provide a different default outbound SMS account for each subtable.<br><br><span class=SIBoldMark>Warning:</span> A subtable\u2019s current settings might be overwritten if you edit the parent table and choose to propagate the settings down the hierarchy.
4825sms.outbound.msg.created=SMS Outbound was created successfully
4826sms.outbound.msg.updated=SMS Outbound was updated successfully
4827sms.outbound.bounced.hint=Choose what to do with bounced SMS messages.
4828sms.outbound.bounced.label=Address to send bounced SMS messages to:
4829sw2.no.user.available=No one is available to chat right now
4830recipient.mail.address=emails
4831recipient.mail.fields=fields
4832recipient.mail.users=users Ids
4833recipient.mail.teams=teams Ids
4834recipient.sms.address=phones
4835licenses.out-of-licenses-email.label=If no license is available to a user when he tries to login, choose what message to send.
4836licenses.out-of-licenses-email.teams=Teams
4837licenses.out-of-licenses-email.users=Users
4838licenses.out-of-licenses-email.from=From
4839licenses.out-of-licenses-email.from.default=licensing@agiloft.com
4840licenses.out-of-licenses-email.subject=Subject
4841licenses.out-of-licenses-email.subject.default=No licenses are available
4842licenses.out-of-licenses-email.message=Message
4843licenses.out-of-licenses-email.message.default=A user: $login has tried to login and no licenses are available.
4844rejected.teams.notification.subject=Sending to team was rejected
4845rejected.teams.notification.body="Dear admin,\n\n\n\nAn attempt was made to send the attached email to the teams {0} for which the field \"Allow emails to be sent to this team\" is set to No.\n\n\n\nAs a safeguard, this field is generally set to No for teams such as the Customer  team where an email to  the team would go out to your entire user base.\n\n\n\nYou can remove the safeguard by changing the value of \"Allow emails to be sent to this team\" to Yes in the Team table, but this is generally not recommended.\n\n\n\nThis safeguard does not prevent you from emailing these users deliberately,  it just prevents you from emailing them accidentally by sending email to their team. So the recommended way to email to all these users is to select them in the People table and send the email from there.\n\n\n\nBest regards,\n\nSystem Message"
4846constant.defpasswd.label=Security:Default Password
4847constant.defpasswd.description=This parameter specifies the default password that is provided on the login screen so that an administrator can login immediately after installing the product.
4848currency.converter.wrong.currency.code=Wrong currency code "{0}"
4849currency.converter.error=Currency conversion failed {0}
4850constant.alloweditfromurl.label=Allow Direct File Editing
4851constant.alloweditfromurl.description=Direct File Editing allows Office documents to be opened from file fields and saved directly back to the server. This feature is in development and not yet supported for production use.
4852constant.directedit.checkoutlocktimeout.label=Timeout for File Checkout Lock
4853constant.directedit.checkoutlocktimeout.description=If a file is checked out through direct editing and is not checked in, this variable defines the number of minutes it will remain checked out before the checkout expires.
4854constant.deprecateoldfieldoptions.label=Deprecate Old File Options
4855constant.deprecateoldfieldoptions.description=Set this variable to Yes to hide several deprecated options in the File Field setup screen that have been replaced by newer features.
4856fields.rules.file.directediting.hint=Direct File Editing allows users to open MS Office files, edit locally, and save back to the attached file field. For more information, see online help <help context="/index_Direct_Edit.jspx.html"/>
4857fields.rules.file.directediting.label=Direct File Editing
4858fields.rules.file.directediting.retainLast1=Retain Last
4859fields.rules.file.directediting.retainLast2=Versions of each file
4860fields.rules.file.directediting.retainAll=Retain all versions
4861fields.permissions.versioning.releaseLock.hint=Users in these groups will be able to release a lock on a checked out file in order to save or check in a new file, even though another user has checked out the file.  Usually this would happen by opening a file for direct editing and then failing to save it back.  There is an automatic timeout that will release the lock, by default after 24 hours, but in case it is more urgent, these groups can release it sooner.
4862fields.permissions.versioning.releaseLock.label=Allows users in these groups to release the lock on a checked out file:
4863error.file_attachment.edit_column.illegalDirectEditOption="Direct editing" option requires "Versioning" to be enabled
4864popup.directedit.option.download_save=Download/Save
4865popup.directedit.option.open_view=View File
4866popup.directedit.option.edit_checkout=Edit and Checkout
4867popup.directedit.option.release_checkout_lock=Release Checkout Lock
4868duplicate.kbname.warning.message=Warning: The specified KB name of {0} matches the name of an existing KB. So this import will overwrite, i.e DELETE, the existing KB. <br><br>If you sure that you want to delete the existing KB, click OK. Otherwise click Cancel and either rename the existing KB or choose a different name for the KB that you importing.
4869fields.rules.file.directediting.yes=Allow direct editing of MS Office document and directly save back to the file field
4870fields.rules.file.directediting.no=Don\u2019t allow
4871exception.directedit.too_long_path=The length of the path is too long to be opened by MS Office.\nThe total length of the path and the file name, including file name extension, should not exceeds {0} characters.
4872exception.directedit.too_long_path_file_name=The filename is too long to be opened by MS Office. It needs to be {0} characters or less.